Tigard Police Addition and Remodel Specifications - September 1996 ■ TIOARD POLICE ■
ADDITION AND REMODEL
specifications
<l i
i
HDN Architects
215 NW Park Ave.
Portland, OR 97209
503/224-0110
Fax 224-5948
w, project number
P96-0702
MW
Aw
SPECIFICATIONS
rr
FOR
POLICE DEPARTMENT ADDITION AND REMODEL
TIGARD, OREGON
SEPTEMBER 1996
�r
Architects Project No. P96-0702
A R C H I T E C T S
H D N Architects, P.C.
215 NW Park Ave.
Portland, OR 97209
(503) 224-0110, FAX (503) 224-5948
Russell Hanson, Project Principal
S T R U C T U R A L E N G I N E E R S
James G. Pierson Engineering, Inc.
w+ 408 SW Second Ave. , Room 505
Portland, OR 97204
(503) 226-1286, FAX (503) 226-3130
Jerry Estoup, Project Engineer
E L E C T R I C A L E N G I N E E R S
Interface Engineering
6542 SE Lake Road
Milwaukie, OR 97222
(503) 659-6394
H V A C
Accipio, Inc.
4120 SE International Way Ste. A2213
.. Milwaukie, OR 97222
(503) 652-9654, Fax (503) 652-9652
Aw
O W N E R' S R E P R E S E N T A T I V E
City of Tigard
13125 SW Hall Blvd.
Tigard, OR 97223
Greg Berry, City Engineer
rr (503) 639-4171
rr
POLICE DEPARTMENT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0
Advertisement for Bid
" Instruction for Bidders
Proposal
Performance and Payment Bond
Contract
Prevailing wage Rates
General Conditions
General Requirements
DIVISION 1
Section 01005 Summary of Work
Section 01400 Quality Control
Section 01500 Construction Facilitiies and Temporary Controls
Section 01532 Tree and Plant Protection
Section 01700 Contract Closeout
DIVISION 2
+rw Section 02072 Minor Demolition for Remodeling
Section 02200 Earthwork
Section 02222 Excavation
Section 02223 Backfilling
Section 02510 Asphaltic Concrete Paving
DIVISION 3
Section 03001 Concrete
DIVISION 4
+.. Section 04320 Veneer Masonry System
DIVISION 5
Section 0550 Metal Fabrications
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD Contents - 1
rr
DIVISION 6:
Section 06001 Carpentry Work ice►
Section 06112 Framing and Sheathing
Section 06114 Wood Blocking and Curbing
Section 06196 Plywood Web Joists
Section 06200 Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7 :
Section 07212 Board Insulation
Section 07213 Batt and Blanket Insulation
Section 07240 Coated Insulation System
Section 07533 Elastomeric Sheet Roofing-Mechanically
Attached-Conventional
Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Section 07710 Prefabricated Roof Specialties
Section 07900 Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8
Section 08111 Standard Steel Relite Windows, Doors, and Frames
Section 08210 Wood Doors
Section 08520 Aluminum Windows System
Section 08712 Door Hardware
Section 08800 Glazing
DIVISION 9:
Section 09260 Gypsum Board Systems
Section 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
Section 09688 Carpet-Glue Down and Rubber Base
Section 09900 Painting
DIVISION 10 :
NONE
DIVISION 11 :
NONE
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD Contents - 2
w DIVISION 12
aw Section 12512 Horizontal Louver -Blinds
DIVISION 15
Jw
Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Section 15250 Insulation
Section 15300 Fire Protection
Section 15400 Plumbing
Section 15780 Packaged Air Conditioning Units
Section 15880 Air Distrubution
Section 15950 Controls
Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
DIVISION 16
Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements
Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods
Section 16400 Service and Distribution
Section 16500 Lighting
Section 16721 Fire Alarm System
Section 16906 Occupancy Sensors .
�w
wr
ism
iw SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD Contents - 3
0
ri
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
REMODEL A PORTION OF THE EXISTING CITY POLICE
DEPARTMENT AND CONSTRUCT 3,185 SQ. FT. ADDITION
Written, sealed bids will be received by the Engineering Department, City of Tigard, 13125 SW Hall
Boulevard, Tigard, OR 97223, until 2:00 o'clock PM November 20, 1997, at which time they will be
publicly opened and read. Proposals shall be clearly marked "POLICE DEPARTMENT REMODEL"
and also show the date and time of bid opening.
w�
The project includes approximately the following major items:
+ The work contemplated consists of the addition of approximately 3,185 sq. ft. to the City
Hall as the at the Police Department and remodeling,along with landscaping and parking
modifications and minor demolition.
ww
Plans and specifications may be obtained from Ford Graphics,401 NW 14th Avenue,Portland,
Oregon for a non-refundable charge of$25.00 each. Copies will be mailed for an additional fee of$5.00
per set of plans and specifications.
Plans and specifications may be examined at the following Plan Centers: Daily Journal of Commerce,
w McGraw-Hill Construction Data, Impact Plan Center, Oregon Contractors Plan Center, Salem
Contractors Exchange, and Southwest Washington Contractors Association.
All bids will be publicly opened at the designated time and place. They shall be intact with the contract
w documents and must be accompanied by a bond, postal money order, certified or cashier's check from the
bidder in the amount of ten percent of the bid as security.
'm The bidder shall be registered with the Oregon Construction Contractors Board prior to bid opening.
References may be required if no previous work has been performed for the City.
60 The successful bidder will be required to execute a formal contract and performance bond in form as
approved by the City's attorney.
+f+ The bidder shall comply with the requirements of the prevailing wage law in ORS 279.350.
The City may reject any bid not in compliance with all prescribed public bidding procedures and
+w requirements,and may reject for good cause any or all bids upon a finding of the City that it is in the
public interest to do so.
ism Daily Journal of Commerce Publish Date-November 4& 6, 1997
Tigard Times Publish Date-November 6, 1997
r.
aw
W
aw
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Form of Proposal The Proposal shall be either a lump sum or unit price basis as detailed in the
proposal section. If the project is on a lump sum basis, a single price will be entered at the
appropriate place in the Proposal. Modifying the lump sum price to include cost adjustments for
additions or deletions will be done by Change Order. Payment will be made for the work actually
performed as specified in the Technical Specifications. The City of Tigard reserves the right to
increase or decrease the amount of any class of work as may be deemed necessary. If such increase
or decrease in quantities exceed five percent (5%) of the total estimated work, either the City of
Tigard or the Contractor may request that a Change Order be negotiated.
Document Interpretation: The Contract Documents governing the work proposed herein consist of
the Drawings and all material bound herewith. These Contract Documents are intended to be
mutually cooperative and to provide all details reasonably required for the execution of the proposed
work. Any person contemplating the submission of a Proposal shall have thoroughly examined all
of the various parts of these Documents, and should there be any doubt as to the meaning or intent
of said Contract documents, the Bidder shall request of the Architect/Engineer, in writing (at least
6 working days prior to bid opening) an interpretation thereof. Any interpretation of change in said
Contract Documents will be made only in writing, in the form of Addenda to the Documents which
will be furnished to all Bidders receiving a set of Documents. Bidders shall submit with their
proposals, or indicate receipt of, all Addenda. The Owner will not be responsible for any other
explanation or interpretations of said Documents.
WN
Examination of Work Conditions and Contract Documents: It is understood that the Bidder, before
signing his Proposal, has made a careful examination of all conditions pertaining to the work and of
the Contract Document; that he has fully informed himself as to the quality of materials and character
of work required; and that he has made a careful examination of the location and condition of the
work and the sources of supply for materials.
Each Bidder shall inform himself of, and the Bidder awarded a Contract shall comply with Federal,
State, and local laws, statues, and ordinances relative to the execution of the work. This requirement
includes, but is not limited to, applicable regulations concerning minimum wage rates,
nondiscrimination in the employment of labor, protection of public and employee safety and health,
environmental protection,the protection of natural resources,fire protection, burning and nonburning
requirements, permits, fees, and similar subjects.
�.. Site Conditions: Bidder shall inspect the site with special attention directed to conditions of work.
Failure to do so will not relieve the successful Bidder of his-obligation to enter in to a Contract and
complete the contemplated work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents.
Subsurface Conditions: Test pits or test holes have not been excavated in the area of this project.
Bidder shall make his own investigation and analysis of subsurface conditions.
w.
AW
i..
Submitution of Materials: Except for equipment selected by the Agency, whenever any material,
construction method, product, or process is specified by manufacturer, proprietary name, or catalog
number, such specification shall be the material or process desired. This procedure is not to be
construed as eliminating other products of equal or better quality when these products are fully
suitable for the proposed application in the sole professional judgment of the City of Tigard.
References to all such proprietary items shall be deemed to be followed by the words "or as
approved" or"approved equal." The Bidder or his supplier may submit complete data to the City of
Tigard for consideration of another material, construction method, product, or process which shall
be substantially equal to that specified.
Bidding Documents and Contract: The "Bidding Documents" (also referred to as the "Contract
Documents" herein)consist of the Advertisement for Bids, the Instructions to Bidders, the Proposal,
Bonds, Contract, General Conditions, Special Specifications, Standard Details and all modifications
thereto. Said documents shall form the Contract.
Preparation of Proposals: Proposals shall be submitted on the Proposal forms that the City of Tigard
issues. All blank spaces in the Proposal form must be filled out in ink, in both words and figures
where required. In the event to discrepancy,words shall govern over figures. No modifications shall ++
be made in the phraseology of the forms.
Any Proposal may be deemed nonresponsive which contains omissions, erasures, alterations, or
additions of any kind, or prices uncalled for, or in which any of the prices are obviously unbalanced,
or which in any manner shall fail to conform to the conditions stated in the bidding documents. No
The Bidder shall sign his Proposal in the blank space provided therefore. Proposals made by
corporations of partnerships shall contain names and addresses of the principal officers or partners.
If the Proposal is made by a corporation, it must be acknowledged by one of the principal officers
thereof, or if made by a partnership, by one of the partners.
Bid Security: Proposal must be accompanied by a certified check drawn on a bank in good standing,
or a Bid Bond in the form bound herewith issued by a surety company authorized to issue such bonds
in the State of Oregon, in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the j
Proposal submitted. This check or Bid Bond shall be given as a guarantee that if awarded the
Contract for construction of the project, the successful Bidder will execute the attached Agreement
and furnish a properly executed Performance and Payment Bond in the full amount of the Contract
price within ten (10) calendar days after notification of acceptance.
The City of Tigard reserves the right to retain the bid security of the three (3) lowest Bidders until
the successful Bidder has signed and delivered the Agreement-and furnished the required Performance
and Payment Bond. Upon failure of the lowest Bidder to sign and deliver the Agreement and said
bond,the second bid may be accepted by the City of Tigard; and upon failure of the second Bidder '
to provide the required documents, the third bid may be accepted.
Bid securities in the form of a certified check will be returned after the canvass of bids, except those
Wr
of the three (3) lowest Bidders, which will be retained and returned within ten (10) days after the
Agreement has been executed or other disposition made in accordance with the provisions stated
herein. Bid Bonds will be returned in the same manner as certified checks if the Bidder so requests.
Submission ofPrODOsal• All proposals must be submitted prior to the time and at the place prescribed
in the Advertisement for Bids. Proposals shall be submitted in a completely sealed envelope
addressed to the Agency with the name of the Bidder, the name of the improvement for which the
Proposal is being submitted, and the time and date of the bid opening plainly written on the outside
of the envelope.
Modification of Withdrawal of Proposal: Bids may be withdrawn or modified at any time prior to
opening upon written or telegraphic request of the Bidder. A request for modification should not
reveal the bid price, but should indicate the amount of increase or decrease the Bidder wished to
make in a bid item or a total bid. No bid may be withdrawn after any bid has been opened.
.w
Rejection of Bids: The City of Tigard reserves the right to reject all or any proposals not in
compliance with contract documents and to waive any informalities and/or irregularities in said
proposals. Bids may be rejected if they show any alteration of form, admissions not called for,
conditions or alternate bids, irregularities of any kind, a clause in which the Bidder reserves the right
to accept or reject a contract awarded to him, or if they are not in conformity with the law. Bids in
which prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected.
Basis of Award: The award will be made by the Owner on the basis of that Proposal from the lowest
responsive, responsible, qualified Bidder. When projects are paid for in part with Federal funds, the
award will be made on the basis of that Proposal submitted by the responsive, responsible, qualified
Bidder submitting the lowest proposal acceptable to the financing agency.
If applicable, all schedules will be let under Contract, or as best serves the interests of the Owner.
If, at the time this Contract is to be awarded, the total of the lowest acceptable Proposal exceeds the
funds then estimated by the Owner as available, the Owner may reject all bids or take such other
action as best serves the Owner's interests.
Award of Contract: Within sixty(60) days after the opening of Proposals, unless otherwise stated
o, in the INVITATION TO BID or SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS of these Documents, the
Owner will accept one of the Proposals or will act in accordance with BASIS OF AWARD, above.
The acceptance of the Proposal will be by written notice of award, mailed or delivered to the office
.� designated in the Proposal. In the event of failure of the lowest responsible qualified Bidder to sign
and return the Contract with acceptable Performance and'Payment Bond, as prescribed herein, the
Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest responsible qualified Bidder. Such award, if made,
0W will be made within sixty (60) days after the opening of Proposals.
Execution of Contract and Notice to Proceed: The successful Bidder shall, within 10 days, not
including Sundays and legal holidays, after receiving notice of award, sign and deliver to the Owner
the Contract hereto attached together with
o.
acceptable bonds as required in these Documents. Within fifteen(15) days, not including Sundays
and legal holidays, after receiving the signed Contract with
acceptable bonds and insurance certificates from the successful Bidder, the Owner will issue a Notice to
to Proceed outlining the Time of Completion of the Contract and the Owner's authorized agent will
sign the Contract.
Performance and Payment Bond: The successful Bidder shall file with the Owner a Performance and
Payment Bond on the form bound herewith in the full amount of the Contract price, as security for
the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of persons supplying labor and materials for 40
the construction of the work, and to cover all guarantees against defective workmanship or materials,
or both, for a period of 1 year after the date of final acceptance of the work by the Owner. The
surety furnishing this bond shall have a sound financial standing and a record of service satisfactory 44
to the Owner and shall be authorized to do business in the State of Oregon.
The Attorney-in-Fact(Resident Agent)who executes this Performance and Payment Bond in behalf wry
of the Surety must attach a notarized copy of his power-of-attorney as evidence of his authority to
bind the Surety on the date of execution of the bond.
Failure to Execute Contract and Furnish Bond: If the successful Bidder fails to promptly and
properly execute the Contract and furnish the Performance and Payment Bond, it is agreed that the
Owner will suffer certain damages which are difficult to ascertain and it is further agreed that the bid
security is a reasonable estimate of such damages. In the event the successful Bidder so fails to
execute the Contract and provide the bond,the bid security shall be retained by the Owner's liquidated
damage.
Time of Completion: The time of completion of the work to be performed under this Contract is the
essence of the Contract. Delays and extensions of time may be allowed in accordance with the
provisions stated in Section GENERAL CONDITIONS. The time allowed for the completion of the
work is stated in the Proposal.
Liquidated Damages: In the event the work is not finally complete as provided herein, it is agreed
that the Owner will suffer certain damages which are difficult to ascertain. As a result, in the event
the work is not finally completed on the date specified herein, together with any approved extensions
of the Contract time, the Owner shall be entitled as a reasonable estimate of its damages, to the
amount of one hundred dollars($100.00) in liquidated damages for each calendar day of such delay
until the work is finally completed (Sundays and legal holidays shall be excluded in determining the
total days of delay.)
a
The Owner shall have the right to deduct such liquidated damages from any amount due or that may
become due to the Contractor or the amount of such damages shall be due and collectible from the
Contractor's Surety or the Contractor.
The above-described damages pertain only to time of completion of the contract and shall not
preclude the Owner from claiming any other damages which may accrue under Contract law
generally.
+
' NOTE TO BIDDER: Use preferably BLACK ink for completing this Proposal form.
PROPOSAL
w.
To: City Hall
Attention: Greg Berry
Address: 13125 SW Hall Blvd.
Tigard, Oregon 97223
Project Title: Tigard Police Department Remodel and Addition
�w
Project No:
Bidder:
Address:
Date:
Bidder's Declaration and Understanding
The undersigned, hereinafter called the Bidder, declares that the only person or parties interested in
° this Proposal are those named herein,that this Proposal is, in all respects, fair and without fraud, that
it is made without collusion with any official of the Owner, and that the Proposal is made without any
connection or collusion with any person submitting another proposal on this Contract.
The Bidder further declares that he has carefully examined the Contract Documents for the
construction of the project, that he has personally inspected the site, that he has satisfied himself as
to the quantities involved, including the fact that the description of the quantities of work and
materials, as included herein, is brief and is intended only to indicate the general nature of the work
and to identify the said quantities with the detailed requirements of the Contract Documents, and that
this Proposal is made according to the provisions and under the terms of the Contract Documents,
which Documents are hereby made a part of this Proposal.
The Bidder further declares by the signing of the Proposal that the provisions required by ORS
279.350 relating to prevailing wage rates shall be complied with and included in his Contract. The
• signing of this Proposal constitutes agreement to compliance. A separate statement is not required.
The Bidder further agrees that he has exercised his own judgement regarding the interpretation of
subsurface information and has utilized all data which he believes pertinent from the Architect,
Owner, and other sources in arriving at his conclusions.
The Bidder understands and agrees that if a Contract is awarded, the Owner may elect to award all
schedules under one Contract, separately, or in any combination that best services the interests of the
Owner.
Contract Execution and Bonds
The Bidder agrees that if this Proposal is accepted, he will, within ten (10) days, not including
Sundays and legal holidays, after notice of award, sign the Contract in the form annexed hereto, and
will at that time, deliver to the Owner the Performance and Payment Bond required herein, and will,
to the extent of his Proposal, furnish all machinery,tools, apparatus, and other means of construction
and do the work and furnish all materials necessary to complete all work as specified or indicated in
the Contact Documents.
Certificates of Insurance
The Bidder agrees to furnish the Owner, before commencing the work under this Contract, the
certificates of Insurance as specified in these Documents. +0
Start of Construction and Contract Completion Time
The Bidder further agrees to begin work within ten(10) calendar days after receipt of the Notice to
Proceed and to complete the construction, in all respects, of each schedule for which his Proposal is
accepted within the number of calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed by the Owner as set
forth below:
160 Working Days
Liquidated Damages
In the event the work is not finally completed as provided herein, it is agreed that the Owner will
suffer certain damages which are difficult to ascertain. As a result, in the event the work is not finally
completed on the on the date specified herein,together with any approved extensions of the Contract
time, the Owner shall be entitled, as a reasonable estimate of its damages, to the amount of one
hundred dollars($100.00)per calendar day in liquidated damages for each calendar day of such delay
until the work is finally completed. (Sundays and legal holidays shall be excluded in determining the
total days of delay.)
The Owner shall have the right to deduct such liquidated damages from any amount due or that may 46
become due the Contractor or the amount of such damages shall be due and collectible from the
Contractor's surety or the Contractor.
The above-described damages pertain only to time of completion of the Contract and shall not
preclude the Owner from claiming any other damages which may accrue under Contract law
generally.
Addenda
The Bidder hereby acknowledges that he has received Addenda No's
to
0
am*
b 3 to these Specifications. (Bidder insert No. of Each Addendum
received.)
W Sales and Use TaxeAw s
The Bidder agrees that all Federal, State, and local sales and use taxes are included in these stated
bid prices for the work.
Lump Sum
The Bidder further proposes to accept as full payment for the work proposed herein the amounts
computed under the provisions of the Contract Documents and based on the following lump sum
amount. The Bidder agrees that the lump sum prices and the unit price represent a true measure of
the labor and materials required to preform the work,including all allowances for overhead and profit
two for each type and unit of work called for in these Contract Documents. The amounts shall be shown
in both words and figures. In case of a discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.
Jio
w►
LUMP SUM BID FOR ALL WORK AND MATERIALS SHOWN
CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT REMODEL AND ADDITION
TIGARD, OREGON
The Bidder agrees to accept as full payment for the lump sum work proposed under the project as
herein specified and as shown on the Drawings, based upon the undersigned's own estimate of
quantities and costs, the following lump sum of
Dollars and
Cents $ (Amount written in words has precedence
Suretv
If the Bidder is awarded a construction Contract on this Proposal, the Surety who provides the
Performance and Payment Bond will be:
whose address is
Street City State Zip
which is the address to which all communications concerned with this Proposal and with the Contract
Nap
rt
shall be sent. to
The names of the principal officers of the corporation submitting this Proposal, or of the partnership, to
or of all persons of the corporation interested in this Proposal as principals are as follows:
I*
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
Bond No.
ow
Amount: $
'W KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that
iw as CONTRACTOR(Principal), and
A CORPORATION, duly authorized to do a general surety business in the State of Oregon, as
A,,, SURETY, are jointly and severally held and bound unto
the OWNER(Obligee)herein, in the sum of
DOLLARS ($ ), for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs,
executors, administrators, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
This bond is executed under the authority of ORS Chapter 279, of the State of Oregon, the provisions
of which are hereby incorporated into this bond and made a part hereof.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT:
WHEREAS,
the CONTRACTOR entered into a certain Contract with
�w
the OWNER,
ow
for
which Contract expressly includes and incorporates by this reference all Contract Documents
including the Invitation to Bid, the Instructions to Bidders, the Proposal, the Contract, the General
and Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications, the Drawings and all modifications thereto.
IN WITNESS: This Performance Bond shall guarantee the improvement against defects in materials
of workmanship for a period of one(1)year from the date of written final acceptance by the city of
Tigard of Washington County by its authorized representative.
NOW THEREFORE, if the CONTRACTOR shall faithfully preform all provisions of such Contract
for the duration thereof, including the one (1)year guarantee period, and promptly pay all laborers,
mechanics, subcontractors, material, men, and all persons who shall supply such work and services,
and indemnify and save all persons who shall supply such work and services, and indemnify and save
harmless the OWNER, its officers, agents, and employees from all claims thereof, or from persons
arising or alleged to have arisen by reason of work; and shall in the time and manner, under the terms
and conditions prescribed, well and faithfully do, perform, and furnish all matters and things as by
them in the Contract undertaken, and as by law, local, state, and federal, prescribed, then this
obligation shall be void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER:
In no event shall the SURETY be liable for a greater sum that the penalty of this bond.
The SURETY for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time,
alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the
Specifications accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligations of this bond, and it does
hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the
Contact, or to the work, or to the Contract Documents. ►
Signed and sealed this day of , 1997.
(SEAL)
CONTRACTOR
SURETY
By
Attorney-in-fact
Approved as to form:
***************
vo
.r
CONTRACT
THIS CONTRACT, made and entered into, in duplicate by and between the City of Tigard,
*' Washington County, hereinafter called "OWNER", and:
a.
*A" hereinafter called "CONTRACTOR" for the project entitled:
MW
WITNESSETH:
THAT the said Contractor, in consideration of the sums to be paid by the Owner in the manner and
at the time herein provided, and in consideration of the other covenants and agreement herein
contained, hereby agrees to preform and complete the work herein described and provided for and
few to furnish all necessary machinery,tools, apparatus, equipment, supplies, materials and labor, and do
all things in accordance with the applicable plans, general provisions and the special provisions bound
herewith, and in accordance with such alterations or modifications of the same as may be made by
the Owner and according to and within the meaning and purpose of this Contract. This Agreement
shall be binding upon the heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns of the Contractor.
THAT the Contact Documents, consisting of Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal,
"Contract", and the attached labor and prevailing wage information, Performance and Performance
and Payment Bond, General Conditions, supplementary conditions, and Specifications, together with
the Drawings which are identified as Tigard Police Addition and Remodel and modifications all bound
herewith, are hereby specifically referred to and by this reference made a pert of this Agreement and
AM shall by such reference have the same force and affect as though all of the same were fully written or
inserted herein.
THAT the Contractor shall faithfully complete and perform all of the obligations of this Contract;
shall make payment promptly as due, to all subcontractors and to all persons supplying to the
Contractor or his subcontractors, equipment, supplies, labor or materials for the prosecution of the
work provided for in this contract or any part thereof, shall pay all contributions or amounts due the
State Industrial Accident Fund and the State Unemployment Compensation Trust Fund from the
Contractor or subcontractors incurred in the performance of this Contract and pay all sums of money
w withheld from the employees of said Contractor and payable to the Department of Revenue pursuant
to ORS 316.167; shall not permit any lien or claim to be filed or prosecuted against the Owner on
account of any labor or material furnished; shall promptly, as due, make payment to any person,
copartnership, association, or corporation furnishing medical, surgical, hospital care or other needed
care and attention incident to sickness or injury to the employees of such Contractor of all sums
�rw►
which the Contractor has agreed to pay for such services and all monies and sums which the
Contractor collected or deducted from the wages of his employees pursuant to any law, Contractor
or agreement for the purposed of providing or paying for such service; shall pay all other just debts,
dues, and demands incurred in the performance of the Contract; and shall in all respects perform said
Contract according to law.
THAT the Contractor shall comply with the Prevailing Wage Rate Law and workers shall not be paid
less than the minimum daily rates determined by the Labor Commissioner. Once before the first
payroll payment and once before the last payroll payment, the Contractor shall file with Owner a No
Certification of Wages to be paid as required by law.
THAT the Contractor agrees to remedy all defects appearing in the work of developing in the to
materials furnished and the workmanship performed under this contract for a period of 1 year after
the date of final acceptance or substantial completions acceptance as appropriate of the work by the
Owner and further agrees to indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any costs encountered in to
remedying such defects.
THAT in consideration of the faithful performance of all of the obligations, both general and special,
herein set out, and in consideration of the faithful performance of the work as set forth in the Contract
Documents, and in accordance with the directions of the Architect and to his satisfaction, the Owner
agrees to pay to the Contractor the amount earned, as determined from the actual quantities of work
preformed and the prices and other basis from the actual quantities of work performed and the prices
and other basis of payment specified, and taking into consideration any amounts that may be
deductible and under the terms of the Contract and to make such payments in the manner and at the
times provided in the applicable Contract Documents.
IT IS expressly understood that this Contact in all respects shall be governed by the laws of the State
of Oregon and the ordinances of the city of Tigard of Washington County.
It is agreed the time limit for the completion of the Contract based upon the Proposal shall be the
day of 1997.
rr
40
In the event that the Contractor shall fail to complete the work within the time limit above or
extended time limit(s) agreed upon, as more particularly set forth in the Contract Documents,
liquidated damages shall be paid at the rates described proposal. Sundays and legal holidays shall be
war excluded in determining days in fault.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, WE, the parties hereto, each herewith subscribe the same
ow
as of the day of , 1997.
CITY OF TIGARD OF
WASHINGTON COUNTY, OREGON
Approved as to Form:
By:
Attorney
+�.► Title
CONTRACTOR
AW
By:
qW
Title
AW
r�
40
Aw
ow
6w
PREVAILING WAGE RATES
for
a
Public Works Contracts in Oregon
of
o
H * o
* ` 1
lrlY 7Cl 1
low 18 5 9
o� o
aw
F 0
jean
OREGON BUREAU OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES
w. Jack Roberts
Commissioner Effective July 1 , 1997
Bureau of Labor and Industries
BUREAU
OF LABOR
AND INDUSTRIES
July 1, 1997
40
Jack Roberts
Commissioner
This booklet contains the prevailing wage rates for non-residential building and construction
trades in the State of Oregon. These rates are effective July 1, 1997,and have been determined
in accordance with ORS 279.348 through ORS 279.365. Rates are published in their entirety
twice each year, although specific occupational rates may be amended more frequently
Prevailing wage rates are the minimum wages that must be paid to all workers employed in the
construction, reconstruction, major renovation or painting of any public works. Copies of these ;
rates must be incorporated into all bid specifications when the advertisement for a public works
contract is issued. A provision that prevailing wage rates be paid must also be put in the
contract. The rates in effect at the time the bid specifications are first advertised are those thatrri
apply for the duration of the project, with one exception; if during the bidding process the
prevailing wage rates change, the public contracting agency has the option of amending the bid
specifications to reflect such changes.
Legislative changes in the state's prevailing wage rate law are highlighted on page 7 of this ft
publication.
If you identify any errors in the rates published, please bring them to the attention of the
Prevailing Wage Rate Coordinator in Portland (731-4074). If you have any questions about the
manner in which the prevailing wage rates are enforced, contact the Wage and Hour Division in
Portland(731-4074).
1
fJACKOBERTS
ssioner
Bureau of Labor and Industries
PORTLAND EUGENE BEND MEDFORD to
800 NE Oregon St.#32 165 E 7th Street,Suite 220 1250 NE 3rd,Suite B105 700 E Main,Suite 105
Portland,OR 97232 Eugene,OR 97401 Bend,OR 97701 Medford,OR 97504
(503)731-4200 (541)686-7623 (541)388-6330 (541)776.6270
FAX(503)7314069 FAX(541)686-7980 FAX(541)388-6273 FAX(541)776-6284
r 4y
SALEM PENDLETON r
3865 Wolverine St.NE;E-1 200 Hailey Ave.,Suite 308 aµ.
Salem,OR 97310 Pendleton,OR 97801
(503)378-3292 AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER (541)276-7884
FAX(503)373-7636 FAX(541)276-2950 x
sr '
�. TABLE OF CONTENTS
July 1, 1997
w
General information -------------------------------------------------------------1-3
ON Commonly asked questions ------------------------------------------------------4-6
BookletNote ----------------------------------------------------------------------7
SampleLanguage ------------------------------------------------------------------8
Apprenticeship Rule Change Letter dated April 29, 1997 ---------------------- 9-12
July rate determination for:
Heavy-Entire State
Highway-Entire State and
Non-residential building (exlnding Coos, Curry,
Douglas & Josephine Counties) --------------------------------------------- 13-26
Construction categories: ------------------------------------------------------ 27-28
AW
July rate determination for
Non-residential building in the counties of:
Coos, Curry, Douglas & Josephine ----------------------------------------- 29-31
List of debarred contractors -------------------------------------------------- 32-33
ow
Forms necessary to comply with ORS 279.348 through ORS 279.375 will be
found in the back of this booklet.
am
Contractors are encouraged to use the forms provided as manta
ow dies, and to keep on file for prevailing wage rate projects.
w«
THIS INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE IN AN ALTERNATE FORMAT
ANNOUNCEMENT
The prevailing wage rates contained in this booklet generally reflect non-residential building, heavy, and
highway construction rates determined for Oregon by the Secretary of Labor of the United States
pursuant to the Davis-Bacon Act; certain changes have been made to better reflect prevailing practices
in Oregon. Pursuant to ORS 279.348 to ORS 279.380, these rates have been adopted for use on
public works contracts in Oregon. If you have specific questions regarding how rates are determined or
if you would like a copy of this booklet, please contact:
Prevailing Wage Rate Coordinator
Bureau of Labor and Industries
Wage and Hour Division to
800 NE Oregon St. # 32
Portland, OR 97232
(503)731-4074 so
The first copy is free. Additional copies are available for $2.00 each.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Information in this section and in the "Commonly Asked Questions" is meant to provide a convenient
reference to Oregon's Prevailing wage rate Law. It is not a complete statement of the laws and rules.
If you have questions about the enforcement of prevailing wage rates, please contact the Wage and
Hour Division. Division offices may be reached at the following phone numbers: r
10
Bend (541)388-6330 Portland (503)731-4074
Eugene (541)686-7623 Salem (503)378-3292
Medford (541)776-6270
Apprentices and Trainees
go
Apprentices and trainees may be employed on public works projects. To qualify as an apprentice or
trainee, the worker must be registered in a bona fide apprenticeship or training program of the U.S.
Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training (BAT) or with any State Apprenticeship tiwl
and Training Agency recognized by BAT. For information call (503) 731-4072. The apprentice or
trainee must receive all fringe benefits` and a percentage of the journeyman's wage rate which is
listed in this booklet. This rate may be different than the rate contained in the Apprenticeship
Standards for the trade. The correct percentage shall be determined by the appropriate apprenticeship
or training committee. All other workers must receive rates as published.
` SEE APRIL 29, 1997 NOTICE REGARDING TEMPORARY ADMINISTRATIVE RULE RELATING TO
PAYMENT OF FRINGE BENEFITS TO APPRENTICES AND TRAINEES. (PAGES 9-12)
Zone Pay
sili►
In certain trades, the basic hourly rate of pay progressively increases based upon the distance between
the job site and a designated landmark; this is commonly referred to as zone pay. To determine the
hourly wage, find the correct zone based on the number of road miles the job site is from the closest
designated city (based either on distance from city hall or from geographical center of the city,
depending on the trade) and add the amount for that zone to the basic hourly rate. Zone pay, unlike
travel pay, is the basic hourly wage upon which overtime is computed.
10
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 1
10
r '
GENERAL INFORMATION (CONTINUED)
Bid Specifications
The specifications for every public works contract must include the current prevailing wage rates in
effect at the time the specifications are first advertised. A statement incorporating the existing rates
M„ by reference will J1Q.I satisfy this requirement (ORS 279.352). All contracts and all contract
specifications for a public work are required to include a provision stating that the fee shall be paid to
the Bureau of Labor. Sample language is included in this booklet.
NOTE. If a public agency fails to include a provision that a contractor
and any subcontractor shall comply with ORS 279.350 in the
advertisement for bids, the request for bids, the contract
specifications, the accepted bid or elsewhere in the contract
documents, the liability of the public agency for unpaid wages
shall be joint and several with any contractor or subcontractor
that had notice of the requirement to comply.
WW
Fringe Benefits
Payments for fringe benefits are in addition to the basic hourly rate. The term "fringe benefits" refers
ow to payments such as:
a) medical or hospital care; pensions on retirement or death; compensation for injuries or
illness resulting from an occupational activity, or insurance to provide any of the foregoing;
or b) unemployment benefits, life insurance, disability and sickness insurance or accident
insurance;
c) vacation and holiday pay;
d) defraying costs of apprenticeship or other similar programs; and
*W e) other such bona fide benefits.
For the purpose of prevailing wage rates, fringe benefits do not include any benefits which may be
required by federal, state or local law (e.g. Workers' Compensation, Unemployment Insurance, etc.).
ow Every contractor or subcontractor that provides for or contributes to a health and welfare plan or a
pension plan, must post notice describing such plans in a conspicuous and accessible place on the
project.(ORS 279.350(5)) Fringe benefits may be paid to the worker in cash or to a third party
administering a fringe benefit program. When an hourly rate in excess of the required prevailing base
ow rate is aid, the amount b which the rate is exceeded may be credited toward
p y y payment of fringe
benefits.
wr Overtime
Senate Bill 234 was signed into law by the governor and'became effective on June 9, 1997. It applies
to contracts entered into on or after June 9, 1997. This legislation revised the provisions of ORS
MW 279.334 regarding when payment of overtime is due for work performed on a public works job. The
new law requires the payment of overtime for work performed in excess of 8 hours in a day QI 40
hours in any one week when the work week is five consecutive days, Monday through Friday; Qt 10
hours a day or 40 hours in any one week when the work week is four consecutive days, Monday
we through Friday. Overtime must also be paid for all work performed on Saturday, Sunday and the
following other legal holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,
Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day.
SB 234 also requires employers to give written notice to employees who perform work on public works
contracts either at the time of hire or before commencement of work on the contract, or by posting a
notice in a location frequented by employees, of the number of hours per day and days per week that
employees may be required to work.
Overtime is calculated at not less than one and one-half times the basic hourly rate as determined by
the Commissioner of Labor (not including fringe benefits which are paid at the straight rate for every
++� hour worked). In the computation of overtime, travel pay does not need to be included, but zone pay
differentials do.
ow
GENERAL INFORMATION (CONTINUED)
Overtime (Continued)
Contractors who violate the requirements of the law are liable to the employees affected in the amount
of their unpaid overtime wages and in an additional amount equal to the unpaid overtime wages as
liquidated damages. Additionally, if the violation resulted from willful falsification of payroll records,
the contractor shall be liable to the employees affected in the amount of their overtime wages and in wM
additional amount equal to twice the unpaid overtime wages as liquidated damages.
NOTE: Contractors who are signatory to a collective bargaining agreement may be subject to different
overtime requirements (ORS 279.334(3)).
Certification of Payroll
The law requires every contractor and subcontractor to file certain information on wages paid to each
worker employed on a public works contract. This statement must completely and accurately reflect
payroll records for the work week immediately preceding the submission. A contractor or
subcontractor must complete and submit the certified statement contained on Form WH-38 as well as
the information required on the weekly payroll. Form WH-38 and instructions for completing it are
included in this booklet. The schedule for submitting payroll information is as follows: Once within 15
days of the date the contractor or subcontractor first began work on the project; once before the final
inspection of the project by the public contracting agency; in addition, for orojects exceeding 90 days,
submissions are to be made at 90 day intervals. When work on a project starts and finishes in 15 days
or less, the contractor or subcontractor which performed the work shall submit a payroll and certified
statement form which accurately and completely sets out the payroll for all the work performed on the
project. Payroll information is to be filed with the public contracting agency. The payroll information
must be kept by the contractor and or subcontractor for three years.
+rw
lt!
eat
JULY 1. 1997 PAGE 3
Wr
COMMONLY ASKED QUESTIONS
sw 1) What are "prevailing wage rates?"
A prevailing wage rate is the minimum wage, including fringe benefits, to be paid workers
employed on contracts for public works. Different rates are established for specific trades and
+w specific geographical areas.
2) Who must be !Zd"prevailing wage rates?"
All employees of a contractor or subcontractor engaged on a public works project when the total
price of the project is $25,000 or more must receive at least the prevailing wage rate (PWR) for
time worked on the project, unless otherwise exempt.
r
Office/clerical employees and supervisory employees who are supervisory only and do not
perform any hands-on labor are not required to be paid the PWR. A person who owns bpd
operates his/her own truck on construction projects (Owner/Operator) is not required to be paid
srr the PWR. This does not include owner-operators of any other type of equipment such as
bulldozer, scrapers, backhoes, cranes, drilling rigs, or welding machines.
3) What about contracts when Federal funds are used?
No
When more than $2,000 of federal funds are involved, the contract is usually subject to the
provisions of the federal Davis-Bacon Act, not Oregon PWR statutes. (Further information may
be obtained from the U.S. Department of Labor, Wage and Hour Division, Portland, Oregon
Aw (503-326-3057).) In the event that federal funds are involved, but the contract is not regulated
under the Davis-Bacon Act, Oregon's prevailing wage rate statutes may apply (ORS 279.348 -
279.380). Oregon statutes pertaining to overtime requirements apply on both state and federally
ow regulated contracts..IORS 279 3341.
4) 1 don't have a pension fund, How do I calculate fringe benefits?
..r Workers must receive at a minimum the sum of the basic hourly rate plus all fringe benefits for
each hour worked on a public works contract. Fringe benefits may be paid either to a third party
trust account or in cash directly to the worker.
ow 5) My eml2lovees receives health benefits Do I net credit for the health benefit
payroll on a public works project?
AW Yes. AM expenditures an employer makes for bona fide employee benefits can be charged
against the fringe benefit payments designated in the prevailing wage rate booklet. To learn how
to compute the correct hourly charge, call the Wage and Hour Division (503-731-4074).
6) What if the emi2loyePs are not paid on an hourly basis?
All workers must receive at least the basic hourly rate of wage and fringe benefits for each hour
worked on the project. If an employee is paid other than on an hourly basis, the equivalent
+W+ hourly rate (for both wages and fringe benefits) must still be at least equal to the rates published.
7) How do I classify workers?
Virtually all of the job classifications/trades normally used in the non-residential construction
industry are represented by the job classifications used in this PWR publication. These
classification titles should be used according to common practice. If you need residential
■, construction rates, or if you have questions about how to classify workers, contact the Prevailing
Wage Rate Coordinator at (503)-731-4074.
Laborers who do basic work requiring no specific skills, training, or knowledge are generally
IM classified as Group 1 Laborers. (Note that Landscapers are classified as Laborers, and
Ornamental Ironworkers are classified as Ironworkers.)
r..
-C A
COMMONLY ASKED QUESTIONS (Continued) r'
8) When are new rates determined? How long are they effective?
Prevailing wage rates are determined once each year by the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor
and Industries. The Commissioner may amend the rates at any time. The rates are usually
amended at least once each year. The rates in effect at the time the bid specifications are first
advertised are those that apply for the duration of the contract, with one exception. If during
the bidding process the prevailing wage rate changes, the public contracting agency (not the
contractor) has the option of amending the bid specifications to reflect such changes.
9) How do I post prevailing wage rates? rtir
Every contractor or subcontractor employing workers on a public works project is required to
post the applicable prevailing wage rates in a conspicuous and accessible place in or about the
work-site. Rates need to be posted for the duration of the job. Contractors and subcontractors
who intentionally fail to post the PWR can be made ineligible to receive any public works
contract for up to three years.
10) What can I do about a contractor who is not complying with Oregon's PWR law?
File a complaint with the nearest office of the Oregon Bureau of Labor and Industries (see list of
offices on page 1), or contact the Wage and Hour Division, Bureau of Labor and Industries, 800 ao
NE Oregon St. # 32, Portland, Oregon 97232 (503-731-4074). You may also complain to the
contracting agency, which has the contractual authority to pay PWR claims directly to a
contractor's or subcontractor's workers (ORS 279.314).
06
11) What haooens to contractors who do not comply with PWR statutes?
Contractors and subcontractors who pay less than the prevailing wage rates may be liable to the go
workers affected for the amount found due plus an equal amount as liquidated damages (ORS
279.356). Also, the law now provides for a civil penalty of up to $5,000 for any violations of
the prevailing wage rate laws, including ORS 279.348 to 279.380 and the prevailing wage rate
administrative rules pursuant to those statutes. Contracting agencies have the contractual
authority to withhold payments due or to be due to the contractor or subcontractor in order to
pay the unpaid prevailing wages directly to the worker (ORS 279.314).
Contractors and subcontractors who intentionally refuse to pay the prevailing wage rate to
workers employed on public works or to post the PWR on the job site may be determined to be
ineligible to receive any public works contracts for a period of up to three years (ORS 279.361).
Workers employed by the contractor or subcontractors have a right of action against the surety
of the prime contractor for any unpaid prevailing wages.
A list is kept of all contractors, subcontractors, and other persons ineligible to receive public
works contracts and subcontracts. When a contractor or subcontractor is a corporation, the
individual officers and agents of the corporation can be debarred in addition to the corporation.
As a result, individuals who intentionally fail to pay or post the PWR are prevented from simply
moving from one corporation to another.
In addition, ORS 279.073, provides that any person that loses a competitive bid for a
construction contract may bring an action for damages against the person who is awarded the
contract, if the losing bidder can establish that the winner has knowingly violated any one of
several laws, including the requirement to pay prevailing wage rates while performing work under
the contract. The losing bidder is entitled to recover, as liquidated damages, 10% of the losing
bid amount, or $5,000, whichever is greater, plus reasonable attorney fees.
V6
to
rrli
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 5
COMMONLY A KED QUESTIONS (Continued)
12) How much do I gay apprentices?
To qualify as an apprentice, the worker must be registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program
r of the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training (BAT) or with any State
Apprenticeship Agency recognized by BAT. For information call (503) 731-4072. The
apprentice is to receive all fringe benefits* and a percentage of the journeyman's wage rates.
w. listed in this booklet. This rate may be different than the rate contained in the Apprenticeship
Standards for the trade. The correct percentage shall be determined by the appropriate
apprenticeship committee. All other workers receive rates as published.
SEE APRIL 29, 1997 NOTICE REGARDING TEMPORARY ADMINISTRATIVE RULE RELATING TO
PAYMENT OF FRINGE BENEFITS TO APPRENTICES AND TRAINEES. (PAGES 9-12)
13) What records must I keep? For how lona?
Contractors and subcontractors are required to keep records necessary to determine if prevailing
wage rates were paid. These records must include the Payroll and Certified Statement Form
aw (WH-38) as well as the following: The name and address of each employee; the work
classification(s) of each employee; the rate(s) of wages and fringe benefits paid to each
employee; the rate(s) of fringe benefit payments made in lieu of those required to be provided to
each employee; total daily and weekly compensation paid to each employee; daily and weekly
+ hours worked by each employee; apprenticeship and training agreements; any payroll and other
such records pertaining to the employment of employees upon a public works contract.
Administrative rules on prevailing wage rates require that these records be kept for a period of
"w three (3) years from the completion of the public work contract. Other legal considerations may
require retention of records for a period greater than 3 years. Records relating to public works
contracts must be maintained separately from records relating to private projects/contracts.
.r 14) What forms are nublic agencies reguired to file with the Bur au of Labor and Industries?
Public agencies are required to prepare and file a list of every public improvement that the
rr agency intends to fund during the subsequent budget period with the Commissioner of the
Bureau of Labor and Industries (ORS 279.023[2)). If, after the original filing, the agency plans
additional public improvements, a revised list is to be submitted (OAR 839-16-008121).
+ + The "Notice of Award of Public Works Contract" is to be filed with the Wage and Hour Division
within 30 days of the date when a contract is awarded which requires the payment of prevailing
wage rates (i.e., is regulated under ORS 279.348 to 279.380). Civil Penalties may be assessed
for failure to file this Notice.
Copies of the "Planned Public Improvement Summary" (Form No. WH-118), the "Capital
Improvement Project Cost Comparison Estimate" (WH-119), and the "Notice of Award of Public
Works Contract" (WH-81) can be found at the back of this booklet.
15) Does a contracting agency have any Mwer to enforce payment of prevailing wage rates on its
public work =15-1
+rw
Yes. According to ORS 279.314, all public contracts for work or services must contain a clause
or condition permitting the contracting agency to pay a worker's past due wage claim, charging
the payment against funds due or to become due to the contractor.
*W
«r
JULY 1. 1997 PAGE 6
Mwr
OF
• f
fAf f fes,
f f `
f •
S
All forms necessary to a public works project are printed in their entirety and provided in the back of this booklet.
The instruction sheet WH-38A, is provided to assist contractors in completing the Payroll/Certified Statement.
A synopsis of Legislative changes affecting most public agencies which award contracts for public works projects
and the contractors working on those projects is given below.
• The threshold for PWR projects is now $25,000. Mal
• Contractors receiving public works contracts must pay a fee equal to one-tenth of one percent of
the total contract price of the project. 40
• All contracts and contract specifications must contain a provision stating that the fee shall be paid
to the Bureau.
• Contractors are no longer required to send copies of the certified payroll statements to the Bureau.
• Public contracting agencies may not divide projects to avoid compliance with the PWR law.
• Civil penalties of up to $5,000 may now be assessed for any violation of the PWR law or the
administrative rules.
• Effective June 9, 1997, overtime requirements revised. See "Genera/Information"pages 2 & 3.
• Effective September 1, 1996,Truck Driver coverage criteria changed.
• Effective April 29, 1997, fringe benefits for apprentices in specific occupations amended. Ise
FOR MORE INFORMATION CONCERNING THESE CHANGES, CALL THE PREVAILING WAGE RATE
COORDINATOR AT(503) 731-4074, EXT. 250.
WE HAVE ATTEMPTED TO MAKE ALL CHANGES NOTICEABLE BY riw
PRINTING THEM IN BOLD TYPE.
at
to
JULY 1. 1997 PAGE 7 1101
"ALL CONTRACTS AND CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS MUST CONTAINA PROVISION
STATING THAT THE FEE SHALL BE PAID TO THE BURSA U."
Examples of language satisfying ORS 279.352(2)
*Contract Recifications:
ow -The contractor is required to pay a fee to the Bureau of Labor and Industries pursuant to the
provisions of ORS 279.352(2). The fee is one-tenth of one percent of the price of this
contract, but not less than$100 nor more than$5,000,regardless of the contract price.
ow
*Contract:
aw
-The contractor shall pay a fee equal to one-tenth of one percent (.1 percent) of the price of
this contract. The fee shall be paid on or before the first progress payment or 60 days from
the date work first began on the contract, whichever comes first. The fee is payable to the
Bureau of Labor and Industries and shall be mailed or otherwise delivered to the Bureau at
the following address:
rr►
Prevailing Wage Rate Coordinator
MW Bureau of Labor and Industries
Wage and Hour Division
800 NE Oregon St. # 32
Portland, OR 97232
Aw
MW
i+w JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 8
1
April 29, 1997 to
BUREAU
OF LABOR No
To: Interested Parties AND INDUSTRIES
From: Christine N. Hammond
Administrator
Wage and Hour Division
Re: Adoption of Temporary Prevailing Wage Rate Rules Relating to Fringe Benefits Jack Roberts
Paid to Apprentices and Trainees Commissioner
us
Attached for your information is a copy of temporary prevailing wage rate(Division 16)
administrative rules relating to the payment of fringe benefits to apprentices and trainees. These
temporary rules were filed and became effective on April 29, 1997. The rules will be in effect r
through October 25, 1997, unless amended sooner.
The temporary rules provide that the rate of pay required to be paid for fringe benefits to
registered apprentices and trainees be not less than the rate paid to the majority of apprentices
and trainees in the same trade or occupation as determined by the commissioner. The rules also
provide that if there is no majority in the same trade or occupation, apprentices and trainees must
be paid the full amount of fringe benefits as determined by the commissioner.
Prior to the adoption of these temporary rules, the rules relating to the payment of fringe benefits ift
to apprentices required apprentices and trainees to be paid the full amount of fringe benefits paid
to journeymen. The agency has now determined that the prevailing practice in a limited number to
of trades is to pay apprentices and trainees a percentage of certain fringe benefits paid to
journeymen, rather than the full amount. Accordingly,the temporary rules will now permit
payment of a percentage of the fringe benefits paid to journeymen in those trades where there is a so
clear showing that the prevailing practice is to pay registered apprentices such a percentage.
For more information, or to request a determination by the commissioner pertaining to fringe
benefits to be paid to apprentices,contact the Wage and Hour Division, Prevailing Wage Rate
Unit,at(503) 7314074, ext. 250.
g:\whd\admin\intpart.sam ,
PORTLAND EUGENE BEND MEDFORD
800 NE Oregon St.8 32 165 E 7th Street,Suite 220 1250 NE 3rd,Suite B105 700 E Main,Suite 105
Portland,OR 97232 Eugene.OR 97401 Bend,OR 97701 Medford,OR 97504
(503)731-4200 (541)686-7623 (541)388.6330 (541)776-6270
FAX(503)731-4069 FAX(541)686-7980 FAX(541)388-6273 FAX(541)776-6284 '10
SALEM JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 9 PENDLETON
3865 Wolverine St.NE;E-1 200 Hailey Ave.,Suite 308
Salem,OR 97310 Pendleton,OR 97801
(503)378-3292 AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER FAX541)2-78 4 tali
FAX(503)373-7636
BEFORE THE COMMISSIONER
OF THE
` BUREAU OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES
OF THE
STATE OF OREGON
In the Matter of Rules Pertaining )
to Prevailing Wage Rates and Fringe ) TEMPORARY RULES
Benefits Paid to Apprentices )
Title: Payment of Prevailing Rate of Wage
Rule Number: OAR 839-016-0035
839-016-0035 (1) Every contractor or subcontractor employing workers on a public works
aw
project shall pay to such workers no less than the prevailing rate of wage for each trade or
occupation, as determined by the Commissioner, in which the workers are employed.
M
(2) Every person paid by a contractor or subcontractor in any manner for the person's labor
in the construction, reconstruction, major renovation or painting of a public work is employed
and must receive no less than the prevailing rate of wage, regardless of any contractual
relationship alleged to exist. Thus, for example, if partners are themselves performing the duties
of a worker, the partners must receive no less than the prevailing rate of wage for the hours they
are so engaged.
(3) Persons employed on a public works project and who are spending more than 20% of
their time during any workweek in performing duties which are manual or physical in nature as
opposed to mental or managerial in nature are workers and must be paid the prevailing rate of
" wage. Mental or managerial duties include but are not limited to administrative, executive,
professional, supervisory or clerical duties.
(4) Persons employed on a public contract for the manufacture or furnishing of materials,
articles, supplies or equipment (whether or not,a public agency acquires title to such materials,
articles, supplies or equipment during the course of the manufacture or furnishing, or owns the
materials from which they are manufactured or furnished) are not workers required to be paid the
1Note: Material in [brackets] and italics is material that is deleted. Material that is underlined
and b.QJA is material to be added.
�+ JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 10
go
prevailing rate of wage unless the employment of such persons is performed in connection with ,W
and at the site of public work.
(5) Persons employed on a public works project who are employed by a commercial supplier
of goods or materials must be paid no less than the prevailing rate of wage when the work is
performed at the "site of work" as that term is defined in OAR 839-016-0004(19) or when the
work is performed in fabrication plants, batch plants, barrow pits,job headquarters, tool yards or
other such places that are dedicated exclusively or nearly so to the public works project.
(6) Persons employed on a public works project by the construction contractor or construction
subcontractor to transport materials or supplies to or from the public works project are required W
to be paid the prevailing wage rate for work performed in connection with the transportation of
materials or supplies at the "site of work" as that term is defined in OAR 839-016-0004(19).
(7) Persons employed on a public contract for service work as opposed to construction work
are not workers required to be paid the prevailing rate of wage.
(8) Every apprentice, as defined in these rules, must be paid not less than the appropriate ift
percentage of the applicable journeyman's wage rate and [all] fringe benefits as determined
pursuant to ORS 279.348 to 279.363. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, t
who is not an apprentice as defined in these rules shall be paid not less than the applicable
prevailing rate of wage for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, if the total so
number of apprentices employed exceeds the ratio permitted in the applicable standards, all
apprentices so employed shall be paid not less than the applicable journeyman's prevailing wage
rate for work actually performed.
(9) Every trainee, as defined in these rules, must be paid not less than the appropriate `
percentage of the applicable journeyman's wage rate and [aln fringe benefits determined
pursuant to ORS 279.348 to 279.363. Any worker listed on a payroll at a trainee wage rate, who
is not a trainee as defined in these rules shall be paid not less than the applicable prevailing rate
of wage for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, if the total number of
trainees employed exceeds the ratio permitted in the applicable standards, all trainees so
employed shall be paid not less than the applicable journeyman's prevailing wage rate for work
actually performed.
2Note: Material in [brackets] and italics is material that is deleted. Material that is underlined so
and gW is material to be added.
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 11
to
Title: Payment of Fringe Benefits
Rule Number: 839-016-0040
aw 839-016-0040 (1) Each contractor and subcontractor required to pay workers the prevailing
rate of wage must pay no less than the hourly rate of pay and fringe benefits as determined by the
Commissioner.
Iwo (21 The rate of pay for fringe benefits paid to apprentices and trainees shalue not le a
than such rate paid to the majority of such apprentices and tra nees in theflame trade or
occupation as determined by the commissioner, If thjorily in the same trade or
occupation. as determined by the commissioner, aRp *entices and trainees shall be paid
the
full amount of the fringe benefits
[(2)] (3) The requirements of section (1) of this rule are met when the amount of the fringe
.w benefit or benefits is paid to the worker, in cash, in lieu of a third party administering a fringe
benefit or benefits program.
" w [(3)] (4) When a contractor or subcontractor pays an hourly rate of pay which exceeds that
which is determined by the Commissioner, the amount by which the rate is exceeded may be
OW credited toward payment of the amount of fringe benefits determined by the Commissioner for
the trade or occupation.
4W
[(4)] M When a contractor or subcontractor pays a rate for any one fringe benefit which
aw exceeds that which is determined for the fringe benefit, the amount by which the rate is exceeded
may be credited toward payment of the amount to be paid for all fringe benefits as determined by
40 the Commissioner for the trade or occupation.
[(S)] fW When a contractor or subcontractor pays an amount for fringe benefits which .
AW exceeds that which is determined by the Commissioner the amount by which it exceeds the
determination may be credited toward payment of the hourly rate of pay as determined by the
Am Commissioner.
gAwhd\pwr\temprule
r
w 3Note: Material in [brackets] and italics is material that is deleted. Material that is underlined
and bDM is material to be added.
OW
JULY 1. 1997 PAGE 12
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
BASIC
DOUGLAS &JOSEPHINE COUNTIES BASIC I
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFIT
ASBESTOS WORKERS BRICKLAYERS/STONEMASONS(Continued)
Installation of insulation on mechanical systems for Area 2 46
Thermal and Acoustical purposes, also the installation of
fire stop penetrations on Electrical and Mechanical Benton (b) Douglas Josephine Linn (b)
Systems. Crook Grant Klamath Malheur (b)
Coos Harney Lake Wasco (b) No
Joumeyman Asbestos Worker 23.98 6.38 Curry Jackson Lane Wheeler
Deschutes Jefferson Lincoln (b)
Removal of regulated material
on mechanical systems' which a) North half
are not going to be scrapped." b) South half
o Hazardous Materials CARPENTERS
Handler Mechanic 13.75 3.50 wtI
Zone 1 (Base Rate):
• Mechanical systems include pipes, boilers,
ducts,flues, breaching, grease ducts and o Group 1 22.44 7.00
acid ducts. This also includes all labor o Group 2 22.59 7.00
connected with the handling and distribution of o Group 3 22.94 7.00
materials for these systems. o Group 4 23.09 7.00
o Group 5 22.94 7.00
•'The removal of all regulated materials from o Group 6 23.09 7.00 06
mechanical systems is exclusively the work of o Group 7 23.44 7.00
Hazardous Materials Handlers, unless the
mechanical systems are going to be scrapped. Zone Differential for Carpenters
Laborers do all removal of regulated materials on (Add to Zone 1 Rate) wir
mechanical systems to be scrapped and any non
mechanical(walls,ceilings,floors,beams etc.) Zone 2 .85
insulation. They also do loading of any regulated Zone 3 1.25
material after it has been removed, bagged and Zone 4 1.70 10
tagged, as well as cleanup at the removal site Zone 5 2.00
and all work done at the disposal site. Persons Zone 6 3.00
performing the removal of regulated materials are Zone 7 5.00
classified as Group 3 Laborers. rr►
Zone 1: Projects within 30 miles of City Hall in the
NOTE. Regulated materials are those materials that Cities listed below.
are regulated for the purpose of protecting Zone 2: More than 30 miles but less than 40 miles.
the environment or for personal protection Zone 3: More than 40 miles but less than 50 miles. to
by either E.P.A., O.S.H.A., DEQ or Federal Zone 4: More than 50 miles but less than 60 miles.
O.S.H.A. Zone 5: More than 60 miles but less than 70 miles.
Zone 6: More than 70 miles but less than 100.
BOILERMAKERS 24.07 9.31 Zone 7: More than 100 miles from the city hall of the rW
BRICKLAYERS/STONEMASONS employee's home local.
THIS TRADE IS TENDED BY "TENDERS TO MASONS" -PG. 24 Reference cities for Groun 1 and 2 Car eR nters
Area 1 23.86 6.71 Albany Eugene Longview Portland
(add $0.75 per hour to Fringe for Refractory Astoria Goldendale Madras Port Orford
repair work.) Baker Grants Pass Medford Reedsport
Area 2 22,12 5,88 Bend Hermiston McMinnville Roseburg
(add $0.75 per hour to Fringe for Refractory Brookings Hood River Newport Salem
repair work.) Burns Klamath Falls Oregon City The Dallas Iwo
Area 1 Coos Bay LaGrande Ontario Tillamook
Corvallis Lakeview Pendleton Vancouver
Baker Hood River Multnomah Wallowa
Benton (a) Lincoln (a) Polk Wasco (a) Zones for Groups 3 and 4 Carpenters are determined
Clackamas Linn (a) Sherman Washington by the distance between the project site and either
Clatsop Malheur (a) Tillamook Yamhill 1) the worker's residence; oL
Columbia Marion Umatilla Gilliam 2) City Hall of a reference city
Morrow Union
for the appropriate group shown, whichever is closer.
JULY 1. 1997 PAGE 13
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
rr DOUGLAS & JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
CARPENTERS (Continued) CEMENT MASONS (Continued)
Reference Cities for Gro ig 3 and 4 Carpenters Groff 1 Cement Masons, finishing, hand chipping and
wr patching grouting, end pointing, screed
Eugene Medford Portland Vancouver setting, plugging, filling bolt holes, dry packing,
Longview North Bend The Dalles setting curb forms, planks, stakes, lines and
Zones for Groups 5, 6 and 7 Carpenters are determined grades.
as follows:
Group 2 Composition Workers (includes installation of
1.For those workers who reside within zone 1 of a epoxy & other resinous toppings), and Power
aw+ reference city below, their zone pay differential shall Machine Operators.
be computed based upon the distance from the city
hall of that city to the project site. Group Cement masons working on suspended,
swinging and/or hanging scaffold.
2.For those workers who reside nearer to the project
than is the city hall of any reference city below, the Group 4 Cement Masons performing work of both
mileage from their residence to the project may be Group 2 and Group 3 at the same time.
used in computing their zone pay differential.
`W 3.The zone pay differential for all other projects shall Zone Differential for Cement Masons
be computed from the city hall of Longview, North (Add to Zone 1 Rate)
Bend, or Portland, whichever is closer to the project.
Zone 2 .65
ar. Reference Cities for Gro ups 5 6 and 7 Zone 3 1.15
Zone 4 1.70
Astoria Eugene Newport Salem Zone 5 2.75
Bend Klamath Falls Portland The Dalles
North Bend Medford Roseburg Longview Zone 1: Projects within 30 miles of City Hall in the
Group Group 2 cities listed below.
Zone 2: More than 30 miles but less than 40 miles.
Auto. Nailing Machine Floor Layers & Finishers Z� ' More than 40 miles but less than 50 miles.
Zone 4: More than 50 miles but less than 80 miles.
Carpenters Stationary Power Saw
Form Stripper Operators
��� More than 80 miles.
r Manhole Builders Wall & Ceiling Insulators Cities
Non-irritating Ins. Irritating Insulation
Cabinet & Shelving
Installers (wood or steel) Bend Eugene Medford Salem Vancouver
+iw Group 3 Group Corvallis Longview Portland The Dalles
Millwrights Millwright/Welders DIVERS & DIVERS' TENDERS
w Machine Erectors (Certified Welders receive o Divers 55.15 7.00
Machinists $0.25/hour over Group 3) o Divers' Tenders 24.71 7.00
No Group 5 Group Depth Pay and Enclosure Pay are added to the
Bridge,. Dock & Wharf Boom Men Divers' Basic Hourly Rate to obtain the Total Hourly
Builders Rate for the diver.
Piledrivermen
Basic Hourly Hourly Divers'
Group Z Hourly + Depth + Enclosure = Total
Marine Piledriver Rate Pay Pay Hourly Pay
%W
CEMENT MASONS o Divers' Depth Pay
THIS TRADE IS TENDED BY "CONCRETE LABORERS" PG. 17 Depth of Dive Hourly De tp h Pay_
rr
Zone 1 (Base Rate)
o Group 1 21.61 7.00 50-100 ft ([total ft- 501 x $1.00)/hr.
o Group 2 22.00 7.00 100-150 ft $ 50 + ([total ft-1001 x $1.50)/hr.
ON o Group 3 22.00 7.00 150-200 ft $125 + ((total ft-1501 x $2.00)/hr.
o Group 4 22.39 7.00
yw JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 14
UKb(jUN UL 1 LKM11NA 11UN Y7-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
DOUGLAS &JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
DIVERS & DIVERS' TENDERS (Continued) ELECTRICIANS (Continued)
o Divers' Enclosure Pay(working without vertical escape) Area 5:
o Electricians 25.50 8.92j
Distance Travelled o Cable Splicers 26.25 8.94
In the Enclosure Hourly Enclosure Pay
Area 6:
5 - 50 ft $ .50/hr o Electricians 23.05 7.44
50 - 100 ft $ .63/hr o Cable Splicers 23.05 7.44
100- 150 ft $ 2.13/hr
150 - 200 ft $ 4.63/hr Area 1 Area 2 Area 2(cont) Area 3
200 - 300 ft $ 4.63 + ([total ft-200]x $.05)/hr Malheur Baker Umatilla Coos
300 - 450 ft $ 9.63 + ([total ft-300)x 5.10)/hr Gilliam Union Curry
450 - 600 ft $24.63 + ([total ft-450]x $.20)/hr Grant Wallowa Lincoln
Morrow Wheeler "Douglas (a)
DREDGING Lane (a)
Zone 1 (Base Rate): Area 4 Area 5 Area 5(cont) Area 6
o Leverman (Hydraulic, Dipper, 26.71 6.85 Benton Clackamas Washington Harney
Floating Clamshell)
o Asst. Crook Clatsop Yamhill (d) Jackson
WatchEngineer,ineer, Welder,Eng (including: Deschutes Columbia Josephine
Mechanic, Machinist) 25.91 6.85 Jefferson Hood River Klamath ,
o Tenderman (Boatman, Lane (b) Multnomah Lake
Attending Dredge Plant); Linn Sherman "Douglas (b)
Fireman 25.32 6.85 Marion Tillamook
o Fill Equipment Operator 24.79 6.85 Polk Wasco wrilr
o Assistant Mate (Deckhand); Yamhill(c)
Oiler 23.16 6.85
Zone Differential for Dredging (Add to Zone 1 Rate) a) Those portions lying west of a line
running North and South from the NE
Zone 2 2.00 corner of Coos County to the SE corner of
Zone 3 3.00 Lincoln County
Zone 1: Center of job site not more than30 miles b) That portion lying east of a line running
from the City Hall of Portland North and South from the NE corner of
Zone2 More than 30 miles but not more than 50 Coos County to the SE corner of Lincoln
Zone 3 Over 50 miles County
c► South half
DRYWALUWETWALL d) North half
o Drywall (Accoustical and
Drywall Applicator) 20.58 8.02 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS
o Wetwall (Lather) 19.56 9.04
ELECTRICIANS Area 1
rr
Area 1: o Mechanic 26.89 6.85+ a
o Electricians 20.44 5.45 o Helper 18.82 6.64+ a
o Cable Splicers 22.48 5.51 o Probationary Helper 13.45 .36
Area 2: Area 2
o Electricians 25.20 7.59
o Cable Splicers 26.46 7.62 o Mechanic 28.27 6.89+ a
Area 3: 23.30 8.45 o Helper 19.79 6.67+ a
o Probationary Helper 14.14 .38
Area 4: i
o Electricians 25.90 6.98 a) Plus 8% of basic hourly rate for employees with
o Cable Splicers 28.94 7.05 more than 5 years of service; 6% of basic hourly
rate for 6 months to 5 years of service.
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 15
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
WA NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
DOUGLAS &JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
jW TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS (Continued) LABORERS (Continued)
Ov Area 1 Area 2 Zone 1: Projects within 30 miles of City Hall in the
Cities listed below.
Umatilla All Zone 2: More than 30 miles but less than 40 miles.
Wallowa Remaining Zone 3: More than 40 miles but less than 50 miles.
Union Counties Zone 4: More than 50 miles but less than 80 miles.
Baker Zone 5: More than 80 miles.
GLAZIERS
Reference Cities
�..► Area 1 22.87 4.94
Albany Bums Hermiston Portland
(Add $1.00 to base rate if safety Astoria Coos Bay Klamath Falls Roseburg
belt is required by State safety Baker City Eugene Medford Salem
regulations) Bend Grants Pass Pendleton The Dallas
(Add $4.00 to base rate for work
done from a non-motorized Group 1
single-man bosun chair)
Area 2 14.86 4.94 Asphalt Plant Laborers Guardrail, Median
Asphalt Spreaders Rail (c)
(Add $0.50 to base rate if Batch Weighman Landscape or Planting
working at over 35 feet of free Broomers Laborer
fall in height) Brush Burners/Cutters Leverman or Aggregate
Carpenter Tender Spreader (d)
Area 1 Area 2 Car & Truck Loaders Loading Spotter
All Counties Malheur Change-House Man Material Yard Man (e)
except Malheur Chipper Operator (a) Powderman Assistant
Choke Setter Railroad Track Laborers
*W Clean-up Laborers .•' Ribbon Setters (f)
HIGHWAY / PARKING STRIPERS 20.43 4.09 Curing, concrete Rip Rap Man (Hand Placed)
Demolition, wrecking Road Pump Tender and
IRONWORKERS 21.50 9.92 (industrial)•*• moving
Driller Assistant Sewer Laborer
o Structural, Reinforcing, Ornamental, Dry-shack Man Signalman
Riggers, Fence Erectors, Signal Men
Dumpers, road oiling Skipman
LABORERS crew Slopers
Dumpmen for grading Sprayman
Zone 1 (Base Rate): crew Stake Chaser
Elevator Feeders Stockpiler
o Group 1 18.34 7.05 Fence Builder Tie Back Shoring
o Group 2 18.72 7.05 Fine Graders Timber Faller/Bucker
o Group 3 19.04 7.05 Fire Watch (Hand Labor)
`rr o Group 4 19.30 7.05
o Group 5 16.55 7.05 Form Strippers (b) Toolroom Man (Job Site)
General Laborer •+' Weight-Man-Crusher (g)
Note: A Hazardous Waste Removal Differential must be
added to the base rate if work is performed inside the a) Pittsburg or similar types
boundary of a Federally Designated Hazardous Waste b) Not swinging stages
Site. A Group 1 base rate is used for General Laborer on c) Reference Post, Guide Post, or Right-of Way Marker
such a site. For further information on this, call the d) Flaherty, and similar types
Prevailing Wage Rate Coordinator at 731-4074. e) Including electrical
Zone Differential for Laborers f) Including steel forms
g) Aggregate when used
(Add to Zone 1 Rate)
Zone 2 .65 Laborers can tear off roofs, clean up or handle
Zone 3 1.15 roofing materials only when at least one new
Zone 4 1.70 story is added or in demolition work, where no
Zone 5 2.75 reroofing will occur.
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 16
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY, 16
DOUGLAS & JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS 116
LABORERS (Continued) LABORERS (Continued)
Group 2
Sirou124 wo
Asphalt Rakers
Applicators (a) Gunite or Sandblasting Concrete Nozzlemen
Brush Cutters (b) Pot Tender Grade Checker
Burners Handlers/Mixers (f) High Scalers, Strippers, Drillers (a)
Choker Splicer Pipe Doping & Wrapping Laser Beam (Tunnel), applicable when employee assigned
Clary Power Spreader(c) Post Hole Digger, Air, to move, set-up, align laser beam wirer
Clean up Nozzleman- gas or electric Loop Installation
Green Cutter (d) Power Tool Operators (g) Motorman - Dinky Locomotive
Concrete Laborers Sand Blasting (wet) Pipe Layers (all)
Concrete Power Buggyman Stake Setter Powder Men
Crusher Feeder Tampers Shield Operator
Demolition/Wrecking (e) Vibrating Screed Tunnel Bull Gang (Above Ground)
Gunnite Nozzleman Tender Tunnel Chuck Tenders
Tunnel Miners
a) Including Pot Tender for same, applying Tunnel Muckers/Brakeman/Concrete Crew/Bull Gang
protective material by hand or nozzle on utility (Underground)
lines or storage tanks on project
Tunnel Powderman
b) Power saw a) Covers work in Swinging Stages, chairs
c) And similar t or belts, under extreme conditions unusual
types of spreaders to normal drilling, blasting, barring-down,
d) Concrete, rock, etc. or sloping and stripping
e) Charred Materials 86
f) Of all materials of an irritating nature including Group 5
cement and lime Clean-up Laborers (building only)***
g) Includes, but not limited to: Dry Pack Machine, Demolition, Wrecking, & Moving (building only)***
Jackhammer, Chipping Guns, Paving Breakers Flagger
Group ''` Laborers can tear off roofs, clean up or handle 16
roofing materials only when at least one new story is
added or in demolition work, where no reroofing will
Asbestos Removal Power Saw Operators (c) occur.
Bit Grinder Sand Blasting (dry)
Concrete Saw Operator Sewer Timberman LIMITED ENERGY ELECTRICIANS
Drill Doctor Track Liners (d) May only be used for electrical work not exceeding 100
Drill Operators (a) Tugger Operator va in Class 11 and III installations (as defined in Article '
Laser Beam (b) Vibrators(all) 725 of the National Electrical Code):
Manhole Builder Water Blaster
Nippers & Timbermen Welder Area 1 20.05 6.55
Nuclear Plant Worker Area 2 20.05 6.55Area 3 16.79 4.25
Lead Shield Area 4 16.79 4.25
Area 5 16.79 4.25
a) Air Tracks, Cat Drills, Wagon Drills, Area 6 16.79 4.25
Rubber-mounted drills, and other similar types Area 7 16.79 4.25
b) Pipe laying, applicable when employee Area 8 16.79 4.25Area 9 20.05 6.55 Irlli
assigned to move, set up, align Laser Beam. Area 10 16.79 4.25
c) Bucking and falling Area 11 16.79 4.25
Area 12 20.05 6.55
d) Anchor Machines, Ballast Regulators, Area 13 20.05 6.55 10
Multiple Tampers, Power Jacks Area 14 20.05 6.55
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 17 Wa
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
im NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY.
DOUGLAS &JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
iw TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
LIMITED ENERGY ELECTRICIANS (Continued) MARBLE SETTERS (Includes Granite)
impArea 1 Clatsop, Columbia, Tillamook THIS TRADE IS TENDED BY "TILE, TERRAZZO, BRICK MARBLE
Area 2 Clackamas, Multnomah, Washington, Yamhill FINISHERS" PG. 25
(north half)
tow Area 3 Marion, Polk, Yamhill (south half) Area 1 24.86 6.71
Area 4 Benton, Lincoln, Linn Area 2 23.12 5.88
Area 5 Lane
Area 6 Douglas Area 1.
aw Area 7 Coos, Curry
Area 8 Jackson, Josephine Baker Hood River Multnomah Wallowa
Area 9 Hood River, Sherman, Wasco Benton (a) Lincoln (a) Polk Wasco (a)
Area 10 Crook, Deschutes, Jefferson Clackamas Linn (a) Sherman Washington
Area 11 Klamath, Lake, Harney Clatsop Malheur (a) Tillamook Yamhill
Area 12 Gilliam, Grant, Morrow, Umatilla, Wheeler Columbia Marion Umatilla
Area 13 Baker, Union, Wallowa
Gilliam Morrow Union
Area 14 Malheur
LINE CONSTRUCTION Area 2
Area 1: Benton (b) Douglas Josephine Linn (b)
Crook Grant Klamath Malheur (b)
o Group 1 26.91 6.44 Coos Harney Lake Wasco (b)
o Group 2 24.27 6.35 Curry Jackson Lane Wheeler
o Group 3 18.83 5.15 Deschutes Jefferson Lincoln (b)
o Group 4 20.91 5.23
o Group 5 18.26 5.14 a) North half
o Group 6 17.15 5.09 b) South half
Area 2: PAINTERS & DRYWALL TAPERS
+rrr
o Cable Splicers 23.38 5.24 Area 1
o Journeyman Lineman 21.20 5.16
o Line Equip. Mach.
( o Brush, Roller 14.51 2.99
(Right-of-way) 17.98 5.01
o Line Equip. Oper. 17.98 5.01 o Spray and Sandblasting 15.11 2.99
o Groundman 13.15 4.80 Area 2
Area 1 All counties except Malheur County o Brush Painting 18.46 3.14
Area 2 Malheur County
ow (Add $0.60 to base rate for spray,
Group 1 Group 2 sand blasting,other pressure blasting
over 3000 psi, and steam cleaning.)
Cable Splicers Certified Lineman Welder (Add $0.50 to base rate for work over
to Leadman Pole Sprayer Heavy Line Equipment Man 60 ft high on swing stage, mechanical
Lineman climber, spider, or bucket truck.)
Pole Sprayer
iw o Drywall Tapers 22.80 5.83
Group 3 Group 4 Area 1 Area 2
Tree Trimmer Line Equipment Man Malheur County Remaining Counties
Group 5 Group 6 PLASTERERS
Head Groundman Groundman o Nozzleman 23.41 5.86
Jackhammer Man o Swinging scaffold 22.41 5.86
Powderman o all other work 21.91 5.86
am JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 18
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY, Ilii
DOUGLAS &JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
PLUMBERS & STEAMFITTERS/PIPEFITTERS
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (Continued)
Area 1 (Both) 22.19 6.67 Note: A Hazardous Waste Removal Differential must be
added to the base rate if work is performed inside the
Zone Differential for Area 1 Plumbers & boundary of a Federally Designated Hazardous Waste
Site. For further information on this, call the Prevailing
Steamfitters/Pipefitters Wage Rate Coordinator at 731-4074.
(Add to Zone 1 Rate) ZONE RATES
Zone 2 $ 1.20 per hour (Add to Zone 1 Rate)
Zone 3 $ 1.70 per hour Zone 2 1.50
Zone 4 $ 2.50 per hour Zone 3 3.00
Zone 5 $ 3.55 per hour
Zone 6 $30.32 per day
ZONE DESCRIPTIONS
Zone 1: Projects within 15 miles of City Hall in the Cities
Portland to Salem Metropolitan Area
listed below.
brr
Zone 2: More than 15 but less than 30 Zone 1:
Zone 3 More than 30 but less than 40 Projects within the boundary of a region described as
Zone 4 More than 40 but less than 50 follows: Those portions of Multnomah, Clackamas, and
Zone 5 More than 50 but less than 100 Marion Counties which are West of the western boundary
Zone 6 More than 100 miles of Mt. Hood National Forest and West of Mile Post 30 on
Interstate 84 and West of Mile Post 30 on State Highway
With distances in Zone 6, 100 miles and beyond, there shall 26 and West of Mile Post 30 on Highway 22. Also those to
be a minimum of one hundred fifty-one dollars and sixty cents portions of Washington County East of Highway 47, and
($151.60) per week or thirty dollars and thirty-two cents of Yamhill County East of Highway 47 and Hwy. 99W.
($30.32) per day worked. Zone 2:
Projects outside of any Zone 1, but less than 50 miles
Reference Cities from the Portland city hall.
Boise, Idaho Zone 3:
Projects outside of any Zone 1 or 2, and more than 50
Twin Falls, Idaho miles from the Portland city hall.
Area 2 (Both) 27.30 9.05 Albany. Eugene Roseburg. Grants Pass. Medford ►
Area 3 (Both) 26.15 8.25 Zone 1:
Projects within 30 miles of the City Hall of the above
Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 cities.
Baker Grant (b) All remaining Zone 2:
Harney (a) Morrow counties Projects outside of any Zone 1 and more than 30 miles
Malheur Umatilla but less than 50 miles from the city hall. go
Wallowa
Union Zone 3:
Projects outside of any Zone '. or 2, and more than 50
a) Except Northwest Portion miles from the city hall. ww
b) Except Southwest Corner Longview, Coos Bay, Klamath Falls. Bend
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Zone 1: 1
Projects within 20 miles of the City Hall ofthe above
Zone 1 (Base Rate): cities.
o Group 1 22.96 7.15 Zone 2:
o Group 2 22.55 7.15 Projects outside of any Zone 1, and more than 20 but
o Group 3 21.85 7.15 less than 40 miles from the city hall.
o Group 4 21.38 7.15
o Group 5 20.82 7.15 Zone 3: r
o Group 5 19.13 7.15 Projects outside of any Zone 1 or 2, and more than 40
miles from the city hall.
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 19
VW r
N DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
DOUGLAS & JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
*wHOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (Continued) POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (Continued)
�r
Astoria The Dallas Pendleton LaGrande Baker, Ontario, COMPRESSORS
McMinnville
6 Compressor Operator (any power), under 1,250
Zone 1 cu. ft.total capacity
Projects within 5 miles of the city hall of the above cities. 5 Compressor Operator (any power), over 1,250
Zone 2: cu. ft. capacity)
No Zone 2 for these cities.
+r+ Zone 3: ('OMPACTORS - Self-Propelled
Projects outside of any Zone 1 or 2, and more than 5
miles from the city hall. 5 Compactor Operator, including vibratory
ASPHALT 5 Wagner Patcor Operator or similar type (without
blade)
6 Plant Oiler 4 Compactor Operator, with blade
.r
6 Plant Fireman 4 Compactor Operator, multi-engine
6 Pugmill Operator (any type) CONCRETE
6 Truck mounted asphalt spreader, with screed
4 Screed Operator 6 Plant Oiler
.r 5 Extrusion Machine Operator 6 Assistant Conveyor Operator
2 Asphalt Plant Operator (any type) 6 Conveyor Operator
4 Asphalt Paver Operator 6 Mixer Box Operator (C.T.B., dry batch, etc.)
5 Roller Operator (any asphalt mix) 6 Cement Hog Operator
4 Diesel-Electric Engineer, Plant
5 Asphalt Burner and Reconditioner Operator 6 Concrete Saw Operator
6 Concrete Curing Machine Operator (riding type)
anytype),84
4 Roto-Mill, pavement profiler operator, under 6 foot 6 Wire Mat or Brooming Machine Operator
5 Combination Mixer and Compressor Operator, gunite
lateral cut
work
5 Roto-Mill, pavement profiler, ground man
5 Concrete Batch Plant Quality Control Operator
2 Roto-Mill, pavement profiler operator, 6 foot lateral 5 Beltcrete Operator
cut and over 5 Pumperete Operator (any type)
BLADE 5 Pavement Grinder and/or Grooving Machine Operator
(riding type)
N 6 Blade Operator, pulled type 4 Mixer Mobile Operator
4 Blade Operator 5 Cement Pump Operator, Fuller-Kenyon and similar
4 Blade Operator, Finish 5 Concrete Pump Operator
4 Blade Operator, externally controlled by electronic, 5 Grouting Machine Operator
mechanical hydraulic means 4 Screed Operator
4 Blade Operator, multi-engine 4 Concrete Cooling Machine Operator
2 Auto Grader or "Trimmer" Operator 5 Concrete Mixer Operator, single drum, any capacity
2 Batch Plant and/or Wet Mix Operator, 1 and 2 drum
%W 1 Batch Plant and/or Wet Mix Operator, 3 units or more
BULLDOZERS 5 Cast in place pipe laying machine
4 Bulldozer Operator 5 Maginnis Internal Full Slab Vibrator Operator
to 4 Drill Cat Operator 5 Concrete Finishing Machine Operator, Clary, Johnson,
4 Side-Boom Operator Bidwell, Burgess bridge deck or similar type
5 Curb Machine Operator, Mechanical Berm, Curb
2 Tandem bulldozer operator (quadnine and similar
and/or Curb and Gutter
type, D-11) 5 Concrete Joint Machine Operator
4 Bulldozer Operator, twin engine (TC 12 and similar 5 Concrete Planer Operator
type, D-10) 5 Tower Mobile Operator
4 Cable-Plow Operator (any type) 5 Power Jumbo Operator setting slip forms etc., in
60 � FARIN , tunnels
CLEARING 5 Slip Form Pumps, power driven hydraulic lifting
device for concrete forms
4 Log Skidder Operator 5 Concrete Paving Machine Operator
aw 4 Chipper Operator 5 Concrete Finishing Machine Operator
4 Incinerator Operator 5 Concrete Spreader Operator
4 Stump Splitter Operator 4 Concrete Paving Road Mixer
4 Faller/Buncher Operator 2 Automatic Concrete Slip Form Paver Operator
rw
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
DOUGLAS &JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
_ BASIC BASIC
R HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (Continued) POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (Continued) III
a
CONCRETE (Continued) CRUSHER
2 Concrete Canal Line Operator 6 Crusher Oiler
4 Concrete Breaker 6 Crusher Feederman
4 Reinforced Tank Banding Machine (K-17 or similar 4 Generator Operator
types) 4 Diesel-Electric Engineer
2 Concrete Profiler, Diamond Head 4 Grizzley Operator
2 Crusher Plant Operator
CRANE DRILLING
6 Oiler 6 Drill Assistant '
6 Truck Crane Oiler-Driver, 25 ton capacity or over 6 Auger Oiler
6 Fireman, all equipment 5 Churn Drill and Earth Boring Machine Operator
6 A-Frame Truck Operator, single drum 4 Drill Doctor
6 Tugger or Coffin Type Hoist Operator 4 Boring Machine Operator
5 Helicopter Hoist Operator 4 Driller - Percussion, Diamond, Core, Cable, Rotary and
Operator, single drum similar type
5 Hoist O
P 9 4 . Cat Drill (John Henry)
5 Elevator Operator
5 A-Frame Truck Operator, double drum FLOATING EQUIPMENT
5 Boom Truck Operator
4 Chicago Boom and similar types 6 Deckhand
4 Lift Slab Machine Operator 6 Boatman
4 Boom Type lifting device, 5 ton capacity or less 5 Fireman
4 Cherry Picker or similar type crane-hoist, 5 ton 4 Diesel-Electric Engineer
capacity or less 4 Jack Operator, elevating barges4 Barge
4 Hoist Operator, two drum 4 Piledriver Operatorl (not lcrane gtype)
4 Hoist Operator, three or more drums 4 Floating Clamshell, etc. Operator, under 3 cu.
4 Derrick Operator, under 100 ton yd.(only for construction projects - otherwise see
4 Hoist Operator, stiff leg, guy derrick or similar Dredging)
type, 50 ton and over 4 Floating Crane (derrick barge) Operator, less than 30
4 Cableway Operator, up to 25 tons tons
4 Bridge Crane Operator, Locomotive, Gantry, 2 Floating Clamshell, etc. Operator, 3 cu. yd. and over
eg
Overhead (only for construction projects - otherwise see
Dredging)
2 Cableway Operator, 25 tons and over 2 Floating Crane (derrick barge) Operator, 30 tons but
1 Helicopter Operators, when used in erecting work less than 150 tons am
1 Floating Crane, 150 tons and over
HYDRAULIC CRANE OPERATOR
5 Hydraulic Boom Truck Operator, Pittman FORK LIFT
4 Hydro Crane Operator, under 50 tons
3 Hydro Crane Operator, 50 tons through 89 tons 6 Self-Propelled Scaffolding Operator (excluding
2 Hydro Crane Operator, 90 tons through 199 tons working platform)
1 Hydro Crane Operator, 200 tons and over 6 Fork Lift or Lumber Stacker Operator
6 Ross Carrier Operator
5 Lull Hi-Lift Operator or similar type
TOWER/WHIRLEY OPERATOR 5 Fork Lift, over 5 tons
2 Tower Crane Operator 3 Rock Hound Operator
2 Whirley Operator, under 90 tons +
1 Whirley Operator, 90 tons and over GENERATORS
LATTICE BOOM CRANE OPERATOR 4 Generator Operator
4 Diesel-Electric Engineer ab
4 Lattice Boom Crane Operator, under 50 tons
3 Lattice Boom Crane Operator, 50 tons through 89 GUARDRAIL EQUIPMENT
tons, and less than 150 ft boom
2 Lattice Boom Crane Operator, 90 tons through 6 Oiler
199 tons, and/or 150 ft -200 ft boom 6 Auger Oiler
1 Lattice Boom Crane ( Operator, 200 tons and 6 Oiler, combination guardrail machines
over, and/or over 200 ft boom 4 Guardrail Punch Operator (all types)
1111 v t I oo' PAGE 21
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
DOUGLAS & JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (Continued) POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (Continued)
,r GUARDRAIL EQUIPMENT (Continued) PIPE LINE - Sewer Water
fi Guardrail Punch Oiler 6 Tar Pot Fireman
4 Guardrail Auger Operator (all types)
of 4 Combination Guardrail machines. i.e. punch, 6 Tar Pot Fireman (power agitated)
auger etc. 6 Hydraulic Pipe Press Operator
HAZARDOUS WASTE REMOVAL 5 Hydra Hammer or similar types
5 Pavement Breaker Operator
5 Assistant to the Engineer (Oiler) 4 Pipe Cleaning Machine Operator
4 Assistant Incinerator Control Board Operator 4 Pipe Doping Machine Operator
3 Incinerator Control Board Operator 4 Pipe Bending Machine Operator
` HEATING PLANT 4 Pipe Wrapping Machine Operator
4 Boring Machine Operator
6 Temporary Heating Plant Operator 4 Back Filling Machine Operator
4 Surface Heater and Planer Operator
HYDRAULIC HOES
5 Hydraulic Backhoe Operator, wheel type 3/8 cu. yd. 6 Pump Operator, any power
A"`" and under with or without front end attachments 6 Hydrostatic Pump Operator
2-1/2 cu. yd. and under (Ford, John Deere, Case 5 Pump Operator, more than 5 (any size)
type) 5 Pot Rammer Operator
iW 4 Hydraulic Backhoe Operator, Track Type 3/8 cu.yd.
(Note: Over 3/8 cu. yd. takes Shovel Classification RAILROAD EQUIPMENT
rate)
om LOADERS 6 Brakeman
6 Oiler
6 Bobcat, Skid Steer (under 1 cubic yard) 6 Switchman
6 Bucket Elevator Loader Operator, Barber-Greene and 6 Motorman
do similar types
5 Loaders, rubber-tired type, 2-1/2 cu. yd. and under 6 Ballast Jack Tamper Operator
5 Elevating Grader Operator, Tractor Towed requiring 5 Locomotive Operator
Operator or Grader 5 Ballast Regulator Operator
i' 4 Belt Loader Operator, Kolman and Ko Cal types 5 Ballast Tamper Multi-Purpose Operator
4 Loader Operator, front end and overhead, 2-1/2 cu. 5 Track Liner Operator
yd. and under 4 cu. yd. 5 Tie Spacer Operator
4 Elevating Loader Operator, Athey and similar types 5 Shuttle Car Operator
4 Elevating Grader Operator, Sierra, Euclid or similar
types REMOTE CONTROL
3 Loader Operator, 4 cu. yd. but less that 6 cu. yd.
2 Loader Operator, 6 cu. yd. and over 2 Remote controlled earth-moving equipment
OILERS REPAIRMEN. Heavy Duty
6 Oiler 6
6 Guardrail Punch Oiler Parts Man (Tool Room)
6 Truck Crane Oiler-Driver, 25 ton or over 6 H.D. Repairman Assistant
6 Auger Oiler 6 Welder's Assistant
to 6 Grade Oiler, required to check grade 4 Diesel-Electric Engineer (Plant or Floating)
5 Service Oiler (Greaser) 4 Bolt Threading Machine Operator
6 Grade Checker 4 Drill Doctor (Bit Grinder)
00 PILEDRIVERS 4 H.D. Mechanic
4 H.D. Welder
Use Crane rates when driving or pulling piling) 4 Machine Tool Operator
4 Combination H.D. Mechanic-Welder, when dispatched
"" 4 Hammer Operator and/or when required to do both
4 Piledriver Operator (not crane type)
4 Welder - Certified, when dispatched and/or required
Ww JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 22
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
DOUGLAS &JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (Continued) POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (Continued)
RUBBER-TIRED SCRAPERS TRACTOR - RUBBER TIRED
4 Rubber-tired Scraper Operator, single engine, single 5 Tractor Operator, rubber-tired, 50 H.P. Flywheel
scraper and under
4 Self-loading, paddle wheel, auger type under 15 cu. 4 Tractor Operator, rubber -tired, over 50 H.P. Flywheelpo
yd 4 Tractor Operator, with boom attachment
4 Rubber-tired Scraper Operator, twin engine 4 Rubber-tired Dozers and Pushers (Michigan, Cat,
4 Rubber-tired Scraper Operator, with push-pull Hough type)
attachments TRENCHING MACHINE
3 Rubber-tired Scraper Operator, with tandem scraper
2 Rubber-tired Scraper Operator, with tandem scrapers, 6 Oiler
multi -engine
4 Self-loading, paddle wheel, auger type 15 cu. yd. and 6 Grade Oiler (required to check grade)
5 Trenching Machine Operator, maximum digging
over, single engine
capacity 3 ft. depth
3 Self-loading, paddle wheel, auger type, finish and/or 2
or more units 4 Trenching Machine Operator, maximum digging
capacity over 3 ft. depth
SHOVEL. DRAGLINE. CLAMSHELL. BACKHOE. 4 Back Filling Machine Operator
SKOOPER. ETC., OPERATOR 2 Wheel Excavator
2 Canal Trimmer
6 Oiler
2 Band Wagon (in conjunction with wheel excavator)
6 Grade Oiler (required to check grade) TUNNEL
6 Grade Checker
6 Fireman 4 Mucking Machine Operator
4 Diesel-Electric Engineer 6 Conveyor Operator (any type)
4 Stationary Drag Scraper Operator 4 Shield Operator
4 Shovel, Dragline, Clamshell, Hoe etc., Operator under 6 Air Filtration Equipment Operator
3 cu. yd. 6 Dinkey Operator
4 Grade-all Operator 6 Oiler
2 Shovel, Dragline, Clamshell, Hoe etc., Operator 3 4 Tunnel Boring Machine Operator
cu. yd. and over
WELDING MACHINES
SIGNALMAN
6 Welding Machine Operator
6 Bell Boy, phones, etc., Operator
6 Helicopter Radioman (ground) UNDERWATER EQUIPMENT
SURFACING (BASE) MATERIAL 2 Underwater Equipment Operator, remote
or otherwise, when used in construction work
6 Roller Operator, grading of base rock (not asphalt)
5 Roller Operator, Oiling, C.T.B. ROOFERS
6 Tamping Machine Operator, mechanical,
self-propelled (Installation and removal of sheetmetal roofing is
6 Hydrographic Seeder Machine Operator, straw, pulp
done by sheetmetal workers.) "
or seed
5 Rock Spreaders, self-propelled Area 1:
5 Pulva-mixer or similar types o Roofers 19.75 5.55 rri
4 Blade Mounted Spreaders, Ulrich and similar types o Handling coal tar pitch 21.73 5.55
5 Chip Spreading Machine Operator
5 Lime Spreading Operator Area 2:
o Roofers 17.64 5.78 06
SWEEPERS
(Add $2.00 per hour to
6 Broom Operator, self-propelled Fringe for work with 0
5 Sweeper Operator (Wayne type) self-propelled irritable Bituminous
material.)
JULY 1. 1997 PAGE 23 11"
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE. HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
DOUGLAS &JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
ROOFERS(Continued) SHEETMETAL WORKERS (Continued)
Area 3: Area 3 23.43 7.25
o Roofers 14.85 4.07
(Add $1.00 to base rate for work where it is
(Add $1.50 per hour to necessary to wear a chemically activated face
Fringe for work with mask)
irritable Bituminous (Add $1.00 to base rate for work where
material.) employees required to wear a fresh air mask
due to nuclear related work)
Area 4: (Add $.45 to base rate for work on a swinging
_ o Roofers 16.00 6.05 stage, swinging scaffold or bosun chair in
(Add $2.00 per hour to excess of 30 feet above the ground)
Fringe for work with Area 4 19.92 5.65
irritable Bituminous
material.) Area 5 19.80 5.77
Area 5:
o Roofers 16.92 5.60 Area 1
(Add $3.00 per hour to Benton Gilliam Linn Tillamook
Fringe for work with Clackamas Grant Marion Wasco
irritable Bituminous
material.) Clatsop Harney Multnomah Washington
Columbia Hood River Polk Wheeler
Area 1 Area 1(cont) Area 2 AreaZ(cont) Crook Jefferson Sherman Yamhill
Baker Multnomah Benton Klamath Deschutes Lincoln
Clackamas Sherman Coos Lake
Clatsop Tillamook Crook Lane
Columbia Wasco Curry Lincoln Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5
Jefferson Washington Deschutes Linn
Gilliam Wheeler Douglas Marion
Grant Harney Polk Baker Morrow Douglas Coos
Hood River Jackson Yamhill Malheur Umatilla Jackson Curry
Josephine Union Josephine
-Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 Wallowa Klamath
Malheur Umatilla Morrow Lake
Union Lane
_ Wallowa
SHEETMETAL WORKERS SOFT FLOOR LAYERS 19.70 5.25 + a
as 1 22.28 8.49 a) plus 4% of basic hourly rate for
employees with less than one
(Add $1.00 to base rate for work performed on year of service, 6% for those
any swinging platform, swinging chair, or with more than one year.
swinging ladder)
(Add $1.00 to base rate for work with lead or SPRINKLER FITTERS 21.40 6.28
installing material in a plant that uses lead in
any form to manufacture a product, (excluding
soldering)). TENDERS TO MASON TRADES 20.39 6.00
-(Add $1.00 to base rate for work performed in
a confined space as defined by OSHA.) o Tenders to Bricklayers and Stone Masons.
32 19.66 6.15 Mortar Mixers.
-- (Add $0.50 to base rate for refractory work)
(Add $1.75 to base rate for work performed (Add to base rate an amount equal to that
whenever it is possible for worker to fall 30 feet received for safety belt requirements or other
--:)r�r more)
m S 1.75 to base rate for work performed in unusual job conditions by the mechanic this
worker is tending)
an area where epoxy resins or other injurious
:hemicals are being applied)
JULY 1. 1997 PAGE 24
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY-ENTIRE STATE.
NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
DOUGLAS &JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
TENDERS TO PLASTERERS 19.09 6.00 TRUCK DRIVERS (Continued) _
TILE SETTER/ Reference Cities
TERRAZZO WORKER 22.18 5.80 Albany Eugene Longview Portland --
Astoria Goldendale Madras Port Orford
THIS TRADE IS TENDED BY "TILE,TERRAZZO, BRICK& Baker Grants Pass Medford Reedsport
MARBLE FINISHERS" Bend Hermiston McMinnville Roseburg
Brookings Hood River Newport Salem ._
(Add $.50 to base rate if safety belt required by Burns Klamath Falls Oregon City The Dallas
State safety regulations.) Coos Bay LaGrande Ontario Tillamook
(Add $1.00 to base rate if work involves Corvallis Lakeview Pendleton
epoxy,furnane, alkor acetylene black grouting or Work �ouo
waterproof membrane.)
A-Frame or Hydra-lift Truck w/load
TILE. TERRAZZO. BRICK bearing surface ................................. 1 ._
& MARBLE FINISHERS 16.77 4.27
Battery Rebuilder ............................... 1
o Assists Tile Setters, Brick Layers, Marble Masons,
and Terrazzo Workers by striking, sawing, Bus or Man-Haul Driver .......................... 1 ...
cleaning, washing or grouting. Does not lay or
set any material. Concrete Buggies (Power operated) .............. 1
(Add $.50 to base rate if safety belt required by Drivers and Helpers handling sacked
State safety regulations.) concrete-add 150 per hour
(Add $1.00 to base rate if work involves epoxy,
furnane, alkor acetylene black grouting or Dump Trucks, Side, End and Bottom Dumps, including
waterproof membrane.) Semi-Trucks and trains or combinations thereof:
(Add $0.75 to fringe for refractory repair work.) Up to and inc. 10 cu. yds ................ 1 _.
Over 10 cu. yds. and inc. 30 cu. yds ..... 3
TRUCK DRIVERS Over 30 cu. yds. and inc. 50 cu. yds ..... 4
Over 50 cu. yds. and inc. 60 cu. yds ..... 5
Zone 1 (Base Rate): Over 60 cu. yds. and inc. 80 cu. yds ..... 6
Over 80 cu. yds. and inc. 100 cu. yds .... 7
o Group 1 20.32 7.60
o Group 2 20.44 7.60 Dumpsters or Similar Equipment-all sizes ....... 2
o Group 3 20.57 7.60 FlahertySpreader Driver or Leverman 2
o Group 4 20.82 7.60 p
o Group 5 21.04 7.60 Lift Jitneys, Fork Lifts-all sizes-used
o Group 6 21.19 7.60 in loading, unloading & transporting
o Group 7 21.39 7.60 material on job site ............................ 1
Note: A Hazardous Waste Removal Differential must be Loader and/or Leverman on Concrete Dry
added to the base rate if work is performed inside the Batch Plant, manually operated .................. 1
boundary of a Federally Designated Hazardous Waste Low Bed Equipment, Flat Bed Semi-Truck
Site. For further information on this, call the Prevailing and Trailer or Doubles transporting
Wage Rate Coordinator at 731-4074. equipment or wet or dry materials 2
Zone Differential for Truck Drivers Lubrication Man, Fuel Truck Driver,
(Add to Zone 1 Rate) Driver, Tireman, Wash Rack, Steam
Cleaner or combination 1
Zone 2 .65
Zone 3 1.15 Lumber Carrier, Driver-Straddle Carrier-used in
Zone 4 1.70 loading, unloading and transportation of material
Zone 5 2.75 on job site ..................................... 2
Zone 1: Projects within 30 miles of City Hall in the Oil Distributor Driver or Leverman .............. 2
Cities listed below. 1
Zone 2: More than 30 miles but less than 40 miles. Pilot Car ........................................ _
Zone 3: More than 40 miles but less than 50 miles. SlurryTruck Driver or Leverman 1
Zone 4: More than 50 miles but less than 80 miles.
Zone 5: More than 80 miles. Solo Flat Bed and Misc. Body Truck, 0-10 tons .. 1
JUL" 1. 1997 PAGE 25
_._..........•...•• ..� Una i nus.i JUN I Yet: NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDING - COOS, CURRY, DOUGLAS
AND JOSEPHINE COUNTIES ONLY
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
TRUCK DRIVERS (Continued)
Work Group
Transit Mix and Wet or Dry Mix Trucks:
5 cu. yds. and under ........................ 1
Over 5 cu. yds. and inc. 7 cu. yds .......... 2
Over 7 cu. yds. and inc. 11 cu. yds .......... 3
Over 11 cu. yds. and inc. 15 cu. yds ........ 4
Team Drivers ................................. 1
Tireman, full-time basis ...................... 1
TruckAssistant ............................... 1
Truck Mechanic—Welder—Body Repairman ... 3
Truck Mechanic Assistant ..................... 1
Water Wagons (Rated Capacity) up to:
3000 gallons ............................ 1
3000 to 5000 gallons ....................... 2
5000 to 10,000 gallons ............. ......... 3
10,000 to 15,000 gallons ................... 4
Winch Truck—takes classification of truck on which
winch is mounted
— WELDERS: RIGGERS
Receive rate for craft performing operation to which
welding and rigging are incidental.
JULY 1. 1997 PAGE 26
a
THE INFORMATION ON THE
FOLLOWING PAGES (27-31 ) IS
TO BE USED FOR PUBLIC
WORKS PROJECTS IN THE
COUNTIES OF COOS, CURRY,
DOUGLAS AND JOSEPHINE
ONLY. INCLUDED IS -
INFORMATION TO ASSIST
THE CONTRACTOR WITH _
CORRECT RATE
APPLICATION.
rr
When determining which rate is applicable for projects in Coos, Curry, Douglas or Josephine Counties, it is necessary to
determine whether the project is "non-residential," "heavy," or "highway" construction. If more than one of the categories
make up 20% or more of the total project cost, separate wage determinations must be used for each of the different types of
construction. Conversely, if any of the construction categories makes up over 80% of the total cost of the project, that
category will define the appropriate wage determination to be applied to the entire project.
irr NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
Alterations and additions to non-residential bldgs. Nursing & convalescent facilities
Apartment buildings (5 stories or over) Office buildings
Arenas (enclosed) Out-patient clinics
Auditoriums Passenger& freight terminal
Automobile parking garages Post office
Banks and financial buildings Power Plants
Barracks Prefabricated buildings
Churches Remodeling buildings
City halls Renovating buildings
Civic centers Repairing buildings
Commercial Buildings Restaurants
Courthouses Schools
Detention facilities Service stations
Dormitories Shopping centers
Farm buildings Stores
Fire stations Subway stations
Hospitals Theaters
Hotels Warehouses
Industrial buildings Water & Sewage treatment plant
Institutional buildings (buildings only)
Mausoleums
Motels
HEAVY CONSTRUCTION
irr
Antenna towers Oil refineries
Bridges (major bridges designed for commercial Pipe lines
navigation) Ponds
Breakwaters Pumping stations (prefabricated
Caissons (other than building or highway) drop-in units)
Canals Railroad construction
Channels Reservoirs
Channel cut-offs Revetments
Chemical complexes or facilities (other than bldgs.) Sewage collection and disposal lines
Cofferdams' Sewers (sanitary, storm, etc.)
Coke ovens Shoreline maintenance
Dams Storage tanks
Dikes Swimming pools (outdoor)
Docks Subways
Im Drainage projects Tipples
Dredging projects Tunnels
Electrification projects (outdoor) Unsheltered piers and wharves
Flood control projects Viaducts (other than highway)
Industrial incinerators Water mains
Irrigation projects Waterway construction
Jetties Water supply lines (not incidental to
r Kilns building)
Land drainage (not incidental to other construction) Water and sewage treatment plants
Land reclamation (other than buildings)
Levees Wells
„ Locks, waterways
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 27
rrr
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
AIRW Parking lots
Airport runways Parkways
Bituminous treatments Resurfacing streets and highways
Bridle paths Roadbeds
Concrete pavement Roadways
Curbs Shoulders
Excavation & embankment (for road construction) Sidewalks 0
Fencing (highway) Stabilizing courses
Grade crossing elimination (overpass or underpass) Storm sewer(incidental to road
Guardrails on highway construction)
Highway signs Street paving ri
Highway bridges (overpasses, underpasses, Surface courses
grade separation) Taxiways
Medians Trails
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 28
FRAT
GON DETERMINATION 97-04 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDING -COOS, CURRY, DOUGLAS
AND JOSEPHINE COUNTIES ONLY
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
D
EE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
ASBESTOS WORKERS ELECTRICIANS
Installation of insulation on mechanical Coos, Curry, Douglas (western portion)
systems for Thermal and Acoustical purposes, also the
installation of fire stop penetrations on Electrical and o Electricians 23.30 8.45
Mechanical Systems.
Josephine, Douglas (eastern portion)
Journeyman Asbestos Worker 23.98 6.38
o Electricians 23.05 7.44
Removal of regulated material o Cable Splicers 23.05 7.44
on mechanical systems* which
are not going to be scrapped." ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS
o Hazardous Materials o Mechanic 28.27 6.89 + a
Handler Mechanic 13.75 3.50 o Helper 19.79 6.67 + a
o Probationary Helper 14.14 .38
• Mechanical systems include pipes, boilers, ducts,
flues breaching, grease ducts and acid ducts. a) Plus 8% of basic hourly rate for
•+ This also includes all labor connected with the employees with more than 5
handling and distribution of materials for these years of service; 6% of basic
systems. hourly rate for 6 months to 5
years of service.
•• The removal of all regulated materials from
mechanical systems is exclusively the work of GLAZIERS 22.87 4.94
Hazardous Materials Handlers, unless the
+ mechanical systems are going to be scrapped. (Add $1.00 to base rate if
Laborers do all removal of regulated materials on safety belt is required by State
mechanical systems to be scrapped and any non safety regulations)
mechanical(walls,ceilings,floors,beams etc.) (Add $4.00 to base rate for
insulation. They also do loading of any regulated work done from a
material after it has been removed, bagged and non-motorized single-man bosun
tagged, as well as cleanup at the removal site chair)
and all work done at the disposal site. Persons
performing the removal of regulated materials INSULATORS (BAT AND BLOWN) 7.85 0.00
are classified as Group 3 Laborers.
IRONWORKERS 21.50 9.92
a NOTE. Regulated materials are those materials that
are regulated for the purpose of protecting o Structural, Reinforcing, Ornamental,
the environment or for personal protection by Riggers, Fence Erectors, Signal Men
go either E.P.A., O.S.H.A., DEQ or Federal
O.S.H.A. LABORERS 9.10 4.65
mr
BOILERMAKERS 24.07 9.31 LIMITED ENERGY ELECTRICIANS 16.79 4.25
BRICKLAYERS/STONEMASONS 22.12 5.88 May only be used for electrical work
err THIS TRADE IS TENDED BY „TENDERS TO MASONS" -PG. 30 not
i installationsng 100 va in fined in 11 a and
III e725
CARPENTERS 13.20 3.67 of the National Electrical Code):
CEMENT MASONS 10.00 0.00 PAINTERS 13.00 0.00
DRYWALL/WETWALL PLASTERERS
aw
o Drywall (Accoustical and o Nozzleman 23.41 5.86
Drywall Applicator) 20.58 8.02 o Swinging scaffold 22.41 5.86
NOo Wetwall (Lather) 19.56 9.04 o all other work 21.91 5.86
,mw JULY 1. 1997 PAGE 29
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-04 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDING - COOS, CURRY, DOUGLAS
AND JOSEPHINE COUNTIES ONLY
BASIC BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
PLUMBERS & STEAMFITTERS/PIPEFITTERS TILE. TERRAZZO, BRICK &
MARBLE FINISHERS 16.77 4.27
26.15 8.25
o Assists Tile Setters, BrickLayers,Marble Masons,
and Terrazzo Workers by striking, sawing,
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS cleaning, washing or grouting. Does not lay or
set any material. iW
Backhoes 12.94 1.56 (Add $.50 to base rate if safety belt required by
Bulldozers 13.50 1.56 State safety regulations.
Loader 13.50 1.56 (Add $1.00 to base rate if work involves epoxy,
furnane, alkor acetylene black grouting or
waterproof membrane.)
ROOFERS 8.00 0.00 (Add $0.75 to fringe for refractory repair work.)
SHEETMETAL WORKERS TRUCK DRIVERS
Zone 1 (Base Rate):
Coos, Curry 19.80 5.77
Douglas, Josephine 19.92 5.65 o Group 1 20.32 7.60
o Group 2 20.44 7.60
SOFT FLOOR LAYERS 19.70 5.25 +a o Group 3 20.57 7.60 ►
o Group 4 20.82 7.60
a) plus 4% of basic hourly rate for o Group 5 21.04 7.60
employees with less than one o Group 6 21.19 7.60 rr
year of service, 6% for those o Group 7 21.39 7.60
with more than one year. Note: A Hazardous Waste Removal Differential must be
added to the base rate if work is performed inside the
SPRINKLER FITTERS 21.40 6.28 boundary of a Federally Designated Hazardous Waste
Site. For further information on this, call the Prevailing
TENDERS TO MASON TRADES 20.39 6.00 Wage Rate Coordinator at 731-4466
o Tenders for Bricklayers and Stone Masons. Zone Differential for Truck Drivers (Add to Zone 1 Rate)
Mortar Mixers.
Zone 2 .65
(Add $0.50 to base rate for refractory work)
Zone 3 1.15
(Add to base rate an amount equal to that Zone 4 1.70
received for safety belt requirements or other Zone 5 2.75
unusual job conditions by the mechanic this
worker is tending) Zone 1: Projects within 30 miles of City Hall in the
Cities listed below.
TENDERS TO PLASTERERS 19.09 6.00 Zone 2: More than 30 miles but less than 40 miles.
Zone 3: More than 40 miles but less than 50 miles.
TILE SETTER/ Zone 4: More than 50 miles but less than 80 miles.
Zone 5: More than 80 miles.
TERRAZZO WORKER 22.18 5.80
Reference Cities
THIS TRADE IS TENDED BY "TILE, TERRAZZO, BRICK & �
if Albany Eugene Longview Portland
MARBLE FINISHERS
Astoria Goldendale Madras Port Orford
Baker Grants Pass Medford Reedsport
(Add $.50 to base rate if safety belt required by Bend Hermiston McMinnville Roseburg
State safety regulations. Brookings Hood River Newport Salem
(Add $1.00 to base rate if work involves Burns Klamath Falls Oregon City The Dalles
epoxy,furnane, alkor acetylene black grouting Coos Bay LaGrande Ontario Tillamook
Corvallis Lakeview Pendleton
or waterproof membrane.)
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 30
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-04 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDING -COOS, CURRY, DOUGLAS
BASIC AND JOSEPHINE COUNTIES ONLY
BASIC
HOURLY FRINGE HOURLY FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE BENEFITS
TRUCK DRIVERS (Continued) TRUCK DRIVERS (Continued)
Work Group Work _GrouR
A-Frame or Hydra-lift Truck w/load Transit Mix and Wet or Dry Mix Trucks:
bearing surface ..................... ...... .... 1 5 cu. yds. and under
Battery Rebuilder 1 1
"' """""""""""" Over 5 cu. yds. and inc. 7 cu. yds ......... 2
Bus or Man-Haul Driver ........................ 1 Over 7 cu. yds. and inc. 11 cu. yds ....... 3
Over 11 cu. yds. and inc. 15 cu. yds ...... 4
Concrete Buggies (Power operated) .......... 1 Team Drivers
Drivers and Helpers handling sacked .... ....................'••••••••• 1
cement—add 150 per hour Tireman, full-time basis
Dump Trucks, Side, End and Bottom Dumps,_
including Semi-Trucks and trains or combinations Truck Assistant ............................. 1
thereof:
Up to and inc. 10 cu. yds .................. ... 1 Truck Mechanic-Welder-Body Repairman ... .. 3
Over 10 cu. yds. and inc. 30 cu. yds ......... 3 Truck Mechanic Assistant.
Over 30 cu. yds. and inc. 50 cu. yds ......... 4 '''''''''''' 1
+� Over 50 cu. yds. and inc. 60 cu. yds ......... 5 Water Wagons (Rated Capacity) up to:
Over 60 cu. yds. and inc. 80 cu. yds 6 3000 gallons ................................ 1
Over 80 cu. yds. and inc. 100 cu. yds ... ..... 7 3000 to 5000 gallons ............... ........ 2
5000 to 10,000 gallons ..................... 3
Dumpsters or Similar Equipment 10,000 to 15,000 gallons 4
all sizes 2 9 ........... .... .. ..
�w
Flaherty Spreader Driver or Leverman ••••••••• 2 Winch Truck—takes classification of truck on whichwinch is mounted
Lift Jitneys, Fork Lifts—all sizes—used
in loading, unloading & transporting WELDERS• RIGGERS
+�+ material on job site .......................... 1
Loader and/or Leverman on Concrete Dry
Receive rate for craft performing operation to which Batch Plant, manually operated ................ 1 welding and rigging are incidental.
Low Bed Equipment, Flat Bed Semi-Truck
and Trailer or Doubles transporting
�" equipment or wet or dry materials 2
Lubrication Man, Fuel Truck Driver,
�.+ Driver, Tireman, Wash Rack, Steam
Cleaner or combination ...................... .. 1
ww Lumber Carrier, Driver-Straddle
Carrier—used in loading, unloading
and transportation of material on job site .... .. 2
Oil Distributor Driver or Leverman ... ........ .. 2
PilotCar ... ...... ........ ...... ....... ... ... .. 1
Slurry Truck Driver or Leverman ....... ........ 1
Solo Flat Bed and Misc. Body Truck, 0-10 ton - 1
"" JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 31
in7
1
LIST OF CONTRACTORS INELIGIBLE BUREAU
TO RECEIVE PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS OF LABOR
Publication Date: July 1, 1997 AND INDUSTRIF"
66
To: All Oregon Contracting Agencies
Pursuant to ORS 279.361, contractors on this list are ineligible
to receive public works contracts. These contractors and
subcontractors, as well as any firm, corporation, partnership or Jack Roberts
association in which the contractor or subcontractor has a Commissioner
financial interest are ineligible to receive public works
contracts until removed from this list.
If you have questions regarding the list or for the most current information
regarding persons ineligible to receive prevailing wage contracts, please
contact the Prevailing Wage Rate Cordinator, (Portland) 731-4074 Ext. 250.
CONTRACTOR NAME DATE PLACED REMOVAL DATE 06
1. Craig Yundt, Registered Agent 66
and President and
AC & C Electrical Enterprises, Inc. May 10, 1996 May 9, 1999
2130 NW York
Portland, OR 97210 to
2. Robin Allen December 1, 1994 November 30,1997 to
Daniel Allen
A C & E Electric Company
3363 Silverton Road NE
Salem, OR 97301 No
3. Wayne C. Everett and October 15, 1995 October 14, 1998 Us
Equipment Erection Specialties, Inc.
8645 SE Roots Road
Clackamas, OR 97015 10
06
JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 32
16
PORTLAND EUGENE BEND MEDFORD
800 NE Oregon St.#32 165 E 7th Street,Suite 220 1250 NE 3rd,Suite B105 700 E Main,Suite 105
Portland,OR 97232 Eugene,OR 97401 Bend,OR 9-701 Medford,OR 97504
(503)731-4200 (541)686-7623 (541)388-6330 (541)776-6270
FAX(503)731-4069 FAX(541)686-7980 FAX(541)388-6273 FAX(541)776-6284 No
SALEM PENDLETON
3865 Wolverine St.NE;E-1 200 Hailey Ave.,Suite 308
Salem,OR 97310 Pendleton,OR 97801
(503)378-3292 AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER (541)276-7884 to
FAX(503)373-7636 FAX(541)276-2950
LIST OF CONTRACTORS INELIGIBLE
TO RECEIVE PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS
wri Publication Date: July 1, 1997
irr DATE PLACED REMOVAL DATE
ON
4. Malar Construction, Inc. November 23, 1994 November 22,1997
No 4470 S.W. Hall Blvd, #317
Beaverton, OR 97005
b
5. Michael A. McSweeney dba
Michael A. McSweeney Construction February 25, 1997 February 24,2000
P.O. Box 1573
'o Rogue River, OR 97537
Edward R. Romayor and April 28, 1995 April 27, 1998
Portland Custom Interiors, Inc.
4330 SE Milwaukie Avenue
Portland, OR 97202
Wrw
6. Haskell F. Tallent, dba October 14, 1994 October 13, 1997
Sound Construction of Reno
34773 Seavey Loop Road
Eugene, OR 97405
Jack Roberts, Commissioner
Bu ou of Labor and Industries
wr
orr
err JULY 1, 1997 PAGE 33
+urr
rr
BUREAU OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES BULK RAT"
JACK ROBERTS IMPORTANT NOTICE CONCERNING PREVAILING WAGE RATES U'S' Posta
Commissioner P A 1 b
Portland,
800 NE Oregon St. # 32 Oregon
Portland, Oregon 97232 Permit No11111111
CORWARDING AND ADDRESS CORRECTION REQUESTED
RETURN POSTAGE GUARANTEED
city OF TIGARD
13125 SW HALL BLVD
TIGRRD OR 97223-BL44
IL1I1,I{.
16
�w
AMENDMENT NUMBER 3 TO THE JULY 1, 1997
PREVAILING WAGE RATES FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS IN OREGON
OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03/97-04
EFFECTIVE OCTOBER 1, 1997
Willi
I here have been Changes in the rates of five trades, and zone language changes concerning one trade since the most
ri cent amendment to the July 1, 1997 PWR booklet.
96
L pdates in OREGON DETERMINATION 97-03/97-04 ELECTRICIANS
LINE CONSTRUCTION (AREA 2)
PLUMBERS & STEAMFITTER/PIPEFITTERS (AREA 3)
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (ZONE LANGUAGE CHANGES
ROOFERS (AREA 1)
SOFT FLOOR LAYERS
16
Updates are shown on the back of this sheet. For the sake of brevity, we have not included all of the explanatory
it formation that is found in the regular booklet. Refer to the relevant parts of the July 1997 Booklet for details
c:)ncerning this amendment. If you have any questions, call the PWR Coordinator at (SO3) 731-4074 in Portland.
ALL RATES IN THE JULY 1997 BOOKLET WHICH ARE NOT AMENDED REMAIN IN FORCE.
iV V1' V. 1Y•VV ��VVV VVi • �V1 1..L11 Vl L1•J.7L\V Vi' VVi
amOREGON DETERMINATION 97-03 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: HEAVY-ENTIRE STATE, HIGHWAY ENTIRE STATE.
AMENDMENT EFFECTIVE OCTOBER 1, 1997 NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG. EXCLUDES COOS, CURRY,
DOUGLAS & JOSEPHINE COUNTIES
BASICDOUGLAS
HOURLY FRINGE
wr FRINGE
TRADE RATE BENEFITS TRADE RATE HOURLY BENEFITS
Im ELECTRICIANS POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS
Are 1 ZONE PAY CHANGES ONLY:
FOR E FOLLOWIN � METROPOLITAN COUNTIES:
o Electricians 20.87 5.$4 TH
o Cable Splicers 22.96 5.93 MULTNOMAH; CLACKAMAS; MARION; YAMHILL;
r++ WASHINGTON AND COLUMBIA:
LINE CONSTRUCTION (A; ALL JOBS OR PROJECTS LOCATED IN MULTNOMAH,
Area 2 CLACKAMAS AND MARION COUNTIES, WEST OF THE
WESTERN BOUNDARY OF MT HOOD NATIONAL FOREST
AND WEST OF MILE POST 30 ON INTERSTATE 84 AND
o Cable Splicers 24.81 5.85 WEST OF MILE POST 30 ON STATE HWY 26 AND WEST
o Journeyman Lineman 2.2,50 5.76 OF MILE POST 30 ON HWY 22 AND ALL JOBS LOCATED
o Line Equip. Mech. IN YAMHILL COUNTY, WASHINGTON AND COLUMBIA
(Right-of-way) 19.08 5.61 COUNTY SHALL RECEIVE ZONE 1 PAY FOR ALL
o line Equip. Oper. 19.08 5.61 CLASSIFICATIONS.
o Groundman 13.96 5.39
($) ALL JOBS OR PROJECTS LOCATED IN THE AREA
OUTSIDE THE IDENTIFIED BOUNDARY ABOVE,BUT LESS
PLU_SERS &STEAMFITT R/PIPEF(TT'ERS THAN 50 MILES FROM THE PORTLAND CITY HALL SHALL
Area 3 (Both)" 26.15 8.10 RE'EIVE ZONE 2 PAY FOR ALL CLASSIFICATIONS.
(C) ALL JOBS OR PROJECTS LOCATED MORE THAN 50
"The above rate for Plumbers & Steamfitter/Pipefitters MILES FROM THE PORTLAND CITY HALL, BUT OUTISDE
is ALsA in effect for "NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDING" in THE IDENTIFIED BORDER ABOVE, SHALL RECEIVE ZONE
ow
COOS, Curry, Douglas and Josephine Counties. 3 PAY FOR ALL CLASSIFICATIONS.
ROOFERS EQBHE FOLLOW NI G CITIFY
am ALBANY; BEND; COOS BAY; EUGENE; GRANTS PASS:
-� KLAMATH FALLS; MEDFORD AND ROSEBURG
o Roofers 19.75 5.30 (A) ALL JOBS OR PROJECTS LOCATED WITHIN 30 MILES
o Handling coal tar pitch 21.73 5.30 OF THE RESPECTIVE CITY HALL OF THE ABOVE
MENTIONED CITIES SHALL RECEIVE ZONE 1 PAY FOR
SOFT FLOOR LAYEk$•* 79.85 5.30 + a ALL CLASSIFICATIONS
(B) ALL JOBS OR PROJECTS LOCATED MORE THAN 30
"The above rate for Soft Floor Layers is alaQ in effect MILES AND LESS THAN 50 MILES FROM THE
for "NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDING" in Coos. Curry, RESPECTIVE CITY HALL OF THE ABOVE' MENTIONED
Douglas and Josephine Counties. CITIES SHALL RECEIVE ZONE 2 PAY FOR ALL
CLASSIFICATIONS.
�wr
(C) ALL JOBS OR PROJECTS LOCATED MORE THAN 50
MILES FROM THE RESPECTIVE CITY HALL OF THE ABOVE
MENTIONED CITIES SHALL RECEIVE ZONE 3 PAY FOR
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS.
tw
OCTOBER 1. 1997 PAGE 1
'W' AMENDMENT#3 TO JULY 1. 1997 BOO`(LET
BUREAU OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES - WAGE AND HOUR DIVISION
INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING PAYROLL/CERTIFIED STATEMENT FORM,
WH-38 (Rev 6/97)
General: This form provides for the contractor's showing of the payroll and all monies paid to the employees,
whether as basic rates or as cash in lieu of fringe benefits, and provides for the contractor's representation in
the payroll/certified statement that he/she is paying other benefits required by the contract and not paid as to
cash in lieu of fringe benefits. Detailed instructions concerning the preparation of the form follow:
Complete the box at the top of the form. Complete the appropriate prime contractor or subcontractor box. Be
sure to enter the date the contract was first advertised for bid. If you are not sure of this date, contact the atr
Public Contracting Agency.
Column 1 - Name. Address. and Serial Security number of Employea: The employee's full name must be til
shown on each payroll submitted. The employee's address must also be shown on the first payroll submitted.
The address need not be shown on subsequent payrolls unless the address changes. Although not required,
space is available in the name and address section so that Social Security numbers can be listed.
Column 2 - Trade Classifications: List the classification found in the Bureau of Labor and Industries' IN
publication "Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts in Oregon," which is most descriptive of the
work actually performed by the employee. Give the group number for those worker classifications which
include such information. Consult the worker classifications and minimum prevailing wage rate schedule set 46
forth in contract specifications. Refer to the appropriate prevailing wage rates in effect at the time the
contract was first advertised for bid for information regarding trade classifications, basic hourly rates, and
hourly fringe benefits. Indicate which workers are apprentices, if any, and give their current percentage, trade
classification, and group number when applicable. If additional worker classifications are deemed necessary,
contact the contracting public agency. If an employee works in more than one worker classification, use the
highest rate for all hours worked, or use separate line entries to show hours worked, rate of pay, and fringe
benefit for each classification.
i11Y
Column 3 - DAY AND DATE: Enter the day of the week (M, T, W, Th, F, S, Su) in the top row of boxes, and
the number of the day of the month below.
-_HOURS WORKED EACH DAY• Enter overtime hours in the row marked "OT". See ORS 279.334 and page 2
of this booklet for changes in the overtime requirements.
Column 4 - Total Hours: Enter separately the total number of overtime hours and straight time hours worked no
by each listed classification during this pay period; overtime VOT") on top, straight time ("S") immediately
below.
Column 5 - Basi . Hourly Rate of Pay: Enter the basic hourly rate and the overtime hourly rate (if any) paid the am
employee in the appropriate overtime and straight time boxes. Payment of not less than one and one half
times the basic or regular rate paid is required for overtime under ORS 279.334.
Column 6 - Hourly Fringe Benefit Paid as Wages to the Em �
g RlfZylrg, Enter any additional.cash paid directly to the
employee in lieu of fringe benefits. It is not necessary to pay time and a half for overtime work on those
wages which are paid in lieu of fringe benefits.
Column 7 - Gross amount earned• Enter the gross wages earned by the worker in this classification for all
listed straight time hours, all listed overtime hours, and including all additional amounts paid directly to the
employee.
. rel
Column 8 - Total Deductions. Giro FED STATE ETC* Enter the total amount of deductions withheld from
each employee for just those hours reported on this payroll/certified statement for this project. All deductions
must be in accordance with the provisions of ORS 652.610.
Column 9 - Net Wages Paid for Week• Enter the amount of wage actually paid to the employee after
subtracting the total deductions reported in Column 8 from the gross amount earned shown in Column 7.
r�r
rir INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING PAYROLL/CERTIFIED STATEMENT FORM,
WH-38 (Rev 6/97)
Column 10 - Hourly Fringe Benefit Paid to Party, plan Fund or Program; Enter the hourly amount of fringe
benefits paid to each individually approved party, plan, fund or program for each employee. List these amounts
separately on the lines provided. Any contactor who is making payments to approved parties, plans, funds or
programs in amounts lest than the reauired hourly fringe benefit is obligated to pay the difference directly to
the employee as wages in lieu of fringe benefits, and to show that amount in Column 6 of this form.
r� Column 11 - Name of Benefit Party. plan Fund or Program: Enter the name of the party, plan, fund or program
that corresponds to the amount shown as an hourly fringe benefit in fgjumn 10.
Summary - In order to determine if the wages and fringe benefits being certified by this statement are sufficient
to meet prevailing wage rate requirements, the following check may be performed:
1. Consider each Trade Classification listed in Column 2.
2. For that Trade Classification, take the sum of:
a) the Basic Hourly Rate of Pay (Column 5),
b) the Hourly Fringe Benefit Paid as Wage to Employee (Column 6),
c) and the Hourly Fringe Benefit Paid To Party, Plan, Fund or Program (Column 10).
3. This sum must equal or exceed the sum of the Basic Hourly Rate (including zone pay and special
wage differentials, if any) and the Fringe Benefit as they are listed for that Trade Classification
in the appropriately dated issue of the Bureau of Labor and Industries publication Prevailing Wage
Rates for Public Works Contracts in Oregon,
+er
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS: YOU ARE NO LONGER REQUIRED TO SUBMIT COPIES OF THE PAYROLUCERTIFIED
STATEMENT TO THE BUREAU OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES. THE STATEMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE PROJECT
CONTRACTING AGENCY.
+Wli
Ire
G A W HOWW RISOOKLETI381NST.SAM
WIW
iW�
(1) (Z)
(3) DAY AND DATE (4) (E) (g) (7) (8) (8) (10) (11)
NAME.ADDRESS AND TRADE
SOCIAL SECURITY CLASSIFICATION TOTAL BASIC HOURLY FRINGE GROSS TOTAL NET WAGE HOURLY FRINGE NAME OF BENEFIT
NUMBER OF EMPLOYEE
IINCLUOE GROU HOURS HOURLY BENEFIT PAID AS AMOUNT DEDUCTION PAID FOR. BENEFIT PAID TO PARTY,PLAN,FUND,
47
P IF APPUCABIEI RATE OF WAGE TO EARNED FICA,FED. WEEK PARTY,PLAN, OR
PAY EMPLOYEE STATE.ETC. FUND OR PROGRAM
HOURS WORKED EACH DAY PROGRAM
OT
S
OT
S
OT
S
OT
S
CERTIFIED STATEMENT
I
'
(NAME OF SIGNATORY PARTY) (TITLE) DO HEREBY STATE:
(1) THAT I PAY OR SUPERVISE THE PAYMENT OF THE PERSONS EMPLOYED BY; ON THE
(CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR OR SURETY) (BUILDING OR WORK)
THAT DURING THE PAYROLL PERIOD COMMENCING ON THE DAY OF , 19 , AND ENDING THE DAY OF , 19
ALL PERSONS EMPLOYED ON SAID PROJECT HAVE BEEN PAID THE FULL WEEKLY WAGES EARNED, THAT NO REBATES HAVE BEEN OR WILL BE MADE EITHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY
TO OR ON BEHALF OF SAID FROM THE FULL WEEKLY WAGES EARNED BY ANY PERSON, AND THAT NO DEDUCTIONS HAVE BEEN MADE EITHER
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM THE FULL WAGES EARNED BY ANY PERSON, OTHER THAN PERMISSIBLE DEDUCTIONS AS SPECIFIED IN ORS 652.610, AND DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS:
12) THAT ANY PAYROLLS OTHERWISE UNDER THIS CONTRACT REQUIRED TO BE SUBMITTED FOR THE ABOVE PERIOD ARE CORRECT AND COMPLETE; THAT THE WAGE RATES FOR
WORKERS CONTAINED THEREIN ARE NOT LESS THAN THE APPLICABLE WAGE RATES CONTAINED IN ANY WAGE DETERMINATION INCORPORATED IN THE CONTRACT; THAT THE
CLASSIFICATION SET FORTH THEREIN FOR EACH WORKER CONFORMS WITH WORK PERFORMED.
(3) THAT ANY APPRENTICES EMPLOYED IN THE ABOVE PERIOD ARE DULY REGISTERED IN A BONA FIDE APPRENTICESHIP PROGRAM REGISTERED WITH A STATE APPRENTICESHIP AGENCY
RECOGNIZED BY THE BUREAU OF APPRENTICESHIP AND TRAINING, UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF LABOR, OR IF NO SUCH RECOGNIZED AGENCY EXISTS IN A STATE, ARE REGISTERED
WITH THE BUREAU OFAPPRENTICESHIP AND TRAINING, UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF LABOR.
I HAVE READ THIS CERTIFIED STATEMENT, KNOW THE CONTENTS THEREOF AND IT IS TRUE TO MY KNOWLEDGE.
NAME AND TITLE SIGNATURE
NOTE TO CONTRACTORS. YOU MUST ATTACH COPIES OF THIS FORM TO EACH OF YOUR PAYROLL SUBMISSIONS ON THIS PROJECT. SEE THE BOLI PUBLICATION PREVAILING WA
GE
RATES FOR P ELIC WORK ONTRA TS IN OREGON FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON COMPLETING THIS FORM.
I J A I FILE jFORi IH TF j4TR AG .1
FORM WH 38 IRFV 6196i
BUREAU OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES
NOTICE OF AWARD OF PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT
(For use by Public Agencies in Complying with ORS 279.363)
1.CONTRACTING AGENCY INFORMATION
Name Agency Number
Address
r
City,State,Zip
Agency Representative Phone
2. CONTRACT INFORMATION
Project Name Project Number
Project Manager Name Fax Number
Phone Number !till
Project Location (Street(s), City, state)
Project County Contract Amount
Source of Funds (i.e. 100% Federal Funds, 50/50 Federal/State, 100° Local, etc.)
Note: If this project is Federally funded and subject to the Davis Bacon Act, do not submit this
form to the Oregon Bureau of Labor and Industries. If Federal funds are involved, but the projec
is subject to Oregon prevailing wage rate, please specify.
Date Contract Specifications First Advertised for Bid
Date Contract Awarded Date Work Expected to Begin
Date First Progress Payment Due Expected Date of Completion
3.PRIME CONTRACTOR INFORMATION "
Name
Address
City, State,Zip Phone
Construction Contractors Board Registration Number
Workers'Comp. Insurance Company
Workers' Comp Policy/Binder Number
THIS FORM WILL BE RETURNED TO THE CONTRACTING AGENCY FOR
CORRECTION AND RESUBMITTAL IF INCOMPLETE.
RETURN THIS COMPLETED FORM Ta Bureau of Labor and Industries
Wage and Hour Division Rm 1160
Prevailing Wage Section
800 NE OREGON#32
PORTLAND,OR 87232
(503)731-4074,ExT.233 Fax: (503)731-4606
g:\w hd\pwr\bidawa rd.ss m(Rev.6/96)
WH-81
F
ANN
H :
N '
Bureau of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage Rate Unit
r„ 800 N.E. Oregon St.,# 32
Portland, OR 97232
Phone: (503)731-4074, Fax: (503)731-4623
PUBLIC WORK CONTRACT FEE INFORMATION FORM
„W (For use by contractors in complying with ORS 279.375)
THIS FORM TO BE USED FOR PROJECTS AWARDED AFTER SEPTEMBER 9, 1995 ONLY
ar
Contractors: Please complete and mail this form to BOLI at the above address, along with the appropriate fee
(1/10th of 1%of the contract price* ) payable to BOLI. MINIMUM FEE IS $100.00, MAXIMUM FEE IS
to $5,000.00. Without the following completed information,the bureau may be unable to properly credit you
for payment received.
Aw BUSINESS NAME(DBA) CCB#
MAILING ADDRESS: PHONE: j
(STREET OR PO BOX#)
go (CITY,STATE,ZIP)
PROJECT NAME:
PROJECT NUMBER: PROJECT LOCATION:
wo
AGENCY AWARDING CONTRACT:
rrr AGENCY CONTACT PERSON: PHONE: ( 1
CONTRACT AMOUNT: DATE AWARDED: DATE WORK BEGAN:
*(Contract amount X.001)
err
rr
irr
rr
(Please duplicate this form for future use)
12M197fmfm sam
f
Bureau of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage Rate Unit
800 N.E. Oregon St. , # 32
Portland, OR 97232
phone: (503) 731-4074 , ext . 2501
FAX: (503) 731-4623
pUBLTG WORKS CONTRACT RF.F. anjUSTMENT FORM ■i1
THIS FORM TO BE USED FOR RECONCILIATION OF FEES ON COMPLETION OF
PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS
(As required by ORS 279.375 and OAR 839-16-210)
Contractors: Please complete and mail this form to BOLI at the above address, after
completion of the public works project and not less than 30 days after the final
payment by the contracting agency. Contractors are required to determine the final
contract price, including all change orders or other adjustments to the original
contract price and to calculate the adjusted prevailing wage rate fee, based on thei
revised contract price. Documentation must be included to support the final contract
price. The prevailing wage rate fee, .001, (1/10th of 1%) shall be applied to the
final contract price, with credit taken for fees already submitted. The contractor
must submit the additional fee payable to BOLI with the adjustment form or requests
for refund if applicable. ::O ADDITIONAL FEE WILL BE CHARGED. NOR _A
REFUND MADE ON ANY RECONCILF'D AMOUNTS UNDER 5100 . 00 , i
BUSINESS NAME (DBA) CCB #
MAILING ADDRESS: PHONE: ( )
(STREET OR PO BOX #, CITY, STATE, ZIP)
PROJECT NAME:
PROJECT NUMBER: PROJECT LOCATION:
AGENCY AWARDING CONTRACT: DATE AWARDED:
FINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: FINAL FEE DUE*:
(Include all change orders and adjustments * (Final Contract amount X .001)
to the contract price)
ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: INITIAL FEE PAID*:
alr
* (Contract amount X .001)
BALANCE DUB: REFUND DUE:
(Final contract fee less initial fee paid)
Sample Calculation:
Final Contract Amount: $400,000.00 Final Fee Due: $400.00
Original Contract Amt: -100.000.00 Initial Fee Paid: -300.00
Total Adjustment: $100,000.00 Amount Due or Refund Due: $100.00
*Documentation may consist of change orders or other contract documents substantiating
the amount of the contract.
is/ii/fs ADaa.sar (Ple4oe duplicate thio form for future use)
PLANNED PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT SUMMARY
FISCAL YEAR - PAGE OF
(Name of State or Local Government Agency)
Project Project Agency or
Number Project Name Type Project Location Estimated Project Cost Contract Work
ORS 289.023 generally states that not less than 30 days prior to adoption of its budget for the subsequent budget period, each public agency shall prepare and
file with the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries a list of every public improvement known to that agency that the agency plans to fund in the
budget period. If the agency decides to use its own equipment and personnel for construction projects estimated to cost more than $50,000, the agency shall
show that the decision conforms to the policy of the State of Oregon that public agencies shall make every effort to construct public improvements at the least
cost to the public agency, and the public agency shall cause to be kept and preserved a full, true and accurate account of the costs of performing the work
FORM WH-118 (Rev 6/96) including all engineering and administrative expenses and a reasonable estimate of the cost, including investment cost, of the equipment used. NOTE: This
Improvement Summary together with the project estimate and least cost determination constitutes a public record available in the usual manner for public review
or copying: Mail a copy of this public improvement summary to: Wage and Hour Division, 800 NE Oregon St., # 32, Portland, Oregon 97232.
CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PROJECT COST COMPARISON ESTIMATE
(Name of State or Local Government Agency)
DEPARTMENT: PROJECT NAME: FUND:
PROPOSED YEAR: PROJECT NUMBER:
PROJECT DESCRIPTION:
Rough A enc Force Estimate A-Qencv Contract Estimate
Quantity Unit Total Unit Total
Estimate Units Work Class Description Cost Cost Cost Cost
Estimated Construction Period $ $
determines that (Agency Forces)(Contractor) can perform this work at the least cost.
(Name of Agency) (cross out one)
FORM WH - 119 (Rev 6/96)
(Agency Official)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
TERMS
ABBREVIATIONS
' AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
tw
NEL National Electric Code
aw The numbers and letters following the abbreviations denote the serial designation for the specification
or standard to which reference is made.
IN DEFINITIONS
Addenda-Written or graphic instructions issued prior to the execution of the Contract which modify
or interpret the Contract Documents, drawings, and specifications, by additions, deletions,
clarifications, or corrections, that become a portion of the Contract Documents.
Agency/Owner- The City of Tigard, Tigard, Oregon.
Bonds-Bid, Performance, and Payment Bonds, and other instruments of security, furnished by the
Contractor and his surety in accordance with the Contract Documents.
W, Change Order-A written order to the Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion, or revision in the
work within the general scope of the Contract Documents, or authorizing an adjustment in the
Contract price or Contract time.
Contract Documents - The Contract, including Advertisement for Bids, Information for Bidders,
proposal, Bid Bond, Contract, Performance and Payment Bond, Drawings, Specifications, and any
Change Orders or Addenda.
Contract Price - The total monies payable to the Contractor under the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents.
Contract Time -the number of calendar days stated in the Contract Documents for the completion
of the work.
Contractor- The person, firm, corporation, partnership, or association duly licensed or approved by
" ' the State of Oregon and the Agency with whom the Agency has executed the Contract.
Engineer- The Agency's designated project engineer during construction.
Inspector- The person designated by the Agency to inspect the work.
Notice to Proceed-Written communication issued by the Agency to the Contractor authorizing him
to proceed with the work and establishing the date of commencement of the work.
Project - The undertaking to be performed as provided in the Contract Documents.
Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures, schedules, and other data which
are prepared by the Contractor,Manufacturer, Supplier, or Distributor, which illustrate how specific
portions of the work shall be fabricated or installed.
Existing system -All pipes, structures, and appurtenances presently existing at the plant site.
Supplemental General Conditions-Modifications to the General Conditions and included as a portion
of the Contract Documents.
Work-All labor necessary to produce the construction required by the Contract Documents, and all
materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the project.
rrw
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
INTENT
The intent of the Drawings and Specifications is that the contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
tools, equipment, and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work in accordance
with the Contract Documents and all incidental work necessary to complete the project in an
acceptable manner, ready for use and operation by the Agency.
While it is believed that much of the information pertaining to conditions which may affect the cost
of the proposed work will be shown on the plans or indicated in the specifications, the Owner does
not warrant the completeness or accuracy of such information. It is the contractor's responsibility to
ascertain the existence of any conditions affecting the cost of the work which would have been
disclosed by reasonable examination of the site.
All work shall be done in compliance with Agency ordinances, and resolution and orders where not
covered by specifications or drawings in this document.
CONFLICT Vi
In case of conflict between the drawings and specifications, the specifications shall govern.
Dimensions on drawings shall govern over scaled dimensions, and detailed drawings shall govern over
general drawings.
ftr
DISCREPANCIES
Any discrepancies found between the drawings, specifications, and site conditions or any
inconsistencies or ambiguities in the drawings or specifications, shall be immediately reported to the
Agency in writing, who will promptly correct such
inconsistencies or ambiguities in writing. Work done by the contractor after his discovery of such
discrepancies, inconsistencies, or ambiguities shall be done at the contractor's risk.
CHANGES IN THE WORK AND CONTRACT PRICE
WORK CHANGES
The Agency may at any time, as the need arises, order changes within the scope of the work without
M, invalidating the Contract. If such changes increase or decrease the amount due under the Contract
Documents, or in the time required for performance of the work, an equitable adjustment shall be
authorized by Change Order.
CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract price may be changed only by a Change Order. The value of any work covered by a
Change Order or any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract price shall be determined by
one or more of the following methods in the order or precedence listed below:
wr
1. Unit prices previously approved.
2. An agreed lump sum.
3. Force account. The actual cost for labor, direct overhead, materials, supplies,
equipment, and other services necessary to complete the work shall be documented.
The Contractor shall maintain records in such a manner as to provide a clear
distinction between the direct cost of extra work paid for on the force account basis
and the costs of other operations performed in connection with the contract.
The Contractor shall furnish to the engineer daily reports in duplicate of the extra work to be paid
for on a force account basis. The reports shall itemize the materials used and shall set forth the direct
cost of labor and the charges for equipment rental whether furnished by the Contractor, or
••y sub-contractor. The reports shall provide names or identifications and classifications of workers, the
hourly rate of pay and hours worked together with the size, type and identification number of
equipment and hours of equipment operation.
Material charges shall be submitted by vendors' invoices. Such invoices shall be submitted with the
reports; or, if not available, they shall be submitted with subsequent reports. In the event said
' ' vendors' invoices are not submitted within fifteen (15) days after acceptance of the work, the
!
contracting agency reserves the right to establish the cost of such materials at the lowest current price
at which said materials are available in the appropriate quantities delivered to the location of work.
All reports shall be signed by the Contractor or an authorized representative.
The Agency will compare records with the reports furnished by the Contractor, make any necessary
adjustments and then compile the costs of extra work paid for on a force account basis on forms
furnished by the contracting agency. When these extra work reports are agreed upon and signed by
both parties, they shall become the basis of payment for the work.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES
CONTRACTOR,AN INDEPENDENT AGENT
The Contractor shall perform all work under this Contract as an Independent Agent and shall not be +sir
considered as an agent of the Owner, nor shall the Contractor's subcontractors or employees be
subagents of the Owner.
w
SUBCONTRACTING
Within thirty (30) days after the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer the names of all subcontractors proposed for the work, including the names of any
subcontractors that were submitted with the Proposal. The Contractor shall not employ any
subcontractors that the Engineer may object to as lacking capability to properly perform work of the
type and scope anticipated. No changes will be allowed from the approved subcontractor list without
approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his
subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and
omissions of persons directly employed by him.
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any
subcontractor and the Owner.
INSURANCE AND LIABILITY 40
A. GENERAL
The Contractor shall provide (from insurance companies acceptable to the Owner) the
insurance coverage designated hereinafter and pay all costs.
Before commencing work under this Contract, Contractor shall furnish the Owner with
certificates of insurance specified herein showing the type, amount, class of operations '
covered, effective dates, and date of expiration of policies, and containing substantially the
following statement:
"The insurance covered by this certificate will not be canceled or materially altered,
except after thirty(3 0) days written notice has been received by the Owner."
In case of the breach of any provision of this Article, the Owner, at his option, may take out
and maintain, at the expense of the Contractor, such insurance as the Owner may deem proper
and may deduct the cost of such insurance from any monies which may be due or become due
the Contractor under this Contract.
The Contractor shall waive subrogation rights against the Owner under the insurance policies
required. The "other insurance" clause in the required insurance shall not apply to the
insurance policies of the Owner.
i
B. CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR INSURANCE
ON The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all the
insurance required hereunder and such insurance has been reviewed by the Owner, nor shall
the Contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until insurance
AM specified below has been obtained. Review of the insurance by the Owner shall not relieve
or decrease-the liability of the Contractor hereunder.
C. COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
The Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Contract the statutory Workers'
WE Compensation, in addition, Employer's Liability Insurance in an amount not less than
$100,000.00 for each occurrence, for all of his employees to be engaged in work on the
aw project under this Contract and, in case any such work is sublet, the Contractor shall require
the subcontractor similarly to provide Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability
Insurance for all of the latter's employees to be engaged in such work. Where work under this
Contract includes any water or navigational exposure, coverage shall be included to cover the
Federal Longshoremen's and Harbor worker's Act and the Federal Jones Act.
D. GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE (INCLUDING AUTOMOBILE)
The Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Contract such general liability and
automobile liability insurance as will provide coverage for claims for damages for personal
injury, including accidental death, as well as for claims for property damage, which may arise
directly or indirectly from performance of the work under this Contract. Coverage for
property damage shall be on a"broad form" basis. Amount of insurance to be provided shall
be $500,000.00 combined single limit for bodily injury, liability and property damage per
occurrence, plus umbrella excess liability for the general liability and automobile liability
' insurance in an amount not less than $5,000,000.00 per occurrence in excess of the above
UW
16
stated primary limits. Any applicable retention above the required limits of insurance shall be to
assumed by the Contractor and shall not be collectible from the Owner or its insurers.
In the event any work under this Contract is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor
shall be responsible for any liability directly arising out of the work performed under this
Contract by a subcontractor, which liability is not covered by the subcontractor's insurance.
The Owner and Engineer,their officers, agents, and employees shall be named as additional insureds
on the Contractor's and any subcontractors'general liability and automobile liability insurance policies
for any claims arising out of work performed under this Contract.
E. BUILDERS RISK ALL RISK INSURANCE
Unless otherwise modified in the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall
secure and maintain during the life of this contract, Builders Risk All Risk Insurance coverage
for 100 percent of the Contract amount. Such insurance shall include coverage for
earthquake, landslide, flood, collapse, or loss due to the results of faulty workmanship, and
shall provide for losses to be paid to the Contractor and the Owner as their interests may
appears.
F. INSURANCE COVERAGE FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS '
When the construction is to be accomplished within a public or private right-of-way requiring
special insurance coverage, the Contractor shall conform to the particular requirements of the
authority having jurisdiction and provide the required insurance. The Contractor shall include
in his liability policy all endorsements that the said authority may require for the protection
of the authority, its officers, gents, and employees. Insurance coverage for special conditions,
when required, shall be provided as set forth in the
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
G. NO PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS
rr
In carrying out any of the provisions hereof in exercising any authority granted by the
Contract, there will be no personal liability upon any public official.
INDEMNITY •
The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Engineer, and their agents and
employees from and against all claims demands penalties, damages, losses expenses, including
g , p g p g
attorneys' fees and causes of action of any kind or character, including the cost of defense thereof,
arising or alleged to have risen in favor of any person on account of personal injury, death or damage
to property arising out of or resulting from or alleged to have risen out of or resulted from in whole
yr
AW or in part, any act or omission of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
Im In any and all claims against the Owner, the Engineer, or any of their agents or employees by an
employee of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them
or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation of the Contractor
under this Article shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages,
compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any subcontractor under Workers'
w+
Compensation Acts, Disability Benefit Acts, or other Employee Benefit Acts.
TAXES AND CHARGES
The Contractor shall withhold and pay any and all sales and use taxes and all withholding taxes,
whether State or Federal, and pay all Social Security charges and also all State Unemployment
aw Compensation charges, and pay or cause to be withheld, as the case may be, any and all taxes,
charges, or fees or sums whatsoever, which are now or may hereafter be required to be paid or
withheld under any laws.
wig
ORDINANCES, PERMITS,AND LICENSES
The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed of all local ordinances, as well as State and Federal
laws, which in any manner affect the work herein specified. The Contractor shall at all times comply
with said ordinances, laws, and regulations, and protect and indemnify the Owner and its officers and
agents against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such laws,
ordinances, or regulations. All permits, licenses, and inspection fees necessary for prosecution and
completion of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor, unless otherwise specified.
REQUIREMENTS OF OREGON LAW FOR PUBLIC CONTRACTS
When the contract Documents concern public works of the State or any County, municipality, or
political subdivision created by its laws, the applicable statutes of the State of Oregon shall apply.
For this reason, Sections 279.310 through 279.356 of the Oregon Revised Statutes, as amended or
superseded, including the latest additions and revisions, are incorporated by reference as part of these
Contract Documents.
These sections define the requirements of Oregon law for public contracts:
A. Concerning payment of laborers and materialmen, contributions to State Accident Insurance
Fund (SAIF), prevention of liens, payment of withholding taxes.
B. Concerning the maximum hours and length of day's labor, overtime provisions and
requirement, and payment of medical care and attention to employees.
C. Concerning payment of not less than prevailing wage rates. The Contractor shall pay not less
than the prevailing rates of wages in conformance with ORS 279.350. Certification of wage
payments by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Owner in conformance with ORS
279.354. Wage certification forms shall be provided by the Contractor.
D. Concerning payment of claims by public officers, provisions relating to environmental and
natural resource laws and rules, and termination of Contract by mutual agreement or for
public interest. di
It is understood and agreed that all parties to this Contract shall determine the contents of
these applicable statutes and comply with their provisions throughout the performance of the
contract.
CONTRACTORS' AND MANUFACTURERS' COMPLIANCE WITH STATE SAFETY, ,
OSHA,AND OTHER CODE REQUIREMENTS
The completed work shall include all necessary permanent safety devices, such as machinery guards it
and similar ordinary safety items required by the State and Federal (OSHA) industrial authorities and
applicable local and national codes. Further, any features of the work (including Owner-select
equipment) subject to such safety regulations shall be fabricated, furnished, and installed in '
compliance with these requirements. Contractors and manufacturers of equipment shall be held
responsible for compliance with the requirements included herein. Contractors shall notify all
equipment suppliers and subcontractors of the provisions of this Article.
SAFETY
The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the jobsite, including
safety of all persons (including employees) and property from the time of award of the contract
through and including final acceptance by the Owner. This requirement and attendant liability shall
apply continuously on a 24 hour basis. Contractor's covenant to indemnify contained herein expressly
includes any damages, etc., arising out of any such jobsite conditions. Safety provisions shall conform
to U.S. Department of Labor(OSHA), the State Occupational Safety and Health Act, and all other
applicable Federal, State, County, and local laws, ordinances, codes, the requirements set forth below,
and any regulations that may be detailed in other parts of these Documents. Where any of these are ,;
in conflict,the more stringent requirement shall be followed. The Contractor's failure to thoroughly
familiarize himself with the aforementioned safety provisions shall not relieve him from compliance
with the obligations and penalties set for herein.
The Contractor shall develop and maintain for the duration of the Contract, a safety program that will
effectively incorporate and implement all required safety provisions. The Contractor shall appoint
an employee who is qualified and authorized to supervise and enforce compliance with the safety
program.
>
The duty of the Engineer to conduct construction review of the Contractor's performance is not
intended to include a review or approval of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety supervisor, safety
program, or any safety measures taken in, or near the construction site.
The Contractor, as a part of his safety program, shall maintain his office or other well-known place
at the jobsite, safety equipment applicable to the work as prescribed by the aforementioned
authorities, all articles necessary for giving first aid to the inured, and shall establish the procedure
"' for the immediate removal to a hospital or a doctor's care of persons (including employees)who may
be injured on the jobsite.
sw If death or serious injuries or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be reported immediately
by telephone or messenger to both the Engineer and the Owner. In addition, the Contractor must
promptly report in writing to the Engineer all accidents whatsoever arising out of, or in connection
with, the performance of the work whether on, or adjacent to, the site, giving full details and
statements of witnesses.
If a claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or any subcontractor on account of any accident,
the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Engineer, giving full details of the
claim.
PROSECUTION OF THE WORK
It is expressly understood and agreed that the time of beginning, rate of progress, and time of
completion of the work are of the essence of this contractor. The work shall be prosecuted at such
w time, and in or on such part or parts of the project as may be required, to complete the project as
contemplated in the Contract Documents and the approved construction schedule.
If the Contractor desires to carry on work at night or outside the regular hours, he shall give timely
notice to the engineer to allow satisfactory arrangements to be made for inspecting the work in
progress.
ASSIGNMENT
Neither party to the contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written
consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due to him
MW hereunder without the previous written consent of the Owner.
SUSPENSION OF WORK
The Agency may suspend the work and give written notice to the Contractor stating such when the
Contractor is using material which does not conform to the requirements of these Contract
++ Documents or is improperly performing the work, and neglects or refuses to replace or reconstruct
such work. The suspension shall remain in effect until appropriate corrections are made. Review of
the Agency's decision shall be made,upon request, by the City Manager within 48 hours of the initial
suspension. Regardless of his decision,the Agency shall not incur pecuniary liability for any incorrect
suspension of work, unless such suspension was a willfully malicious act of the Agency.
`°�" AGENCY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK
If the Contractor should, in the opinion of the architect, neglect to prosecute the work properly or
should neglect or refuse at his own cost to take up and replace work as shall have been rejected by
the engineer,then the Agency shall notify the surety company of the condition, and after ten (10) days
written notice to the Contractor and the surety company, or without notice if an emergency or danger
to the work or public exists, and without prejudice to any other right which the Owner may have
under the Contract,take over that portion of the work which has been improperly executed and make
good the deficiencies and deduct the cost thereof from the payments then or thereafter due the
Contractor.
w
OWNER'S RIGHT TO TRANSFER EMPLOYMENT
If the Contractor should abandon the work or should be adjudged a bankrupt, or if he should make
a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account
of his insolvency, or if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for
which extension of time is provided,to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials,
or if he should fail to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for material or labor, or persistently
disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the engineer, or otherwise be guilty of substantial
violation of any provision of the Contractor or any laws or ordinance, then the Owner, if sufficient
cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other right or remedy, and after
giving the Contractor and surety seven(7)days written notice,transfer the employment for said work
from the Contractor to the surety. Upon receipt of such notice, such surety shall enter upon the
premises and take possession of all materials, tools, and appliances thereon for the purpose of
completing the work included under this contract and employ, by Contract or otherwise, any person
or persons to finish the work and provide the materials therefore without termination of the
continuing full force and effect of this Contract. In case of such transfer of employment to such
surety, the surety shall be paid in its own name on estimates according to the terms hereof without
any right of the Contractor to make any claim for the same or any part thereof. In lieu of the
foregoing, if the Owner so elects, he may terminate the employment of the Contractor and take
possession of the premises and of all materials, tools, and appliances thereon and finish the work by
whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive
any further payment until the work is finished. If the expense of completing the Contract, including
compensation for additional managerial and administrative services, shall exceed such unpaid balance,
the contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
SCHEDULES AND PROGRESS REPORTS
Prior to starting the construction,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for review,
a progress schedule showing approximately the dates on which each part or division of the work is
expected to be started and finished. The progress schedule shall be brought up to date and submitted
to the Engineer at the end of each month or at such other times the Engineer may request.
The Contractor shall also forward to the Engineer, at the end of each month, an itemized report of
the delivery status of major and critical items of purchased equipment and material, including shop
drawings and the status of shop and field fabricated work. These progress reports shall indicate the
ww
*W
im date of the purchase order, the current percentage of completion, estimated delivery, and cause of
delay, if any.
If the completion of any part of the work or the delivery of materials is behind the approved schedule,
the contractor shall submit in writing a plan acceptable to the Owner and Engineer for bringing the
work up to schedule.
The Owner shall have the right to withhold progress payments for the work if the Contractor fails to
update and submit the progress schedule and reports as specified.
DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME
law
If the contractor is delayed in the progress of the work by any act or neglect of the Owner, of the
Engineer, or by a separate Contractor employed by the Owner, or by strikes, lockouts, fire, unusual
ow weather conditions, or unavoidable casualties, the Contractor shall, within 48 hours of the s tart of
the occurrence, give notice to the Owner of the cause of the potential delay and estimate the possible
time extension involved. Within seven (7) days after the cause of delay has been remedied, the
Contractor shall give notice to the Owner of any actual time extension required as a result of the
aforementioned occurrence.
■r No extension of time will be granted to the contractor for delays occurring to parts of the work that
have no measurable impact on the completion of the total work under this contract; nor will extension
of time be granted for delays to parts of work that are not located on the critical path if the Critical
Path Method (CPM) is used for scheduling the work.
No extension of time will be considered for weather conditions normal to the area in which the work
aw is being performed. Unusual weather conditions, if determined by the Engineer to be of a severity
that would stop all progress of the work, may be considered as cause for an extension of Contract
completion time.
Delays in delivery of equipment or material purchased by the Contractor or his subcontractors
(including Owner-selected equipment) shall not be considered as a just case for delay. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for the timely ordering, scheduling, expediting, delivery, and
installation of all equipment and materials.
Within a reasonable period after the Contractor submits to the Owner a written request for an
extension of time, the Engineer will present his written opinion to the Owner as to whether an
,.. extension of time is justified, and if so, his recommendation as to the number of days for time
extension. The Owner will make the final decision on all requests for extension of time.
In no event shall the Contractor be entitled under this Contract to collect or recover any damages,
loss, or expense incurred by a delay other than as caused by the Owner, as stipulated in Article 72,
NOTICE OF CLAIM FOR DELAY.
w■
;.r
aw
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
MEASUREMENT
Materials and items of work which are to be paid for on the basis of measurement shall be measured
in accordance with the methods stipulated in the particular sections herein covering materials or types
of work.
PAYMENT
Progress payments shall be made once each month. The Contractor will submit to the Agency a
partial payment estimate signed by the Contractor covering the work performed during that period
and supported by such data as the Agency may reasonably require. If payment is required on the
basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the work but delivered and suitably stored, the
partial payment estimate shall also be accompanied by such supporting data. The Agency will, within +
ten (10) days after receipt, either indicate approval or refusal of payment. In the latter case, the
Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the partial payment estimate. The
Agency, will, within fourteen (14) days after the next regularly scheduled meeting of its Board of
Directors pay the Contractor a progress payment on the basis of the approved partial payment
estimate.
RETAINAGE
The Agency will deduct and retain five (5) percent of the amount earned for work satisfactorily
completed or material delivered to the jobsite. In lieu of the five (5) percent retainage, provisions
may be made as provided in ORS 279 for depositing with the Agency, approved bonds or securities.
FINAL PAYMENT
Upon completion of the project, the Agency and Contractor shall conduct a final inspection. With
acceptance of the completed project, the final estimate shall be prepared and payment made to the ,
Contractor. Any payment, however,final or otherwise, shall not release the Contractor or his sureties
from any obligations under the Contract Documents or the Performance and Payment bond.
RELEASE OF LIENS OF CLAIMS
Before the Owner pays the Contractor his final payment for the work, the contractor shall sign and 't
deliver to the Owner a release of liens or claims sworn to under oath and duly notarized. The release
shall state that the Contractor has satisfied all claims and indebtedness of every nature in any way
connected with the work, including (but not limiting the generality of the foregoing) all payrolls,
amounts due to subcontractors, accounts for labor performed and materials furnished, incidental
services, liens, and judgments.
i
.r.
CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE
Prior to the acceptance of the work, the Owner may require a certificate in form substantially as
follows: "I (We) hereby certify that all work has been performed and materials supplied in
accordance with the Contract Documents for the above work, and that:
A. Not less than the prevailing rates of wages has been paid to laborers, workers and mechanics
employed on this work.
B. There have been no unauthorized substitutions of subcontractors' nor have any subcontracts
been entered into without the names of the subcontractors having been submitted to the
engineer prior to the start of such subcontracted work;
C. No subcontract was assigned or transferred or performed by any subcontractor other than the
original subcontractor, without prior notice having been submitted to the engineer together
with the names of all subcontractors;
�. D. All claims for material and labor and other service performed in connection with these
specifications have been paid.
E. All monies due the State Industrial Accident Fund, the State Unemployment Compensation
Trust Fund (ORS 279.510), the State Tax Commission (ORS 315.575, 316,711 and
316.714), hospital associations and/or others, (ORS 279.320), have been paid."
GUARANTY
The Contractor shall furnish high quality equipment, suPPlies and materials and perform the work
in accordance with these Contract Documents. Any failure or omission of any Agency inspector to
condemn any defective equipment, supplies, materials, or work shall not be construed as an
acceptance thereof nor release the Contractor from his obligations with respect thereto.
The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment furnished and work performed for a
minimum period of one(1)year or as required as noted in other sections of these specifications from
the date of final acceptance. The Contractor further warrants and guarantees for a minimum period
of one(1)year from the date of final acceptance of the system that the completed system is free from
all defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and the Contractor shall promptly make such
corrects as may be necessary by reason of such defects including the repairs of any damage to other
parts of the system resulting from such defects. The Performance bond shall remain in full force and
effect through the (1)year minimum guarantee period.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A brief description of the work to be done is contained in the "Advertisement for Bids". The full
scope or particular specifics of the project may be determined from these Contract Documents ory
portions thereof.
SITE CONDITIONS
SITE INVESTIGATION AND REPRESENTATION
The Contractor acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the project requirements. These
include the location, conditions, sources of supply and all other matters which can in any way affect
the work or the cost thereof under this contract. Any failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself
with these particulars will not relieve him from the responsibility of properly estimating the difficulty
and cost of successfully completing the project.
LINES AND GRADES
The Agency will make all known information on lines and grades available to the Contractor.
SUBSURFACE AND SITE INFORMATION
Any test holes or test bores done by the Agency will be shown on the plans. If the Contractor
conducts his own tests to determine the character of the materials that may be encountered during
construction, he is responsible to secure necessary permission and to restore the area to its original
condition.
The submission of a proposal shall be conclusive evidence that the Bidder has investigated and is
satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered during construction of the project.
EXISTING UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES
The plans show existing utilities and structures located by a search of known records. The accuracy + ►
or completeness of the existing utilities and structures is not guaranteed. The damage of any existing
utilities or structures not shown on the plans is still the Contractor's responsibility to repair at no
additional cost to the Agency.
NON-AGENCY PROPERTY
Portions of the work may be located on private property. Easements will be obtained by the Agency
for the installation. The Contractor shall obtain all other permits and licenses, and pay any fees
connected therewith, having to do with his construction operations.
r.
Copies of these easements are available from the Agency for inspection by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall confine his operations to within the construction area and permanent easement limits,
and street right-of-way limits. Any damage to private property, either inside or outside of these
aforementioned limits shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
It is anticipated that all required easements and permits will be obtained before construction begins.
AW However, should the procurement of any easement or permit be delayed, the Contractor shall
schedule his work in such a way that his operations are confined to areas where easements or permits
have been obtained or are not required until such time that the easement or permit has been secured.
"`� Such shifting in schedules shall not be cause for any additional cost to the Agency.
AW The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of private property adjacent to the
construction.
The Contractor shall protect stored materials, cultivated trees and crops, and all other items located
adjacent to the proposed construction.
AW Property owners affected by the construction shall be notified at least 48 hours in advance of the time
construction begins. During construction, no person shall be without access to his residence or place
of business for a period exceeding eight hours unless the Contractor has made special arrangements
wM in writing with the affected persons.
Before final payment will be authorized the Contractor may be required to furnish the Agency with
No written releases from property owners, especially where side agreements or special easements have
been made by the Contractor or where the Contractor's operations have not been kept within the
construction right-of-way obtained by the Agency.
JiW
CONSTRUCTION SITE PRESERVATION AND RESTORATION
"w The Contractor shall keep the construction site clean and orderly at all times. The Contractor will
undertake clean-up as soon as physically possible. At no time will the Contractor allow the premises
aw to become a hazard or public nuisance. If a nuisance or hazard arises, the Contractor shall
immediately correct the situation. All construction materials stored or stockpiled shall be in such a
manner to do the least damage to adjacent lawns, shrubs, structures, etc. Any excavated materials
will be kept in such a manner to minimize damage to surrounding property. Any excess excavation
material shall be promptly hauled away at no additional cost to the Agency.
4W All existing drainage ditches and culverts shall be reopened and graded and natural drainage restored.
Restore culverts broken or damaged to their original condition and location.
Upon completion of backfilling operations, hand-rack and drag all former grassed and planted areas
leaving all disturbed areas free from rocks, gravel, clay, or any other foreign material and ready in all
respects for seeding. The finished surface shall conform to the original surface and shall be
ow free-draining and free from holes, ruts, rocks, rough spots, or other surface features detrimental to
a seeded area. Reseed as necessary.
4M
ow
STREET AND SIDEWALK CLEANING '
The Contractor shall clean all spilled direct, gravel, or other foreign material caused by the
construction operations from all streets, roads, and sidewalks at the conclusion of each day's
operation.
Within five(5)days after completion of all paving and gravel shoulder resurfacing, remove all direct,
mud, rock, gravel, and other foreign material from the paved surface.
DUST PREVENTION
During all phases of the work the Contractor shall take precautions to abate dust nuisance by cleaning
up, sweeping, sprinkling with water, providing an oil dust preventive treatment, or other means as
necessary to accomplish results satisfactory to the Agency. Dust prevention measure shall be
continuous until final acceptance by the Agency.
PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE
ACCESS BY GOVERNMENTAL OFFICIALS
Authorized representatives of governmental agencies shall at all times have access to the work where '
it is in preparation or progress. Proper facilities for such access and for inspection shall be provided
by the Contractor.
TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY
The Contractor shall comply with all rules and regulations of the city, county, or state authorities
regarding the closure of public streets or highways to use of public traffic. No public road shall be
closed to the public except by express permission of the public agency responsible for the road. The
Contractor shall conduct his operations so as to assure the least possible obstruction to traffic and
normal commercial pursuits. At no time completely block vehicular access to any sewage treatment
plant. Schedule construction in such a manner that half the road remains open at all times. At any
time that actual construction is not taking place the road shall be in a condition that full vehicular
access is possible.
ACCESS FOR POLICE, FIRE, AND POSTAL SERVICE
No street closure or portion thereof shall be made without first notifying and receiving approval from
the Agency, Fire Department and Police Department. The Contractor shall conduct operations so
as to cause the least interference with emergency vehicle access.
The Contractor shall maintain postal service facilities in accordance with the requirements of the U.S.
Postal Service. Mail boxes may be moved to temporary locations as designated by the Postal Service.
At the completion of the work in each area, the Contractor shall replace them in their original
locations and in a condition satisfactory to the U.S. Postal Service.
low INTERFERENCE WITH EXISTING FACILITIES
The Contractor shall plan and execute the construction work with minimal interference with existing
facilities both public and private. Any costs incurred safeguarding existing facilities shall be included
as part of the contract price.
SHUTDOWN OF EXISTING PLANT SYSTEMS
aw Continuous operation of existing plant facilities is of critical importance. Work shall be conducted
in such a manner that permits continuous operation of plant systems with minimal interference to
normal activities. Any coordination of construction activities with plan operations shall be done by
w the Contractor at no additional cost to the Agency. Prior to starting the construction, confer with
the engineer and Agency's representative and develop an approved construction schedule which will
permit the facility to function as normally as practical during the construction period. It may be
w. necessary to do certain parts of the construction work outside normal working hours in order to avoid
undesirable conditions and it shall be the obligation of the Contractor to do this work at such times
at no additional cost to the Agency.
Do not make connections between existing piping and new piping until necessary inspection and tests
have been completed on the new work and it is found to conform in all respects to the requirements
"" of the Plans and Specifications.
OPERATION OF EXISTING SYSTEM PROHIBITED
to
At no time undertake to close off any lines or open valves or take any other action which would affect
imb the operation of the existing system except as specifically required by the Plans and Specifications and
after approval is granted by the Agency. Request approval 24 hours in advance.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGING EXISTING FACILITIES
Where any existing structures or facilities which are intended to remain are damaged by the
Contractor during demolition or construction, the Contractor shall promptly repair or replace the
damaged portion or facility at no additional cost to the Agency.
low DAMAGE TO EXISTING PIPING
All damaged irrigation, plant process pipes, and storm and drainage pipe to be repaired by the
�. Contractor. Repair to be considered incidental to the construction and the cost thereof shall be
included as part of the Contract price.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY PROPERTIES AND SERVICE
In areas where the Contractor's operations are adjacent to or near a utility and such operations may
cause damage which might result in considerable expense, loss, and inconvenience, the operation shall
be suspended until all arrangements necessary for the protection thereof have been made by the
aw
Contractor.
The Contractor shall notify all utility offices which may be affected by the construction operation at ft
least 48 hours in advance. Before exposing any utility, the utility having jurisdiction shall grant
permission and may oversee the operation. Should service of any utility be interrupted due to the
Contractor's operation, the proper authority shall be notified immediately. It is of the utmost
importance that the Contractor cooperate with the said authority in restoring the service as promptly
as possible. Any costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
ALLOWED USE OF EXISTING FACILITIES
TEMPORARY WATER rrr
Temporary water under pressure, if available, will be furnished to the contractor in reasonable
quantities as necessary for the construction at no cost to the Contractor. The amount of water
available to the contractor will be limited to the water available in excess of the water required to
keep the existing plant in normal operation.
The Agency will provide an existing outlet where water may be obtained. The Contractor shall
furnish all piping and facilities required to bring the water to the usage area. Upon completion of the
project, the Contractor shall remove all temporary pipe and facilities used during the construction.
TEMPORARY ELECTRIC POWER
The Agency will supply temporary electric power at the existing plant site wherever adequate
switching and capacity are available. At all other locations where electric power is not possible,
inaccessible, or interferes with existing plant facilities, the Contractor shall be responsible for electric
power. The Contractor shall supply all needed equipment to install temporary power at the
construction site. Temporary power installations shall meet all applicable safety codes. w*
SANITARY FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide temporary restroom facilities per code. The Contractor should contain
his activities to this designated area and the immediate construction site.
rrr
AGENCY SUPPLIED MATERIALS
All Agency supplied materials will be made available at each individual plant site. Any materials
damaged after the Contractor accepts delivery will be replaced or repaired at the Contractor's
expense. All other materials not designated Agency supplied will be supplied by the Contractor.
PROGRESS OF WORK
SEQUENCE OF WORK
rr
The Contractor shall pursue the work in an expeditious, systematic manner. Prior to commencing
construction, the Contractor shall submit a construction schedule. The Contractor shall follow this
schedule as closely as possible. If requested, the Contractor will provide a written explanation of any
deviations to the schedule as closely as possible. If requested, the Contractor will provide a written
explanation of any deviations to the schedule and intentions to correct such deviations.
It may be necessary to do certain parts of the construction work outside normal working hours in
order to avoid undesirable conditions, and it shall be the obligation of the Contractor to do this work
at such times at no additional cost to the Agency.
This scheduling, however, is subject to the Agency's approval and does not relieve the Contractor
from making his work available to inspection.
FIELD RELOCATION
During the progress of construction, necessary minor relocations of the work may be expected due
to encountering existing structures. In such instances, the Agency shall be notified before continuing
w. operations and may make field revisions as necessary to avoid conflict with the existing structures.
The cost of waiting or "down time" during field revisions shall be borne by the Contractor without
additional cost to the Agency. Unforeseen obstructions encountered as a result of relocations shall
AM not be subjects for claims for additional compensation by the Contractor to any greater extent than
would have been the case had the obstructions been encountered along the original location.
SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit the following information for all electrical, instrumentation, mechanical,
plumbing and process equipment to be installed. In addition, the Contractor will supply the below
information for any items requested by the engineer:
1. Shop drawings and/or catalog information and cuts.
2. Manufacturer's specifications, parts list, suggested spare part list and equipment drawings.
3. Wiring diagrams of systems and equipment.
4. Complete lubrication, maintenance and operating instructions, including initial start-up
instructions.
5. Other technical, installation and maintenance data, O& M manuals as applicable.
++ The Contractor will submit a minimum of five(5)copies to the architect for approval. One approved
copy will be returned unless otherwise requested. If a shop drawing in rejected, one copy showing
corrections will be returned to the Contractor.
top
The review of such shop drawings and catalog cuts by the engineer shall not relieve the Contractor
4►
from responsibility for correctness of dimensions, fabrication details, and space requirements, or for to
deviations from the Contract Drawings or Specifications, unless the Contractor has called attention
to such deviations in writing by a letter accompanying the shop drawings and the engineer approves
the change or deviation in writing at the time of submission; nor shall review by the engineer relieve
the Contractor from the responsibility for errors in the shop drawings.
The Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the architect do not become
Contract Documents and are not Change Orders; that the purpose of the shop drawing review is to
establish a reporting procedure and is intended for the contractor's convenience in organizing his
work and to permit the engineer to monitor the Contractor's progress and understanding of the
design.
PAYMENT
Payment for this section will be included in the contract price.
40
go
SECTION 01005
Statement of Work
Police Department Remodel and Addition
SW-1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Addition and Remodel of Tigard City Police Department.
SW-2 LOCATION OF WORK
13125 SW Hall Blvd.
Tigard, Oregon 97223
SW-3 PRINCIPAL FEATURES
A. Work in general consists of remodeling the existing, one
story brick building and adding an addition of 3, 185
sq.ft. Includes site improvements.
aw
B. Bids are based as follows:
1. Basic Bid; Remodel, new construction and site
AM improvements
2. Alternate Bids: For list of Alternate Bids see
either Bid Form or Section 01030, Alternates.
C. Award of contract is contingent upon availability of
funds based on lowest lump sum amount for Basic Bid work
plus any or all alternate bid items as selected by Tigard
City City Council for a gross total lump sum bid amount
for all work.
SW-4 STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR PAY SCALE
•» A. The Contractor is required to comply with prevailing wage
provisions of the Davis-Beacon Act for State of Oregon,
construction per latest edition. Contract Bureau of
Labor, Wage and Industries, Portland, Oregon. Tel: 299-
5720.
SW-5 CONTRACT CLAUSES
ww
A. American Institute of Architects (A. I.A. ) Document A101
Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor,
*W 1977 Edition is hereby made a part of these documents and
governs work insofar as the apply.
B. Liquidated damages are part of this contract at $100. 00
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01005 - 1
err
a day. IN
SW-6 COORDINATION AND INSPECTIONS
A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to
coordinate all work with all trades and make sure that
all trades are coordinating with each other throughout
entire project.
B. It is also General Contractor's responsibility to
coordinate all work with Owners on-site representative
and with any other special inspection requirements.
Maintain access and operation of systems to allow the
Owner to stay in operation.
SW-7 GUARENTEE
A. General Contractor required to guarantee all work so
completed under this Contract for a minimum period of one
year from date of final acceptance of project unless
noted otherwise in specifications or documents.
B. Also provide, prior to final payment request, all special
guarantees/warranties as shown in project manual for 46
periods indicated. See Section 01700 for listing of
special warranties.
SW-8 PAYMENT
A. Partial payments will be made monthly as work progresses
in accordance with Article 5 of the A.I.A. Standard Form
A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and
Contractor, Progress Payments.
SW-9 PERMITS, CODES, REGULATIONS AND INSPECTIONS
A. It is Contractor's responsibility to obtain and pay for
all permits and plan check fees, except building permit
and building plan check fees, and make arrangements for
all inspections. Do all work in compliance with
governing codes and regulations.
END OF SECTION
�r
46
46
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01005 - 2
1W
so
Aw
«r SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
4M
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES
WW
A. Quality assurance and control of installation.
iw
B. References.
C. Field samples.
D. Inspection and testing laboratory services.
1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS
vrr
Not Used
1. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers,
Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to
produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including
.. each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract
aw Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer
before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for
the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or
specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.
,wr
E. Preform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship
of specified quality.
F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices
designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration,
physical distortion or disfigurement.
1. 04 REFERENCES
r
A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on
date specified in product Sections.
B. Should specified reference standards conflict with
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01400 - 1
ow
rrr
Contract Documents, request clarification for
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the dirt
Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents
by mention or inference otherwise in any reference
document.
1. 05 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Install field samples at the site as required by
individual specifications Sections for review.
B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the
Work.
C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to
be removed, clear area after field sample has been
accepted by Architect/Engineer.
1.06 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an
independent firm to preform inspection and testing.
B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and
other services specified in individual specification
Sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer and/or
Owner.
C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to then
Owner and Architect/Engineer, in duplicate, indicating
observations and results of tests and indicating
compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.
D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of
materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and
assistance as requested.
1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 24
hours prior to expected time for operations
requiring services.
2 . Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for
additional samples and tests required for
Contractor's use.
E. Retesting required because on non-conformance to
specified requirements shall be performed by the same
independent firm on instructions by the
Architect/Engineer. Payment for retesting will be
charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection or
testing charges from the contract Sum/Price.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01400 - 2
4o
*W PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
"" PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END SECTION
+r
rr
w�.
wr
*4
*.
err
+r
aw
a
wr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01400 — 3
vwr
aw
ow SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
aw
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, telephone
service, water, and sanitary facilities.
B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, cranes and scaffolding,
enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water
' control.
C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress
+ ' cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings.
D. Owner furnished additional building insurance.
1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS
Not Used
1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. Connect to existing Owner's power service. Power
consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous
service.
B. Provide temporary electric feeder from existing building
electrical service at location as directed by Owner.
Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for
�" continuous service.
C. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to
+ ► conserve energy.
D. Provide power outlets for construction operations.
aw Provide flexible power cords as required.
E. Permanent convenience receptacles may not be utilized
during construction.
aw
1. 04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
ow A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for
construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting
level of 2 watt/sq ft or as required by OSHA.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01500 - 1
err
ww
B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior
staging and storage areas after dark for security
purposes.
C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to
interior work areas after dark for security purposes.
D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution
boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as
required.
E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during
construction. Bulbs to be replaced with new unit at
final construction review.
1.05 TEMPORARY HEAT
A. Existing facilities shall be used; and must be kept
operational throughout the winter months.
B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary ,
heating purposes, verify that installation is approved
for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in
place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and
regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed
parts.
1. 06 TEMPORARY VENTILATIONy
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to
dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust,
fumes, vapors, or gases. Existing equipment will not be
used during construction.
1. 07 TELEPHONE SERVICE ►
A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field
office at time of project mobilization. am
1. 08 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A. Connect to existing water source for construction 'o
operations.
B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to to
conserve water.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01500 - 2
Aw
o► C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is
available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide
temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.
aw
1.09 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures.
' " Existing facilities shall not be used.
B. Provide portable sanitary units in numbers as required by
WW OSHA, etc. and maintain throughout project construction
period.
1.10 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to
construction areas, to allow for Owner's use of site, and
aw to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties
from damage from construction operations and demolition.
B. Provide barricades and covered walkways OSHA and code
required for public rights-of-way and for public access
to existing building affected by construction.
C. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain.
Replace damaged plant life.
D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials,
site and structures from damage.
W& 1. 11 FENCING
A. Construction: At Contractor's option, install commercial
grade chain link fence.
wo
B. Contractor can provide and erect temporary high fence
around staging site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian
gates with locks as desired.
C. Area to be repaired to acceptance condition after
completion of project.
1. 12 WATER CONTROL
' A. Grade construction site to drain. Maintain excavations
free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping
equipment.
w
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide
water barriers as required to protect site from soil
erosion.
ow
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01500 - 3
r.
war
1. 13 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary insulated weather-tight closure of
exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working rrii
conditions and protection for Products, to allow for
maintenance of working temperatures, and to prevent entry
of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with
self-closing hardware and locks.
1. Contractor shall be totally responsible for any and all
water, dust, etc. damage caused to existing building and
he will repair, replace, etc. all damaged surfaces to the
satisfaction of the Architect and Owner.
2 . Existing equipment to be reused and relocated will be
moved only after notifying the Owner; when
weather-tightness of total structure (new and existing)
is completed and temperatures are moderate.
1. 14 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES
rr
A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to
separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent
penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied
areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and
equipment.
1. Contractor shall be totally responsible for any and all
water, dust, etc. damage caused to existing building and
he will repair, replace, etc. all damaged surfaces to the
satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. ar►
1. 15 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection
where specified in individual specification Sections.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed
Products. Control activity in immediate work area to
minimize damage.
C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,
jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from
traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy
objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed
surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain
recommendations for protection from waterproofing or
roofing material manufacturer.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01500 - 4
rr
F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
1. 16 SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and
existing facilities, and Owner's operations from
unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
B. Coordinate with Owner's security program.
1. 17 ACCESS ROADS
A. Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public
thoroughfares to serve construction area as agreed with
Owner at preconstruction meeting.
B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of
aw obstructions.
C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before
*W entering streets or existing parking lots.
D. Owner designated existing on-site roads can be used for
construction traffic with written approval.
1. 18 PARKING
wr
A. When site space is not adequate, provide additional
off-site parking.
B. Only use Owner designated parking spaces for the
employees, etc. as indicated.
aw 1. 19 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and
wr rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums,
am attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces,
prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of
am surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate
dust.
D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site
provide rigid container of adequate size and type, weekly
and dispose off-site.
1.20 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01500 - 5
A. Provide 8 w x 6 h foot project sign of exterior grade
plywood and wood frame construction, painted, with
exhibit lettering by professional sign painter to
Architect/Engineer's design and colors.
B. List title of project, names of Owner, City officials,
Architect/Engineer, professional sub-consultants,
Contractor, and major Subcontractors.
C. Erect on site at location established by
Architect/Engineer.
D. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission
except those required by law.
1. 21 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Office: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical outlets,
heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped
with sturdy furniture.
B. Provide space for project meetings, with table and chairs
to accommodate a minimum of six (6) persons.
rr�r
C. Arrange location of offices and sheds with Owner at
preconstruction conference.
1.22 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities,
equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial
Completion.
B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of
two (2,) feet. Grade site as indicated or necessary to
put in proper condition.
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of
temporary work.
D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to
original condition. Restore permanent facilities used
during construction to specified condition.
NO
1.23 OWNER'S CONTINUED USE OF EXISTING BUILDING
10
A. Contractor will not prevent, hinder, etc. use of existing
building and facilities by Owner.
ow
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01500 - 6
so
No
+rr
,w 1. Temporary vacancies of designated areas will be
permitted by prior arrangement with Owner (written
approval) indicating location, period of time of
No usage, assumed condition of area after work is
completed, Owner's property necessary to be removed
and by whose authority.
+60 1.24 MATERIAL LOADING OF EXISTING ROOF AREAS
A. Uniform concentrated loading of existing roof areas with
construction materials is prohibited except for:
1. Hardware storage in small containers.
2 . Prior written approval by Architect/Engineer for
specific items.
+w a. Contractor to furnish weights and loads to be
superimposed on roof surfaces temporarily.
A, 1.25 OWNER'S INSURANCE (ADDITIONS TO PRESENT COVERAGE)
A. Owner will purchase additional necessary insurance to
cover new construction and as follows:
IWO
1. Coverage to include fire insurance for stored or
installed new material on site.
2. Protection of staff and other persons working below
new construction area.
�. 1. 26 CRANES, HOISTS, SCAFFOLDING, ETC.
A. Contractor furnish necessary cranes, hoists, scaffolding,
' etc to complete work in accordance with all applicable
pertinent codes, ordinances, regulations of OSHA, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01500 - 7
+rr
ow SECTION 01532
TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
400 PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 DESCRIPTION
a* This Section covers the protection of existing plants and
trees scheduled to remain as indicated on the Contract
Drawings as specified herein.
r
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
aw 3 . 01 INSPECTION
On-site inspection of plants and trees shall be conducted with
aw the Landscape Architect prior to the start of construction.
3.02 MARKING
Plants marked within the project area shall remain and be
protected.
.�w 3.03 ABOVE GRADE PROTECTION
A. Temporary barricades or guard rails shall be provided
aw where required to protect plants and trees, which are to
remain, from above grade damage.
B. Avoid damage to tree trunk, limbs and branches. Notify
1` Landscape Architect before cutting any limbs or branches
over 2" dia. to allow for new above grade construction.
to 3 . 04 ROOT SYSTEM PROTECTION
A. Construction materials, debris or excavated materials
aw shall not be stored within 30" of tree trunks.
B. Vehicular construction traffic and parking shall not be
permitted within 30 ' of tree trunks.
40
C. Foot traffic shall be restricted in order to prevent
excessive compaction of soil over root systems.
MW
D. Root systems shall be protected from damage due to
noxious materials in solution caused by run-off or
spillage during storage or placement of construction
" '
materials.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01532 - 1
w
E. Root systems shall be protected from flooding or soil IN
erosion.
3.05 EXCAVATION AROUND TREES
A. Where trenching for utilities is required within 30' of
tree trunks, tunneling over of under roots shall be w
preformed by hand digging. Main lateral roots or tap
roots shall not be cut; however, smaller roots less than
4" dia. which interfere with the installation of new work
shall be cut. Roots shall be cut with sharp pruning
instruments. Roots shall not be broken or chopped.
B. To minimize root damage in areas where new construction
is required within 30' of tree trunk, root systems shall
be hand excavated. A narrow tine spading fork shall be
used to comb soil to expose possible. If large, main
lateral roots are encountered, roots shall be exposed
beyond excavation limits as required to bend and shall be
relocated without breaking.
rr►
C. If encountered immediately adjacent to the location of
new construction and relocation is not practical, roots
shall be cut at a maximum distance of three inches back
from new construction.
D. Exposed roots shall not be allowed to dry out before
permanent backfill is placed. Temporary earth cover
shall be provided or roots shall be packed with peat moss
and wrapped with burlap. Roots shall be watered and
maintained in moist condition and shall be temporarily
supported and protected from damage until they are
permanently relocated and covered with backfill.
E. Branches shall be pruned in accordance with good IN
horticultural practice to balance loss to root system
caused by damage or cutting of root system.
3. 06 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. Any damages to trees resulting from insufficient or
improper protection shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Damages per tree shall be based on the cross sectional
area and dollar figures set by the International Shade
Tree conference.
B. All landscaped areas and other surface improvements
damaged by the actions and/or omissions of the Contractor
shall be restored as nearly as possible to the original
condition and shall be at the Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01532 - 2
++rrr
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOS"EOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
+yw
A. Closeout procedures.
B. Final cleaning.
C. Adjusting.
D. Project record documents.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
ow
F. Warranties.
40 G. Spare parts and maintenance materials.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
`o A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary
Controls: Progress cleaning.
+W 1. 03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have
been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is
complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready
for Architect/Engineer's inspection.
B. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are
required by governing or other authorities.
wr C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total
adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum
remaining due.
1. 04 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to
view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign
Ww. substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces,
vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01700 - 1
rw
..
D. Replace filters of operating equipment.
E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and
drainage systems.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped
surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and
construction facilities from the site.
1. 05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth
and unhindered operation.
1. 06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
0i
A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record
documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
No
1. Contract Drawings (Sepia Mylars) .
2 . Specifications. VW
3 . Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the NO
Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for
construction.
C. Record information on Sepia Mylar concurrent with
construction progress.
ow
D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product
section description of actual Products installed,
including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2 . Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3 . Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each
item to record actual construction including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01700 - 2
+rt
ww finish main floor datum.
2 . Measured horizontal and vertical locations of
Aw underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced
to permanent surface improvements.
3 . Measured locations of internal utilities and
Wo appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced
to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4 . Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
F. Delete Architect/Engineer seal from all documents.
G. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for
final Application for Payment.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit two (2) sets prior to final inspection, bound in
8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring capacity
expansion binders with durable plastic covers.
B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject
rw matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent
page dividers, logically organized as described below;
with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced
laminated plastic tabs.
D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume,
with each Product or system description identified, type
on 24 pound white paper.
�r.
E. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor,
Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
F. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged
by system or process flow and subdivided by specification
section. For each category, identify names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers.
Identify the following:
aw
1. Significant design criteria.
w.
2 . List of equipment.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01700 - 3
3 . Parts list for each component.
4 . Operating instructions.
5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
6. Maintenance instructions for special finishes,
including recommended cleaning methods and
materials and special precautions identifying
detrimental agents.
G. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the
following:
1. Shop drawings and product data. 16
2 . Air and water balance reports.
3 . Certificates.
4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. wr
H. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15
days prior to final inspection. This copy will be rrr
returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer
comments. Revise content of documents as required prior
to final submittal.
I. Submit final volumes revised, within ten days after final
inspection.
to
1. 08 WARRANTIES
A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. to
B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers.
C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side
ring binder with durable plastic cover.
D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial
Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days
after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of
warranty period.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01700 - 4
+rr
1.09 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra
W, materials in quantities specified in individual
specification Sections.
B. Deliver to and place in location as directed; obtain
receipt prior to final payment.
., PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used
rw END OF SECTION
rr
Wir
vrr
+rr
.r.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 01700 - 5
yr.
+wr
SECTION 02072
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Remove designated building components, equipment and
+�.
fixtures.
B. Remove designated partitions and components.
C. Cap and identify utilities to be eliminated or modified.
D. Clean up and preparation for renovation and new
construction.
1 . 02 RELATED WORK
A. AIA General Conditions.
B. Section 01500 - Construction facilities and temporary
controls.
C. Section 06001 - Carpentry Work.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule.
1 . 04 EXISTING CONDITIONS
aw A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent
building areas. Maintain protected egress and access at
all times.
B. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and
security devices.
C. Contractor is hereby notified during demolition he should
take precautions as necessary to.. protect staff and
contractor personnel, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
wr
Not Used
aw PART 3 EXECUTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02072 - 1
;ww
3. 01 PREPARATION
A. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior
openings.
B. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be
altered.
C. Disconnect, remove, and cap designated utility services
within demolition areas.
D. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify and
indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents. 1
3.02 EXECUTION
A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect im
existing supporting structural members and adjacent wall
materials.
io
B. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove
demolished materials from site.
No
C. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin
infested, or dangerous materials encountered.
D. Do not burn or bury materials on site. im
E. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses.
Upon completion of work, leave areas of work in clean
condition.
END OF SECTION
rw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02072 - 2
rr
SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 DESCRIPTION
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General and other conditions and Division 1 -
General Requirements sections, apply to the work
rr
specified in this Section.
B. WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
aw 1. Survey for building lines and elevations covered in
Section 01005.
2 . Soil compaction testing covered in Section 01400.
„y„ 3. Foundation investigation report covered under
Section 02200.
4 . Site preparation covered under Section 02200.
5. Backfill material and backfilling at foundation
�" drainage piping covered under Section 02223; all
other building and structure backfill covered
herein.
am 6. Topsoil mixing and placement, including finish
grading of landscape areas, covered under Section
02223 .
ow 7. Vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade covered
under Section 03301.
1. 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
wo
A. SOILS COMPACTION TESTS, GENERAL
rr 1. Covered hereinafter after in this Section.
2. Should compaction of fills placed under the
Contract no meet specified requirements, re-compact
to assure compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Original test costs will be paid by Owner; costs
for re-testing after rejecting compacted fills
shall be paid for as stipulated in the General and
Supplementary Conditions, as applicable.
6.
B. INSPECTIONS & TESTS
ow
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02200 - 1
No
+r.
Special inspector, after each fill work lift is
completed, will make not less than one compaction test
for each 5,000 sq.ft. of fill area under asphaltic
concrete paved road and parking areas, and for each 1,000
sq.ft. of Portland cement concrete paved slabs and walks,
all to assure compliance with specified density.
C. ELEVATION TOLERANCES
1. Rough Grade: Shape soil and aggregate to plus or
minus 2 inches above or below the indicated
elevations.
2. Finish Grade: Shape soil and aggregate to plus or
minus i inch above or below indicated elevations.
3. Aggregate Base for Concrete: Shape top of
aggregate to plus z inch above or minus 1 inch
below the indicated elevation.
1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
A. GENERAL ilr
Limit work to authorized areas within Owner's property
limit.
B. DUST CONTROL
Provide sprinkling of dust producing soil to prevent '
damage or nuisance to adjacent property and persons.
C. PROTECTION
1. General: Barricade open excavations and provide
warning lights form dusk to dawn each day.
2 . Reference bench marks and monuments: Locate and
carefully maintain all bench marks, monuments, and
other reference points and, if disturbed or
destroyed, replace as directed at no cost to Owner.
3. Utilities: Protect all utilities on or adjacent to
site from damage caused by the work and repair any
damage thereto, at no cost to Owner, in manner
approved by serving Utility.
D. UNIT PRICES
rrr
NOT USED
1. 04 ALTERNATES ri
See Section 01030 for alternate bid items affecting work in
this Section.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02200 - 2
+wr
wr PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
aw
A. BACKFILL MATERIAL FOR GENERAL SITE CUT & FILL WORK
For site grading outside building and paving lines,
obtain approved moisture controlled fill material from
` ' on-site excavation work which is approved for re-use as
general site fill as determined by Architect or Testing
Agency.
00
B. FILL MATERIAL FOR FILLS UNDER FOOTINGS & BUILDING SLABS
& FILLS UNDER ASPHALT & CONCRETE PAVING
No
1. In general, obtain approved moisture controlled
fill material from on-site excavation work,
aw approved for use as fill as determined by Architect
or Testing Agency.
2 . Should additional fill material be required,
furnish material consisting of well graded clean,
N nonfrost susceptible granular crushed rock, course
sand, river-run sand and gravel, free of debris,
and organic material and which contains nonplastic
fines with not more than 5% passing No. 200 sieve.
�" Maximum size of gravel or rock fragments shall be
limited to six (6) inch size, except limited to one
and one-half (1 2) inch size for top 2 inches of
am fill. Cost for additional fill material shall be
included in the Base Bid, except as specified in
Paragraphs 3.01B.2 and 3 .03B.2 below.
VW
C. GRANULAR BASE MATERIAL UNDER BUILDING SLABS
Furnish granular base material consisting of well graded,
clean washed river-run sand and nonfrost susceptible
gravel or crushed rock. No aggregate larger than 2 inch
in any dimension. Not more then 5% passing in number 200
sieve.
D. BUILDING & STRUCTURE BACKFILL
1. Backfill materials and backfilling at foundation
drainage piping covered under Section 02710; all
building and structure backfill at locations not
containing foundation drainage piping covered
herein.
2. In general, use previously excavated earth as
specified above, Paragraph 2 . O1A, for compacted
backfills not supporting exterior slabs or paving;
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02200 - 3
at backfills under subsequent paved areas use wii►
approved granular fill as specified above,
Paragraph 2 . 01B, for compacted backfills.
rig
E. UTILITY LINE BEDDING AGGREGATE
Furnish consisting of clean washed course sand with 0%
retained on 1/4 inch sieve or 1/4 inch washed pea gravel
with 0% retained on 3/8 inch sieve.
F. FILL MATERIAL FOR EXCESS EXCAVATION
Under footings and building slabs, furnish concrete as
specified under Section 03300 or an approved granular
structural fill material as specified above, Paragraph
2.O1B.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITE GRADING
NO
A. SITE CUT & FILL WORK
1. After clearing and grubbing is completed as
specified in Section 02200, do all general site cut
and fill work required for contract completion to
rough and finish grades shown and/or stated
hereinafter.
2 . Do not cut and fill work in freezing weather or
over snow nor during weather detrimental to fill
work as determined by Architect; user no frozen at
material in fills.
3 . Remove large boulders and any other debris
encountered during site grading work off site; to
boulders less than two-man size may be used in site
fill provided tops thereof are at least 18 inches
below finish grade, outside building lines.
4. Re-use suitable planting area and general site area so
fill material at locations on site as directed.
Place planting area and general site fills in
looser layers not exceeding 8-inches and compact ,may
each layer to densities hereinafter specified.
5. Re-use suitable underslab and paving backfill
material obtained form site cut and fill work, to
which is approved by Soils Engineer for said re-
use; placement of said material shall conform to
placement requirements of Article 3 . 03,
Backfilling. Stockpile any additional material It
approved for re-use as building backfill. Dispose
of unsuitable backfill material obtained form site
areas, which is also not classified as topsoil, to
location off site as selected by Contractor, at
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02200 - 4
Contractor's expense; .conform to local regulations
for depositing fill material on property of others.
6. All cut and fill slopes for paved areas shall be
uniformly dressed to the slope, cross-section and
alignment as required to assure positive drainage.
B. COMPACTION OF SUBGRADE
r
1. After cut work and prior to placing any fills or
other work in areas within paving and exterior walk
No and slab lines, thoroughly proof-roll by use of a
loaded dump truck or similar equipment; compact to
accomplish at least 90% of the standard maximum dry
Wo density, ASTM D698, for the top six (6) inches of
the subgrade and per soil engineer requirements.
2 . All soft/wet areas observed during compaction
process shall be removed to firm ground and the
am grade restored with compacted clean granular
material meeting -requirements of subparagraph
2 . 01B.2 above. Additional cost for removal of
Wo these unsuitable materials and for importing new
replacement backfill material where directed,
including placement and compaction, shall be made
to by a regularly approved change order based upon the
unit price stipulated in the Bid/Tender Form for
removal and replacement of said material as
measured by the Soils Engineer.
3. The compaction procedure shall be observed by a
qualified Engineer selected by the Owner to
evaluate the subgrade performance, to evaluate the
aw effectiveness of the procedure, and to make
adjustments in the procedure as field conditions
dictate.
AW C. COMPACTION OF FILLS
1. Compact all fills, in loose layers not exceeding 8
to inches in depth, with approved compacting devices
and material to attain the following compaction:
a. For floor slabs, footings, paved areas and
00 tether structural elements*
(1) For cohesion type soils: 90% minimum of
maximum dry density as determined by ASTM
D1557.
""' (2) For cohesion less type soils: 85% minimum
of relative density as determined by ASTM
D2049.
to b. For all planting and general site fills- 80%
minimum of maximum dry density as determined
by ASTM D1557.
aw 2. Test method as determined by Testing laboratory and
approved by the Architect.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02200 - 5
so
3 . Provide additional approved material where to
noticeable settlement occurs, as approved.
4. Surface and ground water shall be contained and
controlled in all areas receiving fill such that i6
the moisture content of the subgrade and fills are
maintained at 10 - 15% below plastic limit as
determined by the Soils Engineer, Compaction No
equipment shall be of adequate capacity for the
quantity and nature of the materials and shall be
in good working order at all times.
5. Fill material for compaction shall not be placed on
a frozen surface or placed, spread or rolled while
it is frozen or thawing or during unfavorable
weather conditions. When the work is interrupted
by heavy rains, fill operations shall not be
resumed until the moisture content and density of
the previously-placed fill are as specified.
6. All materials with moisture contents that are, or
become greater than that specified above, subpar.
4 , shall be dried prior to compaction or
recompaction or shall be removed and replaced based
upon unit prices stipulated, as directed.
D. ROUGH GRADES
1. Rough grade all areas outside buildings to grades
shown to reasonable true smoothness, free from non-
uniform levels or slopes. Roll or round cut and IN
fill surfaces at abrupt changes in elevation.
Slope ground to provide positive drainage away from
building walls. to
2 . Rough grade to finish grades shown less the
following:
a. Planting areas: As required for topsoil & Wi
bark provided under Landscaping Section.
b. Areas to receive asphalt pavement: 8 inches
for asphalt pavement and granular base.
C. Interior concrete slabs: 9 inches for 66
interior concrete slabs, vapor barrier and
granular base; adjust to lower depths as
required for thickened slabs.
d. Concrete walks and exterior slabs: 4 inches
for Portland cement concrete walks and slabs;
adjust to lower depths as required for
thickened slabs and for curbs. "
3. 02 EXCAVATION
A. EXCAVATIONS FOR FOOTINGS, BUILDING SLABS & ASPHALT &
CONCRETE PAVING
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02200 - 6
to
0
1. After site grading work is completed, do all
additional excavation work required for building
and structures and other work shown on the
Drawings, by machine and/or by hand as required and
approved, carefully trimmed to lines and subgrade
elevations required for the work, ready for
subgrade compaction as specified below, Paragraph
3.30B.
2 . Leave adequate space for work for forms, drain
tile, dampproofing, etc.
B. UTILITY & PLUMBING TRENCHING
1. Remove and stockpile or dispose of soil materials
to obtain required subgrade depth and width to
install utility and plumbing lines.
2 . Provide 4 inch minimum thickness of bedding
aggregate on leveled trench bottom for utility and
plumbing lines.
3 . Excavate bedding aggregate for piping bells and
couplings.
C. EXCESS EXCAVATION
If, through error, excavation under footings and building
slabs is to levels lower than shown or specified, provide
f'c = 2, 000 psi at 28 day concrete or approved granular
structural fill material specified above, Paragraph
2 . 01F, compacted as specified above for "Compaction of
Fills", Paragraph 3.01C
D. BRACING & SHORING
Brace and shore sides of building and/or trench
excavations as required by State and City Safety Codes to
prevent cave-ins and injury to workmen in excavations.
E. PUMPING
Provide pumps, hose and all other equipment and work to
carry and keep water out of footing and excavated areas.
F. FROST PROTECTION
1. Do not place footings or slabs on. frozen ground or
when freezing weather is anticipated before
footings or slabs can be placed.
2. Do not carry excavations to final depths when
freezing weather is anticipated; after frozen
material is thawed, excavate to final depths shown.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02200 - 7
3 . Obtain Architect's approval before placing any new
work on previously frozen and thawed soil; make
final bearing surfaces suitable for new work.
3. 03 BACKFILLING
A. GENERAL
1. Before placing backfill, remove all screeds, screed
stakes, other wood, debris, and material subject to
rot, corrosion, or subterranean termite attack and
provide compaction of subgrade as specified below,
Paragraph 3. 03B. Obtain approval of subgrade by
soils testing agency before any backfill is placed.
2 . Use only materials approved for backfill purposes,
as approved, Do not use cinders or other corrosive
material as fill for pipe or other metals to be
buried therein.
3. Provide and compact backfill over mud-free, frost-
free ground in manner to prevent settlement
thereof, and prevent damage to walls and W
dampproofing thereon; replace all damage thereto
without cost to Owner, as approved by Architect.
4. Prior to placing slabs or other material over
backfills and bases, special inspector to make not
less that 3 compaction tests for each backfill area
to assure conformity with specified compaction.
5. Replace, during guarantee period without additional
cost to Owner, work which is damaged by settlement,
and replace slabs and pavement which develop
settlement cracks.
6. After all required backfilling is completed, remove
all excess backfill material to location of site as
selected by Contractor, at Contractor's expense.
B. COMPACTION OF SUBGRADE UNDER BUILDING SLABS & FOOTINGS &
UNDER EXTERIOR ASPHALT & CONCRETE PAVING
1. Thoroughly proof-roll by use of a loaded dump truck
or similar equipment; compact to accomplish at
least 90% of the standard maximum dry density, ASTM
D698, for the top six (6) inches of the subgrade.
2. All soft/wet areas observed during compaction
process shall be removed to firm ground and the
grade restored with compacted clean granular `
material meeting requirements of subparagraph
2.01B.2 above. Additional cost for removal of
these unsuitable materials and for importing new
replacement backfill material where directed,
including placement and compaction, shall be made
by a regularly approved change order based upon the
unit price stipulated in the Bid/Tender Form for
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02200 - 8
�r
r removal and replacement of said material as
measured by the soils Engineer in conformance with
applicable provisions of Section 01025.
3 . The compaction procedure shall be observed by a
qualified Engineer selected by the Owner to
evaluate the subgrade performance, to evaluate the
effectiveness of the procedure, and to make
adjustments in the procedure as field conditions
dictate.
C. FILLS UNDER SLABS & FOOTINGS
1. Backfill with structural fill and base materials
specified above, Paragraph 2 .01B and 2. 01C, to
rough grade elevations, compacted as specified
above for "compaction of Fills", Paragraph 3.01C.
2 . Place granular base specified above, 5 inch minimum
thickness at interior slabs, 4 inch minimum
thickness at exterior walks, compacted as specified
above.
w"
D. BUILDING & STRUCTURAL BACKFILL
1. Coordinate building backfill work specified herein
with foundation drainage backfill work specified
under Section 02710.
2 . At all building and structure backfill at locations
aw not containing foundation drainage piping use
backfill material specified above, Paragraph 2.01D,
as approved, in layers not exceeding 8 inches loose
AW depth, each layer compacted as specified above for
"Compaction of Fills", Paragraph 3.01C.
3 . Backfill full backfill depth to finish grade less
aw that required for topsoil and new slabs, paving and
walks including gravel bases therefor.
E. UTILITY LINE BACKFILL
,r.
1. Backfill trenches as promptly as work permits.
2. After completion of testing, backfill utility and
plumbing lines to 8 inches above pipe or conduit
with utility line bedding aggregate as specified
above, Paragraph 2. 01E. Backfill remainder of
trench with backfill material specified above,
Paragraph 2.01D, as approved, in layers not
exceeding 8 inches loose depth, each layer
compacted as specified above for "Compaction of
MW Fills", Paragraph 3.01C.
3. 04 FINISH GRADING
`w A. GENERAL
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02200 - 9
4%
AW
1. Grade to levels indicated, with uniform levels or
slopes between finish grades. Finish grade to
tolerance specified in subparagraph 1. 02C.2 above.
2 . Re-spreading of topsoil and final grading therefor
covered under Section 02920.
3. 05 ADJUSTING & CLEANING
A. PROTECTION OF GRADED AREAS
1. Provide protection of cut and fill areas of work
under this Contract, to prevent rutting and washing
resulting from the elements. Repair and re-
establish grades in settled, eroded, rutted or
otherwise damaged areas.
2 . Scarify the surface, reshape and compact to
required density.
3 . During wet weather, place 4 inch lift of structural
fill aggregate at bottom of footing excavations and
compact to 95% of maximum density at optimum
moisture content.
B. DISPOSAL
Remove trash, debris, waste material and unusable excess
excavated soil material from the Site.
C. COMPACTION
Recompact or remove and replace, at no additional cost to
Owner, materials not meeting required density. irr�
D. CLEANING
Remove soil material from existing roads, walks and
parking areas, as directed.
END SECTION
rr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02200 - 10
wri
SECTION 02222
EXCAVATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Excavation for building foundations.
B. Excavation for slabs-on-grade, paving, and landscaping.
WA C. Excavation for site structures.
1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS
+W A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Inspection of bearing
surfaces.
B. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary
Controls: Dewatering excavations and water control.
C. Section 02211 - Rough Grading: Topsoil and subsoil
removal from site surface.
D. Section 02223 - Backfilling.
err
E. Section 02225 - Trenching: Excavation for utility
trenches.
wr
1. 03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for
the Work are as indicated.
.r. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B. Identify known underground, above ground, and aerial
utilities. Stake and flag locations.
C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to
remain.
D. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other
features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02222 - 1
E. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, '
sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment
and vehicular traffic.
to
2. 02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil required to accommodate building
foundations, slabs-on- grade paving and site structures,
and construction operations.
B. Excavation cut not to interfere with normal 45 degree
bearing splay of foundation.
C. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface
water from draining into excavation.
D. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.
E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock.
F. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface
conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until
notified to resume work.
to
G. Correct unauthorized excavation at no extra cost to Owner
to 95% compaction.
H. Correct areas over-excavated by error. 10
I. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site
and remove excess material not being reused, from site.
2. 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of
Section 01400.
B. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.
2. 04 PROTECTION
w
A. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent
cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.
B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and No
beneath foundation, from freezing.
ow
END OF SECTION
rw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02222 - 2
w
SECTION 02223
BACKFILLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building perimeter and site structure backfilling to
subgrade elevations.
B. Site filling and backfilling.
C. Fill under slabs-on-grade paving.
D. Consolidation and compaction.
E. Fill for over-excavation.
F. Sheet vapor retardant and cover over crawl space and fill.
1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control
B. Section 02222 - Excavation.
C. Section 02225 - Trenching: Backfilling of utility
trenches.
D. Section 03001 - Concrete materials.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates.
B. ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density
Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5
lb Rammer and 12 inch Drop.
C. ANSI/ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in
Place by the Sand- Cone Method.
D. ANSI/ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density
Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10
lb Rammer and 18 inch Drop.
1. 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02223 - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 01 FILL MATERIALS
�l
A. Type A - Crushed Gravel: Pit run, Angular, washed natural
stone; free of shale, clay, friable material, sand,
debris; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within
the following limits:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
2 inches 100
3/4 inch 95 to 100
B. Type B - Pea Gravel: Natural stone; washed, free of clay,
shale, organic matter; graded in accordance with
ANSI/ASTM C136, to the following:
1. Minimum Size: 1/4 inch.
2. Maximum Size: 5/8 inch.
C. Type C - Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed: free
of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, or
organic matter; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136,
within the following limits:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
No. 14 10 to 100
D. Type D - 1" Minus Roadbase.
E. Type E - Select Fill.
F. Type F - Structural Fill.
G. Subsoil: Reused, Imported, free of gravel.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retardant: 6 mil thick, polyethylene.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify fill materials to be reused are acceptable.
B. Verify foundation perimeter drainage installation has
been inspected.
C. Verify underground tanks are anchored to their own
foundation to avoid floatation after backfilling.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02223 - 2
io
imm 3 .02 PREPARATION
A. Generally, compact subgrade to density requirements for
No subsequent backfill materials. o5 3
B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of 95%
compaction. Backfill with Type B fill and compact to
density equal to or greater than requirements for
subsequent backfill material.
C. Prior to placement of aggregate base course material at
gravel paved areas, compact subsoil to 95 percent of its
maximum dry density in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698.
3 . 03 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen
materials.
B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural
settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or
spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous
layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth.
D. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous
wo. layers not exceeding 12 inches compacted depth.
E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage
foundation perimeter drainage foundation dampproofing
foundation waterproofing and protective cover utilities
in trenches.
F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials
to attain required compaction density.
G. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not
backfill against unsupported foundation walls.
H. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported
foundation walls until supports are in place.
I. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft,
unless noted otherwise.
J. Make changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.
K. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
L. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of
excess fill materials.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02223 - 3
W
3. 04 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or
minus one inch from required elevations.
3 . 05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under
provisions of Section o5- 3- 01400.
B. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in
accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1557 and with Section 01400.
C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with
ANSI/ASTM D1557 and with Section 01400.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified
requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost
to Owner.
E. Frequency of Tests: every 16" in five places.
F. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade
and paving.
3. 06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. rel
B. Recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3. 07 SCHEDULE
A. Interior Slab-On-Grade:
1. Minimum Type A fill, 4 inches thick, compacted to
95 percent,
2. Cover with Type C fill, 2 inches thick, compacted
to 95 percent.
B. Exterior Side of Foundation Walls Retaining Walls and
Over Granular Filter Material and Foundation Perimeter
Drainage:
1. Subsoil Type A fill, to subgrade elevation , each
lift, compacted to 90 percent.
C. Fill Under Landscaped Areas:
1. Subsoil fill, to 12 inches below finish grade,
compacted to 90 percent. Ni
D. Fill Under Asphalt 95 Paving:
1. Type D fill, to 12" inches below finish paving
elevation, compacted to 95 percent.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02223 - 4
rr
+r. E. Type A fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to 98
percent.
F. Fill over Drainage Piping Gravel Cover:
1. Type E fill, to 2 1/2 inches below finish grade,
compacted to 95 percent.
r. END SECTION
,rr
�r
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02223 - 5
Ar SECTION 02510
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
wr
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES
No
A. Asphaltic concrete paving.
AM 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
Not used.
'o 1. 3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Preparation of site for paving
ow and base.
B. Section 02223 - Backfilling: Compacted subbase for paving.
MW
C. Section 09900 - Painting: Pavement markings.
1.4 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Not used.
rr 1.5 REFERENCES
A. MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot
w Mix Types - The Asphalt Institute (AI) .
B. MS-3 - Asphalt Plant Manual - The Asphalt Institute (AI) .
C. MS-8 - Asphalt Paving Manual - The Asphalt Institute (AI) .
D. MS-19 - Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual, The Asphalt Institute
rw (AI) .
E. ASTM D946 - Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in
Pavement Construction.
1. 6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Not used.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Oregon Department of
Transportation (ODOT) Highways standard.
B. Mixing Plant: Conform to ODOT's standard.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02510 - 1
C. Obtain materials from same source throughout.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for paving work on public
property.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not place asphalt when base surface temperature is less
than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 1 MATERIALS
A. Asphaltic Concrete Surface course materials.
1. Aggregate mix design, class tight C.
2 . Asphalt Cement, type AR-4000.
3 . Percent of recycled asphalt pavement shall not exceed 20 +rr
percent.
B. Asphalt Material:
1. Asphalt emulsion: SS-1 h.
2 . Tackcoat Asphalt: Asphalt emulsion RS-1, SS-1, SS-1h,
CRS-1, CSS-1, or CSS-1h mixed with water and complying
with OSAD subsection 407. 11.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
Not used.
2. 3 MIXES
A. Job Mix Formula Requirements for Bituminous Surface Course:
1. Mix surface course in accordance with OSHD Section 403,
Class C mix, except as modified in this Paragraph.
2 . Measure properties of the job mix using methods described
in ASTM D 1559 as follows:
a. Number of blows, each end of specimen: 75
b. Marshall stability, minimum pounds: 1,800
c. Marshall flow: 8-16
d. Percent voids, total mix: 3-5
e. Percent voids, filled with asphalt: 75-85
3 . Aggregate Gradation Requirements: Comply with OSHD
Subsection 703 . 08.
4 . Furnish bituminous base to the site a temperature of 280
+/- 20 degrees F.
5. Aggregate Gradation for Tight C Specifications:
a. 3/4 inch Sieve: 100 +/- 0 percent passing.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02510 - 2
�0r
Am b. 1/2 inch Sieve: 97 +3/-2 percent passing.
c. 1/4 inch Sieve: 80 +/- 6 percent passing.
d. Number 10 Sieve: 50 +/- 6 percent passing.
e. Number 40 Sieve: 17 +/- 9 percent passing.
f. Number 200 Sieve: 5 +/- 2 percent passing.
6. Asphalt Content: 6.0 +/- 0.5 percent bitumen in AR 4000
grade.
2 . 04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL"
A. Provide mix design for asphalt under provision of Section
01400.
r B. Submit proposed mix design of each class mix for review prior
to commencement of work.
C. Test samples in accordance with AI.
wW
PART 3 EXECUTION
ow
3. 1 EXAMINATION
NoA. Verify base conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify that compacted granular base is dry and ready to
support paving and imposed loads.
ow
C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
JW 3.2 SUBBASE
A. Section 02223 - Backfilling: Fill under asphalt forms the
base construction for work of this Section.
wr
3 . 3 PREPARATION - PRIMER
A. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
AI MS-2, State of Oregon Highways Department.
B. Apply primer to contact surfaces of curbs and gutters.
C. Use clean sand to blot excess primer.
+ ► 3.4 PREPARATION - TACK COAT
A. Apply tack coat in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions AI MS-19 State of Oregon Highways Department.
B. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of curbs and gutters.
C. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02510 - 3
prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these +
surfaces.
3.5 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE
A. Install Work in accordance with State of Oregon Highways
Department.
a
B. Place asphalt -within -24 hours of-- applying primer or tack
coat.
w
C. Place to thickness identified in drawings.
D. Install drainage grilles and frames and manhole frames in
correct position and elevation.
E. Compact pavement by rolling. Do not displace or extrude
pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to
to rolling equipment.
F. Develop rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and rr
smooth finish, without roller marks.
3. 6 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE
Not used.
3.7 CURBS
A. Extruded curbs.
1. Place continuous extruded concrete curbs to profile
indicated on drawings.
2. Place cub on tope of asphaltic concrete paving on two
beads of mastic.
3.8 SEAL COAT
A. Apply seal coat to surface course in accordance with AI MS-19
and State of Oregon Highways Department.
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10
foot straight edge.
B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.
C. Variation from True Elevation: Within 1/2 inch. 06
3. 10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02510 - 4
rr provisions of Section 01400.
B. Take samples and perform tests in accordance with AI.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical
injury for 5 days.
END OF SECTION
,r
rr
ir+r
;wr
wr
err
+w
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 02510 - 5
w
AN
i' SECTION 03001
CONCRETE
low
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 WORK INCLUDED
rr
A. Formwork, shoring, bracing and anchorage.-
B. Concrete reinforcement and accessories.
C. Cast-in-place concrete.
1. 02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 11165 - Metal fabrications attached to formwork.
it
B. Section 15050 - Mechanical attached to formwork.
C. Section 16050 - Electrical accessories for attachment to
formwork.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
rr
A. AIA General Conditions.
ow 1.04 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications of Structural Concrete for
Buildings.
B. ANSI/ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement.
C. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete
Reinforcement.
D. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
E. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
F. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
+� G. ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
H. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete.
I. FS TT-C-800 - Curing Compound, Concrete, for New and
Existing Surfaces.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 03001 - 1
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Maintain copy of ACI 301 on site.
1. 06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.ir
A. Conform to applicable governing- codes.
1. 07 TESTS rr►
A. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to
appointed firm for review prior to commencement of work.
B. Tests of cement and aggregates will be performed to
ensure conformance with requirements stated herein.
rri
C. Four (4) concrete test cylinders will be taken for every
50 cu yds of each class of concrete placed each day.
Test two (2) cylinders at seven (7) days and two (2) at rw
28 days.
D. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold
weather and be cured on site under same conditions as
concrete it represents.
E. One slump test will be taken for each set of test +
cylinders taken.
1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings of reinforcing steel.
B. Indicate reinforcement sizes, spacings, locations of
reinforcing steel, and wire fabric, bending and cutting
schedules, splicing, and supporting and spacing devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Conform to ACI 301.
2.02 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade billetri
steel deformed bars; uncoated finish.
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ANSI/ASTM A185; in
flat sheets; coiled rolls; uncoated finish.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 03001 - 2
io
6
ift
ON 2 . 03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, normal - Type 1 Portland, grey color.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33 .
C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.04 ADMIXTURES.
A. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260.
2 . 05 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Barrier: ASTM D2103, six (6) mil thick black
polyethylene film.
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not
w stain concrete, absorb moisture or impair natural bonding
or color characteristics of coating intended for use on
concrete.
WK 2.06 CURING MATERIALS
A. Water: Clean and drinkable.
to
B. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309. FS TT-C-800.
C. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D2103, 6 mil thick, black color.
2. 07 CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Foundation Concrete:
w
1. Compressive Strength
(28 days) : 3500 psi
so 2. Slump: 4 inch maximum
C. Slab On Fill Concrete:
aw
1. Compressive Strength
(28 days) : 3500 psi
2 . Slump: 3 inch maximum
;w
D. Superstructure Concrete:
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 03001 - 3
wo
wr
1. Compressive Strength
(28 days) : 3500 psi
2. Slump: 4 inch maximum
E. Add air entraining agent to mix for concrete exposed to
freeze-thaw cycling to obtain 5% air entrainment \ 1%.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3. 01 FORMWORK ERECTION
A. Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding ,
with formwork.
B. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms; remove loose
dirt.
C. Align form joints.
D. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces
receive special finishes or applied coatings which may be
affected by agent.
E. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting
openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts,
anchors, and other inserts.
3 . 02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against
displacement.
B. Locate reinforcing splices at points of minimum stress or
as noted on drawings.
3 . 03 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to
commencement
of concreting operations.
B. Install vapor barrier under interior floor slabs on fill.
Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal. Do not disturb vapor barrier
while placing reinforcement.
3 .04 FLOOR SLABS
A. Separate slabs on fill from vertical surfaces with joint
filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within i inch
of finished slab surface.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 03001 - 4
*
ow B. Float, trowel, non-slip finish surfaces as scheduled.
3.05 TOLERANCES
it
A. Provide Class A tolerance to floor slabs according to ACI
301. Pitch to drains 1/4 inch per foot nominal.
AN 3 . 06 EXISTING WORK
Not Used
r
3 . 07 SCHEDULE OF FORMED SURFACES
r�r
A. Smooth form finish on exposed surfaces.
3 . 08 SCHEDULE OF FLOOR SLAB FINISHES
A. Trowel finish at floor slabs.
it
+rr
END OF SECTION
wr
;wr
AW
*0
rw
rw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 03001 - 5
ww
err
SECTION 04320
VENEER MASONRY SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Face brick units. Note: Reuse existing to be removed from
building and provide new to match as required.
B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
1. 02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
Not Used
1. 03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03001 - Concrete.
1.04 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control
and expansion joints.
r B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board System.
1. 05 ALLOWANCES
irr
Not Used
1. 06 REFERENCES
wrr
A. ANSI/ASTM C652 - Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made
From Clay or Shale) .
B. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
it C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the
Hot-Dip Process.
s' D. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather
Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification
for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
aw
1. 07 SUBMITTALS
NOT USED
Aw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 04320 - 1
rw
rw
1.08 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of
this Section with minimum three (3) years documented
experience.
1. 09 MOCK-UP
to
Not Used
1. 10 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE No
Not Used
vi
1. 11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
C. Accept face brick units on site. Inspect for damage.
1. 12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to r�ri
minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after
completion of masonry work.
1. 13 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Not Used
1. 14 EXTRA MATERIALS
Not Used
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 01 MANUFACTURERS - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Not Used
2. 02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Refer to Section 04340.
2. 03 MANUFACTURERS - BRICK UNITS
ori
A. Same as supplier of existing units.
2.04 BRICK UNITS
A. Face Brick: ANSI/ASTM C216, Type FBX, Grade MW, "Norman"
match existing size, use existing and matching color for
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 04320 - 2
i�r►
A* new. Provide units (without holes) for sill course at
windows. (See detail 16/6) .
,ter 1. Furnish special configurations.
NOTE: Contractor shall reuse existing brick from areas of
demolition as long as they are in good condition.
yr
2.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Corrugated Formed Sheet Metal Wall Ties: 7/8 x 7 inch
r
size x 22 gage thick, galvanized steel finish.
B. Adjustable veneer ties: Similar to AA Wire Products Co.
"Rectangular Type: adjustable wall ties", constructed of
r 3/16 inch diameter galvanized steel wire, for CMU to
brick veneer; sizes as required.
2. 06 FLASHINGS
A. Furnished under Section 07620.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Weeps: Approved 3/8 inch inside diameter rigid plastic
tube with inside end of each weep cut at a 45 degree
angle, for installation in bottom mortar joint in brick
veneer work; plastic tubing is available from Continental
Industries. 9206) 241-0891.
B. Cleaning Solution: Similar to Pro So Co. , Inc.
"Sure-Kleen No. 60011, or architect's written approval.
C. Water Repellent Coating: (For all exterior brick veneer
masonry building wall surfaces) Standard Drywall
rr► Products "Thoroclear 777" mineral oil base clear silicone
water repellent, or architect's written approval, meeting
requirements of Federal Specification SS-W-110b.
rs
PART 3 EXECUTION
++ 3 . 01 INSTALLERS
Not Used
wr
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready
to receive work.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 04320 - 3
rw
aw
B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are
properly sized and located.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts so
existing conditions.
3. 03 PREPARATION
to
A. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry
work. Maintain in place until building structure
provides permanent bracing. 10
3.04 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect ai
from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form `o
vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.
C. Lay brick units in matching bond course. Form mortar 1
joints to match existing.
3. 05 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full
head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.
B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of
mortar joints are not permitted.
C. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses.
D. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has
achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made,
remove mortar and replace.
E. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with proper "'
tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges.
Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
F. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal
structural framing members and slabs or decks with
compressible joint filler.
3 . 06 WEEPS AND VENTS
A. Install weep holes in veneer at 24 inches on center
horizontally above through wall flashing, and at bottom
of walls.
No
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 04320 - 4
. illi
Ow
aw 3 . 07 CAVITY BEHIND VENEER
A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity
air space or to plug weep holes.
3. 08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
a+ A. Secure wall ties to stud framed back-up and embed into
masonry veneer at-maximum-16 inches oc vertically-and 36
inches oc horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches oc
00 each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches
of openings.
3 . 09 MASONRY FLASHINGS
1W
A. Extend flashings through veneer, turn up minimum 12
or inches and seal to sheathing over wood framed back-up.
B. Lay end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
iW C. Use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive and
sealer.
3 . 10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for
+. sealant performance.
3. 11 TOLERANCES
rw
A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch.
B. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet
aw and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more.
C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story
,,w non-cumulative.
D. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet
and 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in 30 feet.
E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.
yrr 3 . 12 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for windows and corners. Coordinate with
other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape,
and location.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 04320 - 5
r
rr
B. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to cutting or
fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3 . 13 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Remove excess-mortar- and mortar smears:
C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. to
F. Apply water repellant coating.
3 . 14 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation.
B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective
boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged
by construction activities.
3 . 16 SCHEDULES
ad
Not Used
END OF SECTION VA
at
to
6i
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 04320 - 6
to
to
aw
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
irr
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES
,ter
A. Shop fabricated- ferrous- metal items and prime painted.
rr 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03001 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Placement of
metal fabrications in concrete.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
' A. Section 01400 - Quality Assurance.
B. Section 05520 - Handrails and Railings.
ww
C. Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish.
1. 04 REFERENCES
w.
A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars.
C. AWS A2 . 0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
D. AWS D1. 1 - Structural Welding Code.
E. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
rrr
1. 05 SUBMITTALS
ww A. Submit.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection
ow attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of
fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings,
elevations, and details where applicable.
C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2. 0
welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
1. 06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifying welders
employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within
w. the previous 12 months.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 05500 - 1
rr
aw
1. 07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop
drawings. W
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 01 MATERIALS ai
A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36.
B. Plates: ASTM A283 .
C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 galvanized to ASTM ,
A153 for galvanized components.
D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials
being welded.
E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for
delivery to site.
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
No
C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent
finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush,
and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform
radius.
E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws
or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design
of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. +
F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications.
Fabricate anchors and related components of same material ,w
and finish as fabrication, except where specifically
noted otherwise.
2 . 03 FINISHES '
A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter
prior to finishing.
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or
where field welding is required.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 05500 - 2
ow
aw C. Prime paint items with one (1) coat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1W
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready
aw A.
receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing
conditions.
3 . 02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where
site welding is required.
aw B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete with
setting templates, to appropriate sections.
3 . 03 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free
low from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary
bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of
ww erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1. 1.
E. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to site cutting
or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not
shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with
concrete.
aw 3 . 04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story,
non-cumulative except at record store room floor at space
aw saver files - must be .0005/ft.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
W
3 . 05 SCHEDULE
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
aw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 05500 - 3
460
Ywr
+ SECTION 06001
CARPENTRY WORK
%W PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 WORK INCLUDED
aw
A. Rough carpentry.
No B. Schedule.
1. 02 RELATED WORK
AW A. Section 06114 - Wood blocking.
B. Section 06410 - Custom casework.
aw
C. Section 08210 - Wood doors.
,w D. Section 08520 - Aluminum windows.
E. Section 08712 - Hardware.
F. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing of finish
carpentry and cabinetwork
w 1. 03 REFERENCES
A. MIL-V-13518C(1) Wood Preservative: Tetrachlorophenol and
rr
Pentachlorophenol, Surface Sealing Compound
B. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood
C. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard
D. NFPA - National Design Specification for Wood
w Construction.
1. 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
r A. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Visible grade stamp, of agency
certified by National Forest Products Association (NFPA) .
A' 1. 05 SUBMITTALS
Not Used
aw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06001 - 1
�w
WW
r�+
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver shop fabricated carpentry items until site
conditions are adequate to receive the work. Protect
items from weather while in transit.
B. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with a constant,
minimum temperature of 60 degrees F, maximum relative
humidity- of 25- to- 55 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS +rril
2 . 01 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with established
Grading rules; maximum moisture content of 19 percent; of
following species and grades:
1. Structural Light Framing: Stress group No. 2 grade.
2. Non-structural Light Framing: Stress group standard rr
grade.
3 . Studding: Stress group stud grade.
4 . Structural Joists and Planks: Stress group select
structural No. 2 grade.
5. Beams and Stringers: Stress group select structural
No. 1 grade.
6. Posts and Timbers: Stress group select structural
No. 1 grade.
B. Douglas Fir Plywood: Sheathing grade.
C. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized for exterior
locations, high humidity locations and treated wood;
plain finish for other interior locations; size and type
to suit application.
w
D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Medium
carbon steel; sized to suit application galvanized for
exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated
wood; plain finish for other interior locations. '
E. Joist Hangers; Sized and profiled to suit application;
galvanized finish.
F. Fasteners: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow
masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06001 - 2
arr
anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or power
activated type for anchorage to steel.
ow G. Framing anchors, joist hanger, post caps, etc. :
"Simpson" or Architect approved equal.
2.02 FINISH CARPENTRY AND CABINETWORK MATERIALS
+err
Not Used
„,w 2 . 03 CABINET HARDWARE
Not Used
Mr 2 .04 WOOD TREATMENT
Not Used
r
2. 05 FIRE BLOCKING OF WALL ADN FLOOR PENETRATIONS
MW A. All fire blocking penetrations through fire rated walls,
floors, etc. to be done in accordance with pertinent code
requirements of the latest edition of UBC.
"" 1. Penetrations of mechanical and electrical piping,
conduit, etc.
ow a. Use fire protection products as manufactured
by 3M Contractor Products - Interam System or
as approved by the State of Oregon.
rwr 2. 06 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Shop pressure treat and deliver to site ready for
installation, wood materials requiring pressure
impregnated preservatives.
ar
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 FRAMING, FURRING, AND STRIPPING
A. Erect wood framing, furring, stripping and nailing
members true to lines and levels. Do not deviate from
true alignment more than 1/4 inch.
B. Space members at 16 inches on center unless otherwise
MW noted.
C. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest
Aw possible lengths.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06001 - 3
*W
wr
rrN
D. Construct and erect required built-up beams, lintels and +i
glue lam beams.
E. Double wall framing members at openings over 100 square Vi
inches. Space short members above and below openings in
same manner as for walls.
F. Provide double joist headers at joist ends and around
floor and ceiling- openings.
G. Coordinate installation of wood trusses and wood joists.
H. All bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood to be provided
with a washer.
I All nailing to be per table 25Q of the U.B.C. Nails
called for on the drawings are to be common.
ow
J. Cutting and notching of joists not allowed. 1" diameter
hole may be drilled in the center 1/3 of the member
depth. All other holes to be approved. r
K. Studs may be notched in the lower 1/5 of the height of
stud for electric and plumbing pipes but no part of notch
is to be deeper than 25% of width of stud. Holes of
diameters up to 1/3 of width of stud may be drilled in
studs but not in center 1/3 of their height.
w
3. 02 SHEATHING AND SUBFLOORING
A. Place roof, wall and floor sheathing with end joints rrw
staggered. Secure sheets over firm bearing. Maintain
minimum 1/16 inch and maximum 1/8 inch spacing between
joints of sheets on walls. Place perpendicular to framing mi
members.
B. Place subflooring with end joints staggered. Secure
sheets over firm bearing. Maintain surface flatness of +0
maximum 1/8 inch in 10 ft or more.
C. Plywood sheathing to be standard grade with exterior
glue. Install roof and floor sheathing with face grain
perpendicular to supports and stagger end joints.
Install wall sheathing either horizontal or vertical and
block all edges of plywood with 2 x 4 or thicker
blocking. Block roof sheathing where noted on drawings.
See plans for nailing schedule.
3 . 03 INSTALLATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS AND CABINET WORK
Not Used
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06001 - 4
rw
ww 3 . 04 SCHEDULE
A. Rough Carpentry Work:
1. Structural and non-structural framing.
2 . Build-up structural beams and columns.
3 . Wall- and roof sheathing.
VW 4 . Wood subflooring.
5. Preservative treatment of wood members where
ow required.
6. Sill flashings under exterior framed walls.
No 7 . Miscellaneous blocking for membrane roofing system
and related metal flashings.
w,„ 8. Blocking for roof mounted mechanical items.
9. Behind wall wood blocking for support of washroom
accessories, plumbing, toilet partitions, wall
MW cabinets, kitchen equipment, stair handrails, stair
stangers and guardrail.
ow B. Firestopping:
1. Seal all mechanical and electrical device
,w penetrations with code acceptable applied materials
for particular condition.
END OF SECTION
w�
wr
wr
rw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06001 - 5
ow
..r
err
+rr SECTION 06112
FRAMING AND SHEATHING
rrr
PART 1 GENERAL
+ 1. 01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Structural floor, wall and roof framing.
B. Wall and roof sheathing.
C. Subfloor sheathing and overlay.
wr
D. Sill- gaskets flashing insect guards.
1. 02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing.
ids
B. Section 06181 - Glue Laminated Structural Units.
+r C. Section 06196 - Plywood Web Joists.
1. 03 REFERENCES
rr A. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood
Lumber Standards.
B. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardwood.
C. ANSI A208. 1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.
D. APA - American Plywood Association.
E. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.
VW
F. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard
Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.
"o G. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
00
1. 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1W A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
1. 05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06112 - 1
W
A. Conform to applicable UBC code for fire retardant size
and type of fastener requirements.
B. Conform to UL requirements to achieve rating indicated.
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
A. In lieu of grade stamping exposed-to-view lumber and '
plywood, submit-manufacturer's certificate that products
meet or exceed specified requirements.
No
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and protect products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA WCLIB WWPA.
B. Non-structural Light Framing: Douglas Fir species,
construction grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content.
C. Studding: Douglas Fir species, construction grade, 19
percent maximum moisture content.
2 .02 PLYWOOD MATERIALS
A. Roof Sheathing: APA Structural I, Grade C-D; unsanded.
B. Wall Sheathing: APA Structural I, Grade C-D; sanded.
C. Floor Sheathing: APA Structural I, Grade C-D; sanded. 16
2 . 03 PARTICLEBOARD MATERIALS
A. Roof Sheathing: ANSI A208. 1; wood shavings set with
waterproof resin binder; sanded faces.
B. Wall Sheathing: ANSI A208.1; wood shavings set with
waterproof resin binder; sanded faces.
C. Floor Sheathing: ANSI A208. 1; wood shavings set with
waterproof resin binder; sanded faces.
2.04 HARDBOARD MATERIALS
Not Used
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06112 - 2
irr
+wr 2. 05 GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Wall Sheathing: Moisture resistant; Fire resistant; 5/8
inch thick, 24 x 48 inch sized sheets, square edges,
water repellant paper faces.
2 . 06 INSULATING SHEATHING
Not Used
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Electro- Hot-dipped galvanized steel for
exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations;
ww plain finish elsewhere; size and type to suit condition.
B. Joist Hangers: Galvanized steel, sized to suit joists and
framing conditions; manufactured by Teco.
C. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow
masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage
to solid masonry or concrete.
D. Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, air cure type, cartridge
dispensed.
E. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, steel, power driven type
+r+ length of three (3) times thickness of sheathing.
F. Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt felt. Plain untreated
cellulosic building paper.
2. 08 WOOD TREATMENT
Not Used
..r PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 FRAMING
arr
A. Erect wood framing members level and plumb.
B. Place horizontal members laid flat, crown side-up.
wr
C. Construct framing members full length without splices.
„w D. Bridge joists framing in excess of eight (8) feet span as
detailed or at mid-span members. Fit solid blocking at
ends of members.
r
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06112 - 3
wrr
aw
E. Coordinate installation of wood chord metal joists, glue
laminated structural units and plywood web joists.
3.03 SHEATHING arW
A. Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members
with ends staggered. Secure sheet edges over firm
bearing. Use sheathing clips between sheets between roof
framing members. Provide solid edge blocking between
sheets.
w�
B. Secure wall sheathing horizontally perpendicular to wall
studs, with ends staggered, over firm bearing.
+rMi
C. Place plywood sheeting at building corners where
sheathing is being used.
D. Place building paper over wall sheathing; weatherlap
joints.
E. Secure subfloor perpendicular to floor framing with end
joints staggered. Secure sheet edges over firm bearing.
Attach sheathing with subfloor glue and drywall screws.
F. Install plywood to two span continuous random with 48
inches minimum length.
3. 04 TOLERANCES WA
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position.
B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum.
3.05 SCHEDULE om
Not Used
66
END OF SECTION vi
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06112 - 4
SECTION 06114
WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING
rr
PART 1 GENERAL
ow 1. 01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Cants.
go
B. Blocking in roof openings.
+wr
C. Wood treatment.
1. 02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07533 - Curbing for roofing.
1. 03 REFERENCES
+w�
A. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood
Lumber Standard.
B. APA - American Plywood Association: Grades and
Standards.
aw C. FS TT-W-571 - Wood Preservation: Treating Practices.
D. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.
No
E. SFPA - Southern Forest Products Association.
aw F. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard
Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.
G. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
ow
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
to A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
No
w 1. 05 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide technical data on wood fire treated materials and
application instructions.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06114 - 1
rr
rr
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA, WCLIB and WWPA.
B. Softwood Lumber: Fir species, construction grade, 19
percent maximum moisture content.
C. Plywood: APA Grade C-E, with waterproof glue, unsanded.
rr
D. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high
humidity, and treated wood locations; plain finish
elsewhere; size and type to suit condition.
E. Anchors: Bolts or ballistic fasteners for anchorages to
steel.
2. 02 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment) : FS TT-W-571 AWPA +
Treatment C2 using water borne preservative with 0. 30
percent retainage.
r
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
Not Used
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A.Coordinate work with installation of decking and support of
decking at openings.
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06114 - 2
irr
SECTION 06196
PLYWOOD WEB JOISTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Wood chord" and plywood web joists for roof and floor
framing.
B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage.
++irww
C. Framing for openings.
1. 02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
+ Not Used
1.03 RELATED WORK
ww
A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing.
aw
B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing.
1. 04 REFERENCES
w A. APA - American Plywood Association.
1. 05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
+rw
A. Design Roof Live Load: 25 lbs/sq ft with deflection
limited to 1/240.
1. 06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of
+rw plywood web joists with three (3) years minimum
experience.
Wr B. Design joists under direct supervision of Professional
Engineer experienced in structural framing design
registered in State of Oregon.
w.
1. 07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable UBC code for loads, seismic zoning,
rw
and other governing criteria.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06196 - 1
r
WA
1. 08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data indicating framing
system, sizes and spacing of joists, loads and joist ;
cambers, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing
and framed openings.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site. Store and protect products.
B. Transport and store joists in vertical position resting
on bearing ends.
C. Protect joists from moisture, warpage, and distortion
during transit and when site stored.
PART 2 PRODUCTS rM
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Trus Joist Corporation.
B. Willamette Industries, Inc.
2 .02 MATERIALS
A. Manufacture design per UBC requirements. to
B. Wood Chord Members: Single and Double, top and bottom
chord, stress group and species, per IBCO, per
manufacturer, maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
Finger scarfing permitted if joint exceeds stress limit
of member.
rri
C. Web: Plywood graded by APA; ply core, waterproof glue per
IBCO and manufacturer.
D. Joist Bridging: Type, size and spacing required by joist
manufacturer.
2 . 03 ACCESSORIES
A. Wood Blocking Plating Support Members Framing for
Openings: In accordance with Section 06114 . +
B. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, type to suit application.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06196 - 2
rr
to 2.04 FABRICATION
A. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to
fabrication.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive
joists.
B. Verify sufficient end bearing area.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions.
++�+� 3 . 02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of bearing and support items.
3 . 03 INSTALLATION
A. Install joists in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Place joists true to line and level.
C. Provide temporary bracing to position joists in place
until permanently secured.
ow
D. Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to
maintain joists straight and in correct position before
No installation of decking or inducing loads.
E. Do not field cut joists.
aw F. Place headers and supports to frame openings required.
G. Frame openings between joists with lumber in accordance
with Section 06114.
H. Coordinate placement of decking with work of this
Section.
No
3 . 04 TOLERANCES
N A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position.
60
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06196 - 3
ON
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Finish carpentry-- items-, other than shop prefabricated
casework.
B. Hardware and attachment accessories.
C. Refer to schedule at end of this Section.
1. 02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Sections 10800 and 10522 : Supply of hardware attachment
accessories to this Section.
1.03 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 06001: Installation of recessed wood blocking.
1.04 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Shop fabricated custom
cabinetwork.
B. Section 08210 - Wood Doors.
C. Section 08520 - Windows.
D. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting and finishing of
finish carpentry items.
1. 05 REFERENCES
wrr
A. ANSI/HPHA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and
Decorative Plywood.
B. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
C. AWI - Quality Standards.
ww
D. FS MM-L-736 - Lumber; Hardwood.
E. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact.
F. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
G. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Hardwood.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06200 - 1
aw
MW
wr
H. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
I. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
1. 06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable UBC code for fire retardant
requirements.
B. Conform to UL requirements to achieve fire resistance
assembly rating indicated.
1. 07 FIELD SAMPLES
Not Used
1. 08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings indicating materials, component
profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, finishes,
accessories, etc. , to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to +
one foot.
B. Submit product data on fire retardant treatment materials
and application instructions.
C. Submit two (2) samples 8 x 8 inch in size illustrating
wood grain and specified finish.
D. Submit two (2) samples 8 inch long of wood trim.
E. Submit fabricator's installation instructions.
F. Submit instructions for use of adhesives, attachment
hardware and finish hardware.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site. Store and protect products.
B. Store materials in ventilated, interior locations under
constant minimum temperatures of 60 degrees F and maximum
relative humidity of 55 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRICATORS
Not Used
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06200 - 2
wo
ww 2. 02 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Custom grade in accordance with
AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; all species,
with vertical mixed flat grain, of quality capable of
transparent finish.
B. Hardwood Lumber: FS MM-L-736; Premium grade in accordance
with AW2; maximum moisture content-- of 6 percent; . all
species, with vertical mixed flat plain sawn grain, of
quality capable of transparent finish.
2 . 03 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Plywood: ANSI/HPHA HP; Premium Grade in
accordance with AWI; veneer lumber particleboard core
material; birch species, with face veneer of plain sliced
vertical mixed flat grain.
2.04 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: 0.050 inch General Purpose Vertical
Fire Resistive Grade; color, pattern, and surface finish
as selected by Architect from manufactuarer's standards.
B. Plastic Laminate Backing: High pressure paper base
.r laminate without a decorative finish; 0.020 inch thick,
smooth surface finish.
r 2.05 ADHESIVE
A. Contact Adhesives: FS MMM-A-130; water base solvent
release type.
B. Wall Adhesive: Solvent release, cartridge type,
compatible with wall substrate, capable of achieving
rr. durable bond.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Nails: Size and type to suit application, plain coated
finish.
B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Blind Fasteners, Lags, and Screws:
Size and type to suit application; plain galvanized
finish.
C. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of
Douglas Fir species.
D. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06200 - 3
rrr
Aw
E. Wood Filler: Solvent oil base, tinted to match surface
finish color.
2.07 WOOD TREATMENT MATERIALS
Not Used
2. 08 SHOP FINISHING
A. Shop finish work in accordance with AWI 'Factory
Finishing' Section 01500. w
PART 3 EXECUTION
10
3. 01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces openings are ready to receive work
and f ield measurements are as shown on shop drawings. "W'
instructed by the fabricator.
B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items 1
affecting work of this Section are placed and ready to
receive this work.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing `
substrate.
3. 02 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or
assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials.
3. 03 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom Premium
quality standard.
B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb
and level. •
C. Install components trim with nails, screws, bolts, and
with blind fasteners at 8 inch on center. Wall adhesive
by gun application.
D. Cover exposed edges of plywood and particleboard shelving
and site made casework with aluminum plastic 3/8 inch
thick hardwood edging. Width of edging to match
thickness of shelving.
E. Apply plastic laminate finishes where indicated. Adhere
with adhesive over entire surface. Make joints and
corners hairline. Match patterns. Slightly bevel arises.
Cap exposed edges with aluminum trim. plastic trim.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06200 - 4
wr
qW
plastic laminate of same finish and pattern. 3/8 inch
thick hardwood trim. Apply laminate backing sheet on
reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
F. Install hardware supplied by Section 08712 in accordance
with manufacturer' s instructions.
3 . 04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting
Materials: 1/32 inch.
3 . 05 SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS
Not Used
3 . 06 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed
fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09900.
wr
3 . 07 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation.
3 . 08 SCHEDULE
Not Used
END OF SECTION
wrr
aw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 06200 - 5
arw
SECTION 07212
BOARD INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Board insulation -and integral vapor and air barrier at
perimeter foundation wall. New and patch existing
disturbed.
1. 02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation.
1. 03 REFERENCES
ir.
A. ANSI/ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular
Plastics.
�r
B. ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.
C. FS HH-I-530 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Unfaced,
Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate.
D. FS HH-I-1972/GEN - Insulation Board, Thermal, Faced,
Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of
thermal barrier at building enclosure elements.
B. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of
vapor and air barrier at building enclosure elements.
1. 05 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide data on product characteristics, performance
criteria and limitations.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate
'"■' special environmental conditions required for
installation and installation techniques.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet
or exceed specified requirements.
1. 06 MOCK-UP
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07212 - 1
Not Used
1. 07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or
weather conditions are detrimental to successful
installation.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with Section 07415 for installation
of vapor and air barrier seals.
aw
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS 'o
A. Temple-Eastex; 800-231-6060 - Product Tempro.
B. Atlas Energy Products; 404-438-9700 - Product AC Foam 1.
C. Carpenter Insulation Co. ; 800-527-5598 - Product Isodeck
GF.
D. Celotex; 813-871-4811 - Product Apache Pyrox.
E. Termal Systems, Inc. ; 303-393-1984.
2. 02 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Polyisocyanurate Insulation Type D: FS HH-I-530 Style;
closed cell type, conforming to the following:
Thermal Resistance Aged R of 14. 3
Thickness Thickness indicated 2 inch on
foundations perimeter.
Board Size 48 x 96 inch of manufacturer rr
standard
Compressive Strength Minimum 16 psi
Water Absorption In accordance with ANSI/ASTM
C355 less than 0. 1 perm in.
Edges Square edges
Facing Unfaced
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07212 - 2
n
ir.
irr 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - ADHESIVES
Not Used
2.04 ADHESIVES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer
for application.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Barrier: Black polyethylene film for above grade
application, 6 mil thick.
w B. Tape: Polyethylene self-adhering type, mesh reinforced,
2 inch wide.
C. Insulation Fasteners: Impale clip of galvanized steel,
to be adhered mechanically fastened to surface to receive
board insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and
substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening
insulation in place.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions.
B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation
boards are dry and ready to receive insulation and
adhesive.
C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of honeycomb,
fins, irregularities and materials or substances that may
impede adhesive bond.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION - FOUNDATION PERIMETER
err
A. Adhere a two (2) inch wide strip of polyethylene over
joint with double beads of adhesive each side of joint.
Tape seal joints. Extend sheet full height of joint.
B. Adhere boards to foundation wall perimeter, vertically
and horizontally. Place boards in a method to maximize
contact bedding. Stagger side end joints. Butt edges
and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions.
3 . 03 INSTALLATION - UNDER CONCRETE SLABS
wr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07212 - 3
A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab
has been compacted.
B. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while
placing vapor barrier and placing slab.
3 . 04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work.
B. Do not permit Work to be damaged prior to covering
insulation.
3 .05 SCHEDULES IN
A. Perimeter foundation insulation.
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07212 - 4
err SECTION 07213
BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Batt insulation and vapor barrier in exterior wall and
ceiling construction.
1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07212 - Board Insulation.
w 1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
B. FS HH-I-521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal, (Mineral
Fiber for Ambient Temperatures) .
C. FS HH-I-558 - Insulation, Blocks, Boards, Blankets,
Felts, Sleeving (Pipe and Tube Covering) , and Pipe
Fitting Covering, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, Industrial
Type) .
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of
thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. in
Wr conjunction with thermal insulating materials in Section
07212 .
B. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of
vapor and air barrier at building enclosure elements.
1. 05 SUBMITTALS
rrr
A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics,
performance criteria and limitations.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet
or exceed specified requirements.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07213 - 1
rr
1. 06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work of Section 07190 for installation of
vapor and air barrier seals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1W
2 .01 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Certainteed Corp. ; Valley Forge, PA; 714-680-5814
B. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. ; Toledo, OH; 503-620-1014.
C. Manville Corp. ; Denver, CO; 800-654-3103 .
2 . 02 MATERIALS w
A. Batt Insulation: FS HH-I-521 Type I - without membranes;
preformed glass fiber batt; conforming to the following:
Thermal Resistance R of 19 (walls) R of 30 (roof)
Batt
Facing Unfaced
B. Sheet Barrier: Black polyethylene film for above grade
application, 6 mil thick.
C. Steel wire; galvanized; type and size to suit m'
application.
D. Tape: Polyethylene self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, so
2 inch wide.
E. Insulation Fasteners: Steel impale spindle and clip on
flat metal base, self adhering backing, length to suit
insulation thickness, capable of securely and rigidly
fastening insulation in place.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation
are dry and ready to receive insulation.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07213 - 2
rWi
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation and vapor and air barrier in
accordance with insulation manufacturer 's instructions.
B. Install in exterior walls and ceiling spaces without gaps
or voids.
C. Trim insulation neatly- to fit spaces.-
D.
paces.D. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side
of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of
insulation. Leave no gaps or voids.
E. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in
membrane.
F. Metal Framing: Place vapor and air barrier on warm side
of insulation; lap and seal sheet barrier joints over
member face.
G. Extend vapor and air barrier tight to full perimeter of
adjacent window and door frames and other items
interrupting the plane of membrane. Tape seal in place.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Ceiling and Building soffits. - R-30
B. Wall Insulation: R19 roll, faced; separate 6 mil vapor
barrier.
C. Sound Walls 3" R-11 rock wool facer.
D. Sound control at ceiling and sound walls: Use R-11
fiberglass, unfaced, lap 2 feet each side of wall.
ism
END OF SECTION
rr
err
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07213 - 3
rr SECTION 07240
COATED INSULATION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES
r.
A. Composite - cladding - of --rigid insulation and applied
coating.
B. Coating applied directly to gypsum board substrate.
1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
Not Used
.rr 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09260 - Wall exterior gypsum board sheathing.
r
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular
Plastics.
B. ASTM C355 - Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation.
1. 05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
lift A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of
water resistive qualities at building enclosure elements
in conjunction with backing materials in Section 09260.
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate exterior joint pattern and joint
details.
B. Product Data: Provide data on system materials, product
�" characteristics, performance criteria and limitations.
C. Samples: Submit two (2) 24 x 24 inch size samples
illustrating coating color and texture range for
selection.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate
preparation required, installation techniques and
jointing requirements.
r.r
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07240 - 1
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS rrri
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work
of this Section with minimum three (3) years documented
experience and approved by manufacturer.
1. 08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to- applicable - governmental codes for
flame/fuel/smoke ratings for finish system.
1. 09 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Construct one (1) field sample panel, min. four (4) ft
long by four (4) ft wide, of system materials
illustrating method of attachment, surface finish, color,
and texture.
B. Locate on exterior face.
C. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. ,r►
1. 10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect products.
B. Protect adhesives and finish materials from freezing by
storing in an environment recommended by manufacturer.
1. 11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install finish when ambient temperature is below
40 degrees F.
B. Maintain this temperature during and 24 hours after
installation of finish.
1. 12 WARRANTY r
A. Manufacturer shall issue to Owner a written certificate
of warranty for three (3) years covering labor, material, ,
equipment, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. IPSO, Inc. Product - R-Wall 206-644-1144 .
B. Dryvit System, Inc. Product - Outsulation
800-556-7752.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07240 - 2
ir�iri
+�r C. Syenergy Methods, Inc. Product - EIFS 800-221-7663 .
2 .02 MATERIALS
A. Polystyrene Board Insulation Type A: ASTM C578, Type;
molded bead type, recommended by manufacturer.
r� B. Insulation Adhesive: Recommended by CIS manufacturer.
C. Primer/Adhesive: Recommended by CIS manufacturer.
r+r
D. Coating Reinforcement: Glass fiber mesh, woven, treated
for improved bond with coating.
E. Coating: Synthetic vinyl composition Modified polymer
Portland cement, air curing, containing chopped glass
fibers, color as selected.
aw
2 . 03 ACCESSORIES
a„ A. Insulation Fastening: Galvanized metal channel with
non-corrosive fasteners.
JIM B. Perimeter Trim and Control Joints: Galvanized steel with
attachment flanges.
C. Sealant Materials: Recommended by coated insulation
ow system manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
10
3. 01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions.
wr
B. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry,
secure and acceptable.
C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free irregularities,
projections, etc.
3. 02 INSTALLATION - INSULATION
A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Install boards on wall surface per CIS manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Place boards in a method to maximize tight joints.
Stagger vertical joints. Butt edges and ends tight to
adjacent board and to protrusions.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07240 - 3
rr+
D. Secure boards to substrate by mechanical attachment to
achieve a continuous flush insulation surface.
3. 03 INSTALLATION - COATING
A. Install primer/adhesive, coating and reinforcement in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply primer/adhesive to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch
and fully embed reinforcement, wrinkle free.
C. Lap reinforcement edges and ends two (2) inches.
D. Install perimeter trim and control joints.
E. Apply finish to a minimum thickness of 5/16 inch.
F. Apply sealant at finish perimeter and control joints in
accordance with CIS manufacturer's recommendations.
3. 04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK ani
A. Protect finished Work.
B. Do not permit finish surface to become soiled or damaged.
3. 05 CLEAN-UP
A. Clean adjacent materials, surfaces and work area of
foreign materials, spatters, drips, etc.
3. 06 SCHEDULES
A. Exterior: Type D insulation 2 inches thick unless
otherwise noted on the drawings, reinforcement and
coating finish, sand finish in color selected by the
Architect. Must match existing at site.
n
rr
END OF SECTION
wry
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07240 - 4
VA
Ali
SECTION 07533
ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING - MECHANICALLY ATTACHED -CONVENTIONAL
rr
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Insulation, mechanically attached membrane roofing, base
flashings, roofing membrane expansion joints ,cant strips,
ballast cover and counterflashings.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
Not used.
1. 3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED IN THIS SECTION
+r
Not used.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
Not Used
1. 5 REFERENCES
rr A. ASTM C177 - Test Method for Steady-State thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate.
B. ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation.
C. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board.
D. ANSI/ASTM D412 - Rubber Properties in Tension.
E. ANSI/ASTM D746 - Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomeric by Impact.
F. ASTM D624 - Rubber Property - Tear Resistance.
G. ASTM D822 - Practice for Operating Light and Water-Exposure
Apparatus (Carbon-Arc) Type for Testing Paint, Varnish,
Lacquer, and Related Products.
H. ASTM D1004 - Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and
Sheeting.
I. ASTM D2240 - Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness.
J. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07533 - 1
rr
K. Factory Mutual (FM) Engineering Corporation - Roof Assembly
Classifications.
L. FS HH-I-526 - Insulation Board, Thermal (Mineral Fiber) .
M. FS HH-I-529 - Insulation Board, Thermal (Mineral Aggregate) .
N. FS HH-I-530 - Insulation Board, Thermal (Urethane) .
0. FS HH-I-551 - Insulation Block and Boards, Thermal (Cellular
Glass) . nrt
P. FS LLL-I-535 - Insulation Board, Thermal (Cellulosic Fiber) .
Q. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Roofing and 46
Waterproofing Manual.
R. SPRI - Wind Design Guide for Ballasted Single Ply Roofing
Systems.
S. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - Fire Hazard Classifications. rrr
1. 6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Elastomeric Sheet Membrane Conventional Roofing System: One
ply membrane system with vapor retarder, insulation,
mechanically attached membrane.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. rr
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate setting plan for tapered insulation,
joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of
interface with other materials, paver ballast cover pattern.
C. Product Data: Provide characteristics on membrane materials,
flashing materials, insulation, vapor retarders, pavers.
D. Samples: Submit two, 24 x 24 inch in size illustrating
insulation, pavers ,
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special
precautions required for seaming the membrane.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or
exceed specified requirements. - Min. 20 year warranty on
material. 10 year on Labor. +r
G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of
Section 01400.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07533 - 2
rr
H. Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures,
humidity, wind velocity during application.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with three years
documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of
this section with 5 years documented experience and approved
by system manufacturer.
C. Work of this section to conform to NRCA Roofing and
manufacturer's instructions.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly fire hazard
requirements.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) : Class A Fire Hazard
Classification.
C. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) : Roof Assembly
Classification, of Class 1 Construction, wind uplift
requirement of I90, in accordance with FM Construction
imp Bulletin 1-28.
1. 10 MOCKUP
' A. Provide mockup of roof membrane system and associated
components and accessories under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Mockup Size: 2 x 2 feet, including vapor retarder,
insulation, ballast cover and typical base and counter
flashings.
C. Mockup delivered to Architect.
r
1. 11 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section,
under provisions of Section 01039.
ion
B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with
related Work.
ow
1. 12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under
provisions of Section 01600.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07533 - 3
B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry,
undamaged, seals and labels intact.
C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of
ground and moisture.
1. 13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather
[ambient temperatures below 40 degrees F or above 100
degrees F.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface.
C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in
quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same
day.
1. 14 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. ,r►
B. Coordinate the work with the installation of associated metal
flashings, as the work of this section proceeds.
1. 15 WARRANTY
A. Provide 20 year warranty and 10 year warranty under
provisions of Section 01700.
B. Warranty: Cover damage to building resulting from failure to
prevent penetration of water.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS - MEMBRANE MATERIAL
A. Firestone.
B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
1. Carlisle Tire & Rubber.
2 . Kelley Energy Systems.
3 . Stevens Product EP will be considered equal.
4. Schulleer
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07533 - 4
rir
wb
W A. Membrane: EPDM 45 mm thick, color as selected; conforming
to the following criteria:
Properties Test Results
Tensile Strength: ANSI/ASTM D412 1400 ps
Elongation: ANSI/ASTM D412 300 %
Hardness - Shore A: ASTM D2240 60 +/- 10
Tear Strength:- __. ASTM D624 - 125 ,1bs/inch min.
Water Absorption: ASTM E96 Proc BW
Moisture Vapor Perms: ASTM E96
Exposure: ASTM D822
Low Temperature ANSI/ASTM D746 -500 45°C)
wr
Brittleness:
B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
+. 2 . 3 MEMBRANE FASTENERS
A. Battens: Per Mfg.
B. Disc Washers and Screws: Per Mfg.
iW 2.4 SUBSTRATE COVERING MATERIALS
A. Fire Resistant Sheet Vapor Retarder: Conforming to UL
requirements; Per Mfg. requirements.
2.5 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION
A. Celotex Product: Thermax Hy-Tec Plus
B. Manville Product: Fesco-Foam.
C. International Permalite Product: Iso-Perl.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2 . 6 INSULATION
A. Insulation: FS HH-I-526; Glass fiber rigid board; top
surface coated with 28 lb/square asphalt and Kraft paper,
with the following characteristics:
Board Size: 48 x 96 inch
Thermal R-19 min.
Board Edges: Square.
A. Insulation: ASTM C728; Expanded perlite mineral aggregate
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07533 - 5
aw
r�►
board; with the following characteristics: ►
Board Size: 36 x 48 inch min.
Therma Conductivity: R7 min.
Board Edges: Square.
B. Separation Sheet: Per Mfg. requirements
C. Cushion Sheet: -Per Mfg.-- requirements -
2.7 FLASHINGS
A. Flexible Flashings: Same material as membrane.
B. Counterflashings: Metal, as specified in Section 07620.
C. Prefabricated Control or Expansion Joint Flashing: Sheet
butyl over close cell foam backing seamed to metal flanges.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Fiber Cant and Tapered Edge Strips: Preformed to
configuration as detailed.
B. Sheathing Joint Tape: Per Manufacturer.
C. Insulation Adhesive: As recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
D. Insulation Joint Tape: Per Manufacturer.
E. Roofing Nails: Galvanized or non-ferrous type, size as
required to suit application.
w
F. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and
approved by Factory Mutual and system manufacturer; length
required for thickness of material with metal washers. a
G. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
H. Strip Reglet Devices: Galvanized steel; maximum possible
lengths per location, with attachment flanges.
2.9 BALLAST COVER
Not Used
rr
PART 3 EXECUTION
3. 1 EXAMINATION '
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07533 - 6
rri
rr
ow A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive
work.
B. Verify deck is supported and secure.
C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves,
low or projections, properly sloped to drains.
D. Verify deck surfaces -are dry and- free of snow or ice. Confirm
dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum.
ow
E. Verify adjacent precast concrete roof members do not vary
more than 1/4 inch in height. Verify grout keys are filled
r
flush.
F. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents
through roof are solidly set, cant strips are in place.
3.2 PREPARATION - CONCRETE DECK
A. Fill surface honeycomb and variations with latex filler.
3 . 3 VAPOR RETARDER APPLICATION
A. Apply vapor retarder to deck surface with adhesive in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend vapor retarder under cant strips and blocking to deck
edge.
C. Lap flexible flashing over vapor barrier of wall construction
to provide continuity of barrier seal.
3 .4 INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry.
B. Apply adhesive to deck in accordance with adhesive and
insulation manufacturer's instructions. Embed insulation into
adhesive with full contact.
C. Apply adhesive to the top surface of insulation. Embed the
second layer of insulation into adhesive, with joints
a. staggered [minimum 6 inch from joints of first layer.
D. Place the constant thickness first layer and the tapered
thickness insulation second layer to the required slope
pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Minimum Total Insulation Thickness: 1 inch [As required to
achieve an average R value of 17 for tapered insulation.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07533 - 7
F. Place boards perpendicular to deck flutes with edges over +
flute surface for bearing support.
G. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing.
Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around
penetrations through roof.
H. Lay tapered boards for a distance of 18 inches back from roof '
drains for- positive- drainage. -
I.
or positive drainage.I. Apply no more insulation than can be covered with membrane in + +►
same day.
J. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with insulation
manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Apply membrane and mechanical attachment devices in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install mechanical fasteners in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
r
C. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet
into place without stretching.
D. Overlap edges and ends and seal per manufacturers standard,
minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply
uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.
E. Apply joint tape and seal.
F. Extend membrane up cant strips and minimum of 8 inches onto
vertical surfaces.
G. Seal membrane around roof penetrations.
3 . 6 FLASHINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Apply flexible flashings to seal membrane to vertical
elements.
B. Secure to nailing strips at 4 inches.
C. Install prefabricated roofing control and expansion joints to
isolate roof into areas as indicated in accordance with ri
manufacturer's instructions.
D. Coordinate installation of roof drains and related flashings. y
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07533 - 8
1W
us E. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane.
00 3 .7 BALLAST INSTALLATION
Not Used
as 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under
o provisions of Section 01400.
B. Correct identified defects or irregularities.
so C. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation materials'
manufacturers daily during installation of the Work.
rw 3 .9 CLEANING
A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by Work of this
section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice
and conform to their documented instructions.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by
Work of this section.
3 . 10 PROTECTION
wr
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
40 B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane,
protect surfaces.
END OF SECTION
wr
rr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07533 - 9
w
Aw
wn SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
ow PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 WORK INCLUDED
Aft
A. Coping parapet and, cap flashings.
No B. Counterflashings over base flashings.
C. Counterflashings at roof mounted mechanical equipment and
vent stacks.
or
1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
aw Not Used
1.03 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
+w
Not Used
1. 04 RELATED WORK
inw
A. Section 06001: Wood blocking, nailers, and grounds.
v. B. Section 07533: ModifiedElastomeric Sheet Roofing.
C. Section 07900: Joint Sealers.
D. Section 09900: Painting:, Prime and finish painting.
1. 05 REFERENCES
A. AA (Aluminum Association) - Aluminum Construction Manual:
Aluminum Sheet Metal Work and Building Construction.
B. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the
Hot-Dip Process.
D. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
rrt
E. ASTM D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
rr
F. FS O-F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid.
G. NAAMM - Metal Finishes Handbook.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07620 - 1
Uw
H. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing
Manual.
I. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Work of this Section is to physically protect membrane
roofing, base flashings, and other roof appurtenances
from damage that would permit water leakage to building
interior.
1. 07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing
work with three (3) years minimum experience.
1. 08 ELECTROLYTIC PROTECTION
A. Wherever metals of different galvanic range are to be in
contact, provide industry-approved separation by ►
bituminous paint coats, bitumen saturated felts, or
tinning, as applicable and approved by Architect.
1. 09 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent
twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide
ventilation.
B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may
cause discoloration, staining, or damage.
1. 10 WARRANTY
06
A. See Section 07535 - Item 1.07A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Pre-coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525, G90; 24 gage core
steel, shop pre-coated with 2 mill. coating of Architect
selected color. - Match existing wall color. '
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Fastener: Galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers at
exposed fasteners.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07620 - 2
iw►
ow B. Underlayment: ASTM D266; No. 30 asphalt saturated
roofing felt.
C. Metal Primer: Epoxy.
D. Protective Backing Paint: Industry standards.
r E. Sealant: Type specified in Section 07900.
F. Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt.
G. Solder: FS QQ-S-571; ANSI/ASTM B32; 50/50 type.
�r
H. Flux: FS O-F-506.
2.03 FABRICATION
err A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square,
and free from distortion or defects.
ww B. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as
sheet, minimum two (2) inches wide, interlockable with
sheet.
C. Form pieces in longest practical lengths.
D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam
corners.
E. Form material with double lock standing seam.
F. Solder and seal metal joints in gutters. After
soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints
clean.
G. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch
long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.
H. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward
1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.
MW 2. 04 FINISH
A. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with protective
Aw backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07620 - 3
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or Ai
vents through roof are solidly set, and nailing strips
located.
B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in
place, sealed, and secure.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions.
3. 02 PREPARATION to
A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.
B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before
starting installation.
C. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels.
Seal top of reglets with sealant.
D. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Usew►
exposed fasteners only in locations approved by
Architect/Engineer.
E. Lock and seal all joints.
F. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and
felt flashings. rr
G. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square,
surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate
to profiles.
H. Solder metal joints watertight for full metal surface
contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with
neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
3.03 INSTALLATION
Not Used
3.04 SCHEDULE
Not Used
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07620 - 4
rr
to SECTION 07710
PREFABRICATED ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
WA 1. 01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Roof ventilators.
1. 02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
w.
Not Used
1. 03 RELATED WORK
rw A. Section 06114 - Blocking and curbs.
B. Section 07533 - Roofing.
low
C. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
D. Section 07900 - Sealants.
1. 04 SUBMITTALS
r Not Used
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
" A. Penn Ventilator Co.
B. Brod & McClung - Pace Co. ; 503-659-5880.
Aw
2 . 02 COMPONENTS
iiw A. Fixed Roof Ventilators: Furnish and install complete 10"
round throat Diameter Penn Type WB Omega Unit or equal as
approved by Architect. Unit shall be standard
manufactured ventilators mounted on Penn, Sonotrol or
+w Unibeam curb. Provide for hood to have minimum 6"
clearance from roof level.
e 1. Units must be secured to meet region wind demands
(maximum) .
2 . Provide with bird screening.
W&
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL,TIGARD 07710 - 1
aw
aw
3 . Number as called for on drawings. to
2.03 ACCESSORIES
Not Used
2 .04 FINISHES
A. PVC coated galvanized weather cover.
44
PART 3 EXECUTION
3. 01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that roof membrane, base flashing, and other items
affecting work of this Section are in place and
positioned correctly. '
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions. so
3. 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Coordinate roofing membrane and base flashings with
installation of components of this Section.
C. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement
with work of this Section to ensure watertightness.
END OF SECTION
rw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL,TIGARD 07710 - 2
dw
No SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
AW PART 1 GENERAL
1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES
r
A. Preparing substrate surfaces-.---
B. Sealant and joint backing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03001 - Concrete: Sealants required in conjunction
with cast-in-place concrete.
B. Section 07240 - Coated insulation system - Sealants required
for coated insulation system.
C. Section 07533 - Elastomeric Sheet Roofing: Sealants required
in conjunction with roofing.
D. Section 07620 - Sheet metal: Sealants required in
conjunction with metal roofing.
E. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Door Frame: Sealants required
in conjunction with door frames.
F. Section 07240 - Coated Systems: Sealants required in
�w
conjunction with aluminum windows, and joints, etc.
G. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants required in conjunction
with glazing methods.
1. 3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds.
B. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants.
C. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.
D. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
F. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded
Rubber.
G. ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride
"'� Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam) .
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07900 - 1
VW
a
H. SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) -
Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical
characteristics,-performance criteria,- substrate preparation,
limitations, and color availability.
C. Samples: Submit three samples, 1/4 x 3 inch in size
illustrating sealant colors for selection.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special
procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
1. 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's
requirements for preparation of surfaces and material
installation instructions.
ow
1. 6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the 96
Products specified in this section with minimum three years
experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of
this section with minimum three years experience.
1.7 MOCKUP
A. Field test: Prior to installation of joint sealers, field
test sealers to demonstrate their adhesion to joint substrate rr
as recommended in ASTM C 962.
B. Construct mockup with specified sealant types and with other
components noted.
C. Locate where directed.
fto
D. Acceptable mockup may remain as part of the Work.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 16
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant
manufacturer during and after installation. at
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07900 - 2
ow
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this
section.
Aw
PART 2 PRODUCTS -
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wet Sealants
1. Dow Corning Corporation, Midland, MI, Irvine, CA.
2 . General Electric Co. , Silicone Products Division;
+�++ Waterford, NY.
3 . Gibson-Homans Co. ; Twinsburg, OH, Portland, OR.
wr
4 . Horn, A.C. , Inc. ; North Bergen NJ.
5. Meadows, W.R. , Inc. ; Elgin, I1.
wr
6. Pecora Corp. ; Harleysville, PA.
7. P.R.C. , Products Research & Chemical.
8. Protective Treatments, Inc. ; Dayton, OH.
9. Sonneborn Building Products Division, Rexnord Chemical
Products; Minneapolis, MN.
ow 10. Thoro System Products; Miami, FL.
11. Williams Products, Inc. ; Troy, MI.
AW
B. Dry Sealants
r�r
1. Illbruck/USA; Troy, MI.
2 . F.H. Maloney.
+ 3 . Norton Company, Sealants Division; Granville, NY, Sparks,
NV.
4. Protective Treatments, Inc. ; Dayton, OH.
5. Rubatex Corp. ; Bedford, VA, Seattle, WA.
6. Williams Products, Inc. ; Troy, MI.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07900 - 3
ow
aw
C. Backing Materials rw
1. Meadows, W.R. , Inc. ; Elgin, IL.
2 . Sonneborn Building Products Division, Rexnord Chemical
Products; Minneapolis, MN.
3 . Williams Products, Inc. ; Troy, MI.
2.2 WET SEALANTS
A. Sealant Color
1. Exposed joints, color to match adjacent surface as
approved.
2 . Concealed joints, manufacturer's highest performance
color.
B. One Component Interior Nonelastomeric Sealant
1. Acrylic-Latex, S-1: ASTM C 834, Acrylic- Latex No. 1345
by Gibson-Homans, Esaply ALS by W.R. Meadows, AC-20 by
Pecora, Sonolac by Sonneborn, Acrylicalk by Thoro System,
Sikaflex 419/420 by Sika.
C. One Component Exterior Elastomeric Sealants
1. Polysulfide, S-11: Hornflex-One by A.C. Horn, GC-9 by
Pecora, PRC 5000 by Products Research, Sololastic 1-Part
by Sonneborn, Thorospan by Thoro System, Sikaflex 440 by
Sika.
2 . Polyurethane, S-12: Vulkem 45, 116 and 118 by Maeco, 16
Sikaflex la by Sika, Dynaseal W-100 by Williams Products.
3 . Acid type silicon rubber, S-13: Silicon or 795 by Dow
Corning, 1200 by General Electric, 863 by Pecora.
4. Non-acid type silicon rubber, S-14: 790 or 795 by Dow
Corning, Silpruf 2000 by General Electric, No. 1050 by
Gibson-Homans.
5. Hypalon, S-17: Eternaflex Hypalon No. 1120 by Gibson-
Homans.
6. Neoprene, S-18: Eternaflex Neoprene No. 1010 by Gibson-
Homans.
D. One Component Interior Elastomeric Sealants
1. Nonacid type silicon rubber sealant, S-15: S.R.S.
Paintable by Dow Corning, 1700 by General Electric.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07900 - 4
2 . Acid type silicon rubber sealant, S-16: Plumbing
fixtures caulk by Dow Corning.
aw E. Two Component Exterior Sealants
1. Polyurethane, 5-22: No. 1071 pour grade by Givson-
Homans, 227 by Mameco, Sonolastic NP II by Sonneborn.
+rr
2 . Polyurethane,* S-23: - No. 1075 gun grade- by Gibson-Homans.
arr F. Nonskinning Mastic Sealants
1. Polyisobutylene Metal Seal Mastic, 5-31: PTI 404 by
Protective Treatments.
w
2 . Polyisobutylene Acoustical Mastic, S-32 : Sound Control
21 by Miracle Adhesives.
2. 3 DRY SEALANTS
+rr
A. Building Tape Sealants
1. Butyl Polyisobutylene, 5-41: PTI 606 by Protective
Treatments.
1W
2. Foam Neoprene, 5-42: ASTM D 1056, Closed Cell Sponge by
F.H. Maloney, 1040 Series NN1 by Williams Products.
w.
3 . Acoustical Foam, S-43: Adhesive one or both sides, PVC
foam V-730 by Norton, Polyurethane open cell foam, 1320
AN Series by Williams Products.
4. PVC Low Density Foam, 5-44: V-770 by Norton.
bw 5. PVC Medium Density Foam, S-45: V-780 by Norton.
6. Polyurethane Expanding Foam, 5-46: Will-Seal by
aw Illbruck/USA.
B. Building gasket sealants; Solid Neoprene, S-51: Full Density
by F.H. Maloney, Closure Strips by Rubatex Corp. , 1200 Series
�""' by Williams Products.
2 .4 PREPARATION AND BACKING MATERIALS
Im
A. Joint cleaner and primer/sealer: As recommended by sealant
manufacturer for the joint surface to be cleaned, primed and
Aw sealed.
B. Bond breaker tape: Polyethylene or other plastic self-
adhesive tape, compatible with sealant, which will not bond
#AW to sealant.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07900 - 5
4W
AW
101
C. Sealant backer rod: Nonabsorptive closed cell compressible 0i
rod stock, compatible with sealant, which will not bond to
sealant. Sonofoam by Sonneborn, Backer Rod by W.R. Meadows,
Expand-O-Foam Rod by Williams Products.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3. 1 PREPARATION '
A. Protection
1. Protect adjacent exposed porous surfaces from sealant
contact with adhesive tape.
2 . Cover floor, wall, and ceiling surfaces prior to sealing
floor, wall, and ceiling joints with wet sealants.
B. Surface Preparation
1. Clean, prime, and seal joint surfaces as recommended by
sealant manufacturer.
2 . Support sealant from back with construction indicated or
support with joint filler or backer rod where recommended
by sealant manufacturer.
3 . Install polyurethane backing tape sealant behind backer
rod at vertical expansion joints in exterior concrete and
masonry walls.
16
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A. Color Selection: Use approved sealant color. 46
B. Installation Technique:
1. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions. 40
2. Install elastomeric sealants in nontraffic joints to size
and shape indicated or with slightly concave surface and to
depth equal to 100 percent of normal joint width, but not
more than i inch and not less than 1/4 inch.
3 . Install elastomeric sealants in concrete foot traffic
joints to size and shape equal to 75 percent of normal
joint width, but not more than 5/8 inch and not less than
3/8 inch deep. ,r
4 . Install nonelastomeric sealants to size and shape
indicated or with slightly concave surface and depth from
75 percent to- 125 percent of normal joint width.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07900 - 6
�r
r 3. 3 ADJUSTING
A. Defective joints: Replace materials improperly installed as
directed.
3 .4 DAILY CLEANING
A. Remove adhesive tape from edge of exposed joints after
tooling.
B. Remove excess sealant material and spillage promptly.
C. Remove tape adhesive from exposed adjacent surfaces.
3. 5 SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete to Concrete or Masonry
1. Exterior: S-12, 5-17, S-22, or S-23.
2. Interior: S-1, 5-17, S-22, or S-23.
B. Concrete to Brick or Metal
*w 1. Exterior: S-12, S-14, S-17, or S-23 .
2 . Concealed: S-32, S-43, or S-46.
3 . Interior: S-1, S-42, S-44, S-45, or S-46.
C. Masonry to Masonry or Gypsum:
1. Exterior: S-12, S-17, or S-23.
" 2 . Concealed: S-32, S-43, or S-46.
3 . Interior: S-1, 5-44, S-45.
err
D. Masonry to Metal or Wood:
1. Exterior: S-12, 5-14, S-17, or S-23 .
Iwr
2 . Concealed: 5-32, S-43, or S-46.
+�r 3. Interior: S-1, S-44, or S-45.
E. Gypsum to Gypsum, Metal or High Pressure Laminate:
it
1. Concealed: S-32, S-42, 5-43, or S-46.
2. Interior: S-1, 5-42, 5-44, or S-45.
F. Metal to Metal:
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07900 - 7
r
"w
to
1. Exterior: S-11, S-13 , 5-17, S-18, or 5-23. vi
2 . Concealed: S-31, 5-41, S-43, 5-45, S-46, or 5-51.
3. Interior: S-1, 5-15, S-43 , 5-44, or 5-45. vi
G. Metal to High Pressure Laminate:
1. Concealed: 5-32, S-42, S-43, or 5-46.
2 . Interior: S-1, S-42, S-44, or S-45. Ali
H. High Pressure Laminate to High Pressure Laminate:
1. Concealed: 5-32 , S-43 , S-44, or 5-46.
2 . Interior: S-1, S-42, S-44, or S-45.
I. Plumbing Fixtures or Equipment to Concrete, Tile or High
Pressure Laminate:
wr
1. Exterior: S-14, S-17, 5-22, or S-23 .
2 . Concealed: S-32 or S-46.
3 . Interior: S-15 or 5-45.
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 07900 - 8
art
+•• SECTION 08111
STANDARD STEEL RELITE WINDOWS, DOORS AND FRAMES
aw PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 WORK INCLUDED
aw
A. Non-rated steel doors and frames.
B. Rated steel doors and frames.
1. 02 RELATED WORK
dw A. Section 08210: Wood Doors.
B. Section 08712: Hardware.
C. Section 09900: Painting - Field painting of doors and
frames.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of
Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel
Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
+.. B. SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
C. SDI-105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel
Frames.
D. Door Frames - ASTM A366, A568 & 569.
iW 1. 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of SDI-107.
1. 05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Not Used
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
+' A. Submit shop drawings and product data. Indicate frame
configuration, anchor types and spacings, location of
cutouts for hardware, reinforcement, and finish.
B. Indicate door elevations, relites, internal reinforcement
and closure method; interior blocking for hardware
attachment, and cutouts for glazing.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08111 - 1
+rr
1. 07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION wr�1
A. Protect relites, doors and frames with resilient
packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic.
B. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Amweld; Niles, OH (216-652-9971)
B. Ceco Corp.
C. Curries; Mason City, IA (515-523-1334)
D. Pioneer Industries; Carlstadt, NJ (201-933-1900)
E. Steelcraft, American Standard
F. Republic Builders Products (901-352-3383)
G. Kreiger Steel Products
g (206-547-1382)
H. Grand Metal Products Corp. (503-235-3105)
2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Exterior Doors: SDI-107 (extra heavy duty) Grade III
Model 1 - included full flush unit exposed edge seams
only.
B. Interior Doors: SDI-107 Grade III Model 1 - Full flush Ali
exposed edge seams only.
C. Exterior Frames: 16 gage thick material. Commercial 4
grade, cold or hot rolled steel of core thickness sizes
required and/or indicated on drawings.
D. Interior Frames: 16 gage thick material, core thickness to
as required or sized on drawings; units of cold or hot
rolled steel.
2.03 DOOR CORE
A. Core:
1. Interiors; Impregnated cardboard honeycomb
2 . Exterior; Polyurethane or fiberglass insulation.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08111 - 2
ow
p B. Insulated door insulation value of R-11. 1, U = . 09.
2 . 04 ACCESSORIES
"w A. Rubber Silencers Resilient rubber.
B. Anchors: Welded to frame. Three (3) per jamb - 2 ' on
we center.
2 . 05 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
w.
A. Primer: zinc chromate. Manufacturer's recommended
standard.
"w 2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fabricated frames to be of full welded construction
ON throughout.
B. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement
w, plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes.
Include all cutouts, reinforcing, drilling, tapping per
ASTM A115 to accommodate required finish hardware.
ow C. Prepare nonrated frame for silencers. Provide three
single rubber silencers for single doors and mullions of
double doors on strike side, and two single silencers on
frame head at double doors without mullions.
D. Close top edge of exterior door flush with inverted steel
aw channel closure. Seal joints watertight.
E. Prepare fire rated doors and frames to meet requirements
of NFPA No. 80, with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. ,
am Warnock-Hersey International label, Factory Mutual label
or ICBG approved as indicated on Door Schedule and
required by all applicable Building Codes.
ow
F. Finishing:
1. After fabrication, fill, dress, and sand tool marks
and surface imperfections to eliminate defects.
2. Chemically clean all surfaces.
AW
3 . Shop prime door and frame surfaces, using
manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer.
4. Coat welds in galvanized doors and frames with
zinc-rich prime coating.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08111 - 3
Ali
2 . 07 FINISH tii ►
A. Interior Units: Manufacturer's standard primer.
B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
go
A. Install frames in accordance with SDI-107 and per
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install doors into frames with clearances specified in
SDI-100.
C. Coordinate with stud wall construction for anchor
placement.
D. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between ►
two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor.
E. Fully fill exterior door frames with fiberglass
insulation and grout solidly.
F. Seal opening between door frames and exterior walls with
wet or dry sealants as indicated on Drawings and
specified in Section 07900, Joint Sealers.
G. Doors:
1. Fit doors to frame providing clearances specified
in SDI-100.
2 . Install door hardware after field finishing.
H. Relites (interior windows) : VA
1. Install 1/4 float glass or tempered as required per
UBC with removable stops and tape.
2 . Units to be 30 inch above finish floor and full
height unless otherwise noted on plans, at width
designated on drawings. 'o
I. Fire Rated Assemblies:
46
1. Install fire rated door and frame assemblies in
accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.
4
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08111 - 4 Ai
mi
wr
+�. 2 . Comply with requirements for fire rating indicated
on door schedule.
3 . 02 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust door clearances and hardware placement to allow
smooth operation.
B. Seal openings between frame and wall as indicated on
drawings.
C. Defective work: Touch up scratched prime paint to match
adjacent surfaces.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean all exposed surfaces of door, frame and hardware.
3.04 SCHEDULE
A. See door and frame schedule requirements on drawings.
END OF SECTION
ww
a
aw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08111 - 5
rw
aw
aw
+w+ SECTION 08210
WOOD DOORS
rr PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Im
A. Wood doors.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08111: Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
*W B. Section 08712: Hardware.
vo C. Section 09900: Painting: Site finishing doors.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NWMA I.S.1 - Industry Standard For Wood Flush Doors
(Includes Standards I.S. 1. 1 through I. I.S. 1.7) .
00 B. AWI - Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwwork
Institute.
1.04 PERFORMANCE
4W
Not Used
r
1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirement of AWI Quality Standard Section
1300 and 1400 Premium Grade. ANSI/NWMA I.S. 1.
1. 06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Not Used
1. 07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data. Indicate door
elevations, stile and rail reinforcement and internal
blocking for hardware attachment.
B. Submit two (2) samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating
finish for approval by the Architect.
1. 08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with AWI
'""' ANSI/AWMA requirements.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08210 - 1
air
1.09 WARRANTY No
A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer's standard warranty
for solid core wood doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS to
A. Flush Solid Core Wood Doors:
go
1. Louisiana - Pacific Corp. (503-221-0800)
2 . Columbia Door Division; Simpson Timber Company;
Vancouver, WA 206-696-4031.
3. Eggers Hardwood Products Corp. ; Neenah, WI;
414-722-6444; Everett, Interior Construction
Specialties, 206-624-7764.
4. Vancouver Door; Puyallup, WA 206-845-9581. rl
5. Weyerhaeuser Company; Tacoma, WA 206-924-2345.
6. Cenco Door Systems; Portland (503-284-0024)
2 . 02 DOOR AND PANEL TYPES
A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid particle
board core construction; plain sliced birch veneer faces.
Paint grade.
2 . 03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION (AWI QUALITY STANDARD)
A. Solid, Non-Rated Core: AWI Premium - PC5 or PC7. 06
2. 04 PREFIT DOORS AT SHOP WITH TOLERANCES
rrr
A. Vertical edge: 1/8"
B. Top: 1/8"
C. Bottom: 1/2"
D. Devel lock edge: 1/8" in 211.
2 . 05 FLUSH DOOR FACING
A. Flush Interior Door Veneer: Paint grade, rotary cut
birch.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08210 - 2
om
VW
*W 2 . 06 ACCESSORIES
Not Used
foe 2 . 08 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards
aw ANSI/NWMA I.S. 1 requirements.
B. Premachine doors for finish hardware.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3. 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
ow
B. Machine cut relief for hinges and closers and coring for
handsets and cylinders.
C. Trim door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges to
a maximum of 3/16 inch.
o" D. Trim door height by cutting equally on top and bottom
edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch.
AW E. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. Use threaded through
bolts for half surface hinges.
F. Prepare doors to receive finish hardware in accordance
with AWI requirements.
G. Conform to AWI ANSI/AWMA requirements for fit tolerances.
aw
3 . 02 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
No Not Used
3 .03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
ow A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Refinish door bottom to match after cutting.
rr
C. Damaged prefinished doors to be replaced.
V, 3 .04 SCHEDULE
A. See door and frame schedule on drawings.
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08210 - 3
ai.
r
I. SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS SYSTEM
1W PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Extruded aluminum windows with fixed operating sash.
Aw B. Glass and glazing - see elevations for location of
reflective glass.
"r 1. 02 RELATED WORK
aw A. Section 06001: Rough Carpentry: Framed opening.
B. Section 06112: Framing and Sheathing.
'Am C. Section 07900: Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and
back-up materials.
1.03 REFERENCES
ow
A. ANSI/ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.
B. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference.
C. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
1. 04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Window System
1. Windows with fixed sash.
1. 05 PERFORMANCE
■
A. Window components to provide for expansion and
contraction caused by a cycling temperature range of 170
F degrees without causing detrimental effects to
components.
B. Design and size members to withstand dead loads and live
loads caused by pressure and suction of wind as
calculated in accordance with UBC code.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08520 - 1
+rr
C. Limit mullion deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of
glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever
is less.
D. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in
glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within
system, to exterior.
E. Limit air infiltration- through assembly to 0. 06 cu
ft/min/sq ft of assembly surface area, measured at a
reference differential pressure across assembly of 0. 3
inches water gage as measured in accordance with
ANSI/ASTM E283 .
at
1. 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide wrapping strippable coating to protect
pref inished aluminum surfaces.
1. 07 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year manufacturer's warranty.
B. Warranty: Cover complete window system for failure to
meet specified requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
66
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
NOT USED
No
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: 16
1. 6063 - T5 alloy.
2 . Internal members; 1 inch. go
3 . Solid sections; 0. 125 inch.
4. Tubular Sections with webs combined thickness;
0. 188 inch.
B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard.
2 . 03 FABRICATED COMPONENTS
A. Frames: V-1611 & V-1610.
B. Fasteners: Stainless steel per ASTM A164 & 5. 66
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08520 - 2
16
rrr
iw 2.04 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Specified in Section 08800.
B. Glass: sealed insulated units of float glass - match
existing units.
C. All interior glass thickness and types to be according to
U.B.C.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate windows allowing for minimum clearances and
shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling
installation.
B. Rigidly fit and weld joints and corners. Accurately fit
and secure corners tight. Make corner joints flush,
hairline, and weatherproof. Seal corner joints with
sealant.
C. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior.
D. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate
anchorage items.
E. Provide internal reinforcement in mullions with
galvanized stainless steel members to maintain rigidity.
2.06 FINISHES
A. Exterior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Match existing
exterior units.
ow B. Interior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Match existing
interior units.
to C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum
and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or
dissimilar materials.
we
PART 3 EXECUTION
+W 3 . 01 INSPECTION
A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal
to materials are ready to receive work of this Section.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08520 - 3
rr�+
3. 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install window frames, glass and glazing in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame to
structure.
C. Align window frame- plumb and level,- free of warp or
twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with
adjacent work. rr
D. Coordinate attachment and seal of air and vapor barrier
materials. Install under sill flashings.
E. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter to
maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
F. Install glass using exterior wet combination dry method
of glazing.
G. Install perimeter type sealant, backing materials, and
installation requirements in accordance with Section
07900. Apply sealant to ends of sill for watertight
seal.
H. Adjust operable hardware for smooth operation and tight
fit of sash. 6
I. Install pass thru window according to manufacturer's
directions. IN
3. 03 CLEANING
A. Removerotective material from
P prefinished aluminum
surfaces.
B. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild
detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping
cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe
surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits
or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. to
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08520 - 4
rr
wr SECTION 08712
DOOR HARDWARE
J" PART 1 GENERAL
1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hardware for wood doors.
B. Thresholds.
C. Gasketting.
E. Door Schedule - see Drawings
1. 2 WORK INSTALLED AND FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
Not used.
wrY
1. 3 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
Not used.
1.4 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames.
B. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors.
rrr
1.5 REFERENCES
o' A. AWI - Architectural Woodworking Institute Accessible to and
B. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
C. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute
w..
D. SDI - Steel Door Institute
1. 6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected
Sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement
for door hardware.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door
hardware with minimum five (5) years experience.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08712 - 1
B. Hardware supplier to have in his employment an experienced
hardware consultant who is available for project hardware
consultation to Architect.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to
fire rated doors and frames.
B. Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101.
1.9 CERTIFICATIONS
A. Supplier's Hardware Consultant will inspect complete
installation and certify that hardware and installation has
been furnished and installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein.
B. Provide two (2) copies of certifications to architect.
1. 10 SUBMITTALS
A Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data.
1. 11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements,
and inspection procedures related to preventative
maintenance.
1. 12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify
package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.
B. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in
secure area.
�r
1. 13 WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year warranty.
1. 14 EXTRA STOCK
NOT USED
1. 15 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
Arlt
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08712 - 2
til
�w
�. A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each
different or special hardware component.
B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by
hardware component manufacturer.
1. 16 FIRE DOOR LABELS
A. Provide hardware for fire-rated -openings in- compliance with
AIA (NBFU) Pamphlet No. 80 and NFPA Standard No. 80.
aw
B. Provide hardware which has been tested and listed by
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. , for the types and sizes of
No doors required and complies with the requirements for the
door and door frame labels.
C. Where panic exit devices are required for fire-rated doors,
MW provide U.L. label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit
Hardware" .
IN 1. 17 SEQUENCING
A. Surface mounted hardware: Do not install surface mounted
to items until Site finishes have been applied and cured.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
go 2 . 1 SUPPLIERS
Not used.
Wo 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS REQUIRED ITEMS PER DOOR
A. Butts: Lawrence, McKinney, Stanley - 1 i pr.
VW -T2714 4 i x 4/12
B. Lock and Latch Sets: Sargent in /LeMer Handle - see plan for
Wo Lock or Latch
C. Cylinder Locks: Medco 1 - @ Lockset
D. Closers: Sargent, LCN, Norton 20-8006-20 1 @ each door
E. Stops: Ives, Glynn-Johnson, Quality 1 per door
wrM
F. Silencers: Glynn-Johnson, Ives per Mfg req.
G. Kickplates: Cipo, BBW, Brookline5153 , 32" x 32" 2 per door
H. Smoke Gaskets: Pemko, Reese, Zero 1 set per door
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08712 - 3
w�l
2 . 3 KEYING
A. Door Locks: Master keyed including construction keying.
Control keying for core removable cylinders. Key per Owner's
requirement.
B. Supply two (2) keys for each lock.
2 .4 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Provide full mortise butts in exact width required to clear
projection of trim.
B. Provide butts with flat tips and retainer device to prevent
rising during use.
C. Provide butts for exterior out-swinging doors and except
where noted with nonremovable pins.
D. Latch and Lock Sets: - See Plan for type
1. Design: Lever - satin chrome plated by Sargent.
2 . Strikes: Provide locks and latches with curved lip box
strikes in matching metal and finish.
E. Surface Door Closers:
1. Type: Liquid-controlled. LCN
2 . 5 FINISHES err
A. All items shall have satin (dull) chrome finish (26D0
matching existing units. 46
2.6 HARDWARE ACCESSORIES
t
A. Fasteners
1. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item.
2 . Provide Phillips flat-head screws to match the finish of
adjacent surfaces.
3 . Where available, provide concealed fastners for hardware
units which are exposed when the door is closed.
4 . Avoid the use of through bolts where the bolt head or nut
on the opposite face is exposed.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08712 - 4
irrr
5. Where it is not possible to adequately reinforce the
door, use machine screws or concealed fastners with flush
heads.
.. 6. Provide fasteners which are compatible with both the unit
fastened and the substrate.
'+ 2.7 HARDWARE MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Where hardware mounting heights are not indicated in other
sections of this specification, use the following heights as
a guide:
�r
1. Top Hinge: 5" header rabbet to top of hinge.
2 . Bottom hinge: 10" finish floor to bottom of hinge.
3 . Center hinge: Equal distance between top and bottom
hinge.
4 . Locksets/latchsets: 36" finish floor to center of knob.
5. Deadlocks/deadlatches: 660" finish floor to center of
cylinder.
+rr
6. Kick plates: 2" from each side and bottom.
r. 7 . Other hardware: Heights as recommended by manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and
dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, requirements of SDI and AWI.
B. Installation of Recessed Door Hardware on Site Finished
Surfaces.
1. Where site cutting and fitting is required to install
hardware in site finished surfaces, install hardware and
then remove and store hardware in a secure place during
application of site finish.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08712 - 5
rill
2 . After completion of the site finish, reinstall hardware.
C. Installation of Surface Mounted Door Hardware
1. Install kickplates with oval-head full-thread screws,
spaced uniformly at a minimum of 5" on center along
kickplate perimeter.
2 . Install thresholds with- a positive anchoring device or
lead expansion shield and anchor bolts.
3 . Set thresholds in mastic sealant, 5-31 or tape sealant,
S-46.
3 . 3 OPERATING HARDWARE ADJUSTMENTS
A. Check and adjust operating hardware and each door operation
to ensure proper operation.
B. Lubricate moving parts with type of lubrication recommended
by manufacturer. rr
C. Use graphite or WD 40 type if no other lubrication is
recommended.
rw
D. Replace hardware which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to
operate freely and smoothly as intended.
E. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation
of heating and ventilating equipment.
F. Contract closeout adjustments: Where hardware installation
is made more than one month prior to occupancy of a space or
area, return to the work during the week prior to occupancy,
and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware and
doors.
3.4 SCHEDULES AND LEGENDS
A. Door Frame Schedule and Door Identification: Coordinate door
frame groups, door types, hardware type, and door numbers
using the legend as shown on the following pages.
B. Door Type Schedule: Supply door types as shown on the
following pages. See Drawings for total number of and
location of doors.
3.5 SCHEDULE AND DOOR TYPES
Hardware Groups: (matching existing units)
All doors in hollow metal frame (to match door fire rating)
unless noted.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08712 - 6
r�r SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass,- plastic, and glazing- for hollow metal work,
windows, glazed walls, doors, etc.
1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up
material.
B. Section 08111 - Glazed doors.
C. Section 08410 -. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.
w� D. Section 08520 - Glazed windows.
1.03 REFERENCES
�r.
A. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air
,. Pressure Difference.
B. ASTM E774 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
` C. FGMA - Glazing Manual.
D. FGMA - Sealant Manual.
E. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual.
F. SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association.
1. 04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
"" A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide
continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier:
Per local codes.
1. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed
units for the continuity of the air and vapor seal.
2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier
throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel
bead of glazing sealant.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08800 - 1
B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and NO
negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as
calculated in accordance with UBC code.
C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 with full recovery of mi
glazing materials.
1. 05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Product Data on Glass and Plastic Types Specified:
Provide structural, physical and environmental w
characteristics, size limitations, special handling or
installation requirements.
B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical,
functional, and environmental characteristics,
limitations, special application requirements. Identify
available colors.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate
special precautions required.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sealed
insulated glass, meet or exceed specified requirements.
1. 06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual ,
FGMA Sealant Manual and SIGMA - Standards Manual for
glazing installation methods.
1. 07 MOCKUP 46
Not Used
1. 08 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
Not Used
1. 09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less
than 50 degrees F.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and
24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.
1. 10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop
Drawings.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08800 - 2
�r
+ 1. 11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings,
and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work.
1. 12 WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer's written warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for sealed glass units from
seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and
replacement of same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 01 MANUFACTURERS - GLASS MATERIALS
A. Libby-Owens-Ford Glass Company.
B. PPG Industries, Inc.
C. ASG Industries, Inc.
D. Substitutions: Per Architect's written approval.
±rr
2 . 02 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Clear Float Glass: (Noted as "F" glass type. ) Furnish
conforming to Fed. Spec. DD-G-451D clear Type I, Class I
quality "q3" except use quality "q2" for mirrors, 1/4
inch nominal thickness unless otherwise shown.
B. Clear Plate Wired Glass: (Noted as "W" glass type. )
Furnish conforming to Fed. Spec. DD-G-451D, clear
polished plate glass 1/4 inch thickness, diamond mesh
wire reinforcing, U.L. listed.
irw C. Clear Fully Tempered Plate Glass: (Noted as "T" glass
type. ) Furnish conforming to Fed. Spec. DD-G-1403B,
fully tempered, clear, 1/4 inch thickness, similar to LOF
"Tuf-Flex" .
D. Insulating Clear Float Glass Units: (Glass Type "I-CG")
1. Outside-lights: Furnish clear float glass, 1/4
inch nominal thickness, conforming to Fed. Spec.
DD-G-451D; sizes as required allowing for expansion
and contraction of glass and aluminum framing
members.
2 . Inside-lights: Furnish same as specified above for
outside lights.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08800 - 3
3. Air space: Provide air space between lights of 1/2
inch nominal.
4. Insulating Clear Tempered Safety Glass Units:
(Glass Type "I-CTG")
E. Insulating Clear Float Glass Units: (Glass Type "I-CG")
1. Outside-lights: Furnish clear, fully tempered plate
glass, 1/4 inch nominal thickness, conforming to
Fed. Spec. DD-G-1403B, similar to LOF "Tuf-Flex"
clear tempered safety glass, or approved
manufacturer's equivalents as listed under this
Section, or approved; sizes as required allowing
for expansion and contraction of glass and aluminum
framing members.
2 . Inside-lights: Furnish same as specified above for '
outside lights.
3 . Air space: Provide air space between lights of 1/2
inch nominal.
F. Insulating Integrally Colored Float Glass Units: (Noted
as "I-FG" glass type) .
1. Outside-lights: Furnish colored float glass, 1/4
inch nominal thickness, conforming to Fed. Spec.
DD-G-451D, grey tinted, with a light transmission
of not less than 42% and with a shading co-
efficient of not greater than 0.67 ' sizes as
required allowing for expansion and contraction of
glass and aluminum framing members.
2 . Inside-lights: Furnish clear float glass, 1/4 inch
nominal thickness, conforming to Fed. Spec.
DD-G-451D; sizes as required allowing for expansion
and contraction of glass and aluminum framing
members.
3 . Air space: Provide air space between lights of 1/2
inch nominal.
G. Insulating Colored Tempered Safety Glass Units: (Noted
as "I-TG glass type. )
1. Outside-lights: Furnish colored fully tempered
plate glass, 1/4 inch nominal thickness, conforming
to Fed. Spec. DD-G-1403B, similar to LOF "Tuf-Flex"
grey tinted tempered safety glass, or approved
manufacturer's equivalents as listed under this
Section, or approved, with a light transmission of
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08800 - 4
ift
not less than 42% and with a shading coefficient of
not greater than 0.67 ' sizes as required allowing
for expansion and contraction of glass and aluminum
framing members.
2. Inside-lights: Furnish clear fully tempered plate
glass, 1/4 inch nominal thickness, conforming to
Fed. Spec. DD-G-1403B, similar to LOF "Tuf-Flex"
clear - tempered safety glass, or approved
manufacturer's equivalents as listed under this
,. Section, or approved; sizes as required allowing
for expansion and contraction of glass and aluminum
framing members.
3 . Air Space: Provide air space between lights of 1/2
inch nominal.
H. Insulating Reflective Float Glass Units: (Noted as
"I-RG" glass type. )
1. Outside-lights: Furnish reflective glass, 1/4 inch
nominal thickness, similar to LOF "Eclipse Blue
Green" and silver pyrolytic coating, with a minimum
light transmittance of 33%; a daylight minimum
reflectance (daylight exterior) of 45%; and a shade
coefficient of not greater than 0.45. Sized as
required to allow for expansion and contraction of
glass and framing member.
2 . Inside-light: Furnish clear float glass, 1/4 inch
nominal thickness, conforming to Fed. Specs.
DD-G-451D; sized as required to permit proper
expansion and contraction of glass and framing
members.
3 . Air Space: 1/2 inch nominal between light panels.
I. Insulating Reflective Tempered Safety Glass Units:
(Noted as "I-RTG" glass type. )
1. Outside-lights: Furnish tempered reflective glass,
1/4 inch nominal thickness conforming to Fed.
Specs. DD-G-1403B, with bright silver pyrolytic
coating similar to LOF "Eclipse Blue Green" with a
�. minimum light transmittance of 33%; a daylight
minimum reflectance of 45%; and a shade coefficient
of not greater than 0.45. Sized as required to
allow for expansion and contraction of glass and
frame.
2 . Inside-lights: Furnish clear fully tempered plate
glass, 1/4 inch nominal thickness, conforming to
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08800 - 5
r.
Fed. Specs. DD-G-1403B, Similar to LOF "Tuf-Flex"
clear tempered safety glass or Architect's approved
equal. Sized as required to allow for glass and
frame expansion and contraction.
3. Air Space: Provide 1/2" air space between lights.
2 . 03 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC SHEET MATERIALS
NOT USED
2. 04 PLASTIC SHEET MATERIALS
NOT USED
2.05 MANUFACTURERS - GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Maloney Company: 713-223-3161.
B. Norton Sealants.
ad
C. Standard Products Company: 419-734-2181.
D. Substitutions: Per Architect's written approval.
2 . 06 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Polysulphide Sealant (Type GC-D) : FS TT-S-00227, Class
A Type II; two component; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25
color to match existing - 20 year resistance to normal
deterioration.
B. Silicone Sealant (Type GC-F) : FS TT-S-01543, Class A;
single component; chemical curing; capable of water
immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A
hardness of 15-25; color to match existing.
2.07 GLAZING ACCESSORIES iA
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 80 - 90 Shore A
durometer hardness, length of 0. 1 inch for each square
foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing
rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing
method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer
hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of
the glazing stop x thickness to suit application.
C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound; 10 - 15 Shore A
durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; no
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08800 - 6
�r.
appreciable deterioration for 3000 hour test in Atlas
Weatherometer.
D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
2. 08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
' A. Provide shop inspection and testing for glass.
B. Test samples in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 and ASTM E773.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and
within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are
clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive
glazing.
3 . 02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate
compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
3 . 03 INSTALLATION
A. Standards & Performance
1. Watertight and airtight exterior installation in
required. Installation must withstand normal
temperature changes, wind loading, impact
loading (for operating sash and failure of sealants
or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight,
deterioration of glazing materials and other
defects in the work.
.. 2 . Protect glass from edge damage at all times during
handling, installation and operation of the
building.
3 . Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to
provide for necessary minimum bite ont he glass,
minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Glazier
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08800 - 7
is responsible for correct glass size for each
opening, within the tolerances and necessary
dimensions established.
4. Comply strictly with recommendations of glass
manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other
materials used in glazing except where
manufacturer's technical representatives direct
otherwise in writing.
5. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass
Marketing Association except as specifically
recommended otherwise by the manufacturer of the
glass and glazing materials in writing.
6. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before
installation, and eliminate any which have
observable edge damage or face imperfections.
7 . Unify appearance of each series of lights by
setting each piece to match existing. Inspect each
piece and set with pattern draw and bow oriented in
the same direction as other pieces.
8. Install polysulfide sealants as recommended by the
sealant manufacturer.
9. Install insulating glass units to comply with
recommendations by Sealed Insulating Glass
Manufacturers Association or recommended by glass
and sealant manufacturers.
3 . 04 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points
of sill rabbet. Set blocks in thin course of the
heel-bead compound, if any.
B. Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and
spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 united
inches, except where gaskets and used for glazing.
Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use
thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant
tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
C. Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or
compound by forming voids or installing filler rods in 06
the channel at the heel of jambs and head (do not leave
voids in the sill channels) except as otherwise
indicated, depending on light size, thickness and type of di
glass, and complying with manufacturer's recommendations.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08800 - 8
tin
a.
D. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass which is
tempered.
o" E. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to
ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and
channel surfaces.
F. Tool exposed -surfaces of- glazing liquids and compounds to
provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass.
Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude
slightly out of the channel, so as to eliminate dirt and
moisture pockets. Clean and trim excess glazing
materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly
after installation, and eliminate strains and
discolorations.
G. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of
the channel to pressurize the sealant or gasket on the
opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that
gasket will not "walk" out when subjected to dynamic
movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or
by proven adhesives, including embediment of gasket tail
in cured heel bead.
H. Gasket Glazing: Miter cut and bond ends together at
corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so
ow that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result
in voids or leaks in the glazing system.
3. 05 INSTALLATION - MIRRORS
NOT USED
3.06 CURE, PROTECTION & CLEANING
A. Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to
obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive
strength and surface durability.
"r B. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon
installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers of
any type to surfaces of glass.
C. Remove and replace glass which is broken,
chipped,cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during
the construction period, including natural causes,
accidents and vandalism.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08800 - 9
D. Maintain glass in a reasonable clean condition during
construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive
action and will not contribute (by wash-off) to the
deterioration of glazing materials and other work.
E. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than four
(4) days prior to Owner's acceptance of the work in each
area. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
n1i
9i
ad
wa
to
1i
1111
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 08800 - 10
.� SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal- stud wall- ,framing.
B. Metal channel ceiling framing.
C. Acoustical insulation.
D. Gypsum board.
E. Gypsum sheathing.
F. Taped and sanded joint treatment.
G. Texture finish.
H. Cementitious backer board.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
Not used.
rw
1. 3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07213 - Batt & Blanket Insulation: Thermal
insulation.
B. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Frames.
w+
C. Section 08210 - Wood Doors
D. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
B. ASTM C79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board.
air
C. ASTM C442 - Gypsum Backing Board and Core Board.
D. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard
Construction.
E. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09260 - 1
w.
F. ASTM C645 - Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners
(Track) , and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of
Gypsum Board.
G. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for at
Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
H. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw
Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant
Backing Board.
I. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
J. ASTM C931 - Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board.
K. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Board.
L. ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials.
r
M. GA-201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings.
N. GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and
Finishing of Gypsum Board.
O. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual.
w
P. UBC Standard No. 47-6.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Not used.
1.6 SUBMITTALS N'
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
go
B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board,
joint tape and finish.
C. Submit Underwriter Laboratories, Inc. , design number and
CABO NER reports for fire rated wall and ceiling assemblies.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840. GA-201, GA-216
GA-600 and local jurisdictional requirements.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09260 - 2
err
„„ A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of
this section with minimum five years documented experience.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
w�
A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 1 COMPONENTS
A. Steel Framing Components:
1. Wide Flange C-Studs and Track: ASTM A 446, Grade A, 33
ksi for gage framing, punched load-bearing steel C-studs,
1-5/8 inch flange and 1/4 to 1/2 inch long stiffening
rrr lip, see Drawings for sizes.
2 . Light Gage C-Studs and Track: ASTM C 645, 25 gage, G-60
zinc-coated steel with knurled flanges and extended leg
top runners to prevent structural loading of studs.
3. Screw Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, roll-formed, hat
shaped 25 gage, G-60 zinc-coated steel with knurled face.
4. Steel Cold Rolled Channels: ASTM C 754, 3/4 inch and
1 1/2 inch wide, 16 gage, G-60 galvanized or black
asphaltum painted steel.
,r
5. Framing Screws: ASTM C 1002.
6. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Gun fired fasteners by Hilti
or ITW Ramset.
B. Manufactured Ceiling Suspension Systems:
1. Main Runners: 1 1/2 by 15/16 inch, steel tees, 12 feet
long.
2 . Cross Tees: 1 1/2 by 15/16 inch double web steel tee,
4 feet long.
3 . Screw Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, roll formed, 2 7/8
rr by 7/8 inch, 25 gage, hat shaped, G-60 zinc coated steel
with knurled face.
4. Wall Angles or Channels: 1 1/8 by 1 1/8 inch angle or
.. 1 9/16 by 1 inch channel, 12 feet long.
5. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, minimum 12 gage galvanized
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09260 - 3
ow
steel wire.
6. Seismic Braces: Manufacturer's standard steel
compression post bracing.
7. Acceptable Fire Rated Suspension Systems: Firefront 650
by Chicago Metallic, Rigid X Drywall Suspension System
by USG Interiors, Series CER by National Rolling Mills.
C. Face and Backing Board Panels:
1. Gypsum Face Panels: ASTM C 36, long edges tapered and
round or beveled, Type "X" gypsum core, 5/8 inch thick.
rr
2 . Exterior Soffit Board Face Panels: ASTM C 931, Type X
gypsum core, 5/8 inch thick.
3 . Gypsum Base Panels: ASTM C 442, Type "X", 5/8 inch '
thick.
4. Glass Mesh Mortar Unit Panels: 7/16 inches thick, Wonder- wi
Board by O.E.I. Corporation/Modulars, Inc. , or Durock by
United States Gypsum.
5. Moisture resistant gypsum board: ASTM C 630, UBC
Standard No. 47-6 type "X" gypsum core, 5/8 inches thick,
tapered edges.
00
D. Joint Treatment Materials:
1. Gypsum Board Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475, „„
types recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.
2. Gypsum Board Joint Reinforcing: Cross-fibered pin
perforated paper, 2 inches wide.
3 . Glass Mesh Mortar Unit Tape: 2 inches wide, pressure
sensitive adhesive, open mesh fiberglass tape.
E. Metal Trim and Framing Accessories:
1. Square Corner Trim: Galvanized steel, 1 1/4 inch wide.
2 . Edge Trim: Galvanized steel, 7/8 inch exposed face.
3 . Crack Control Joint Trim: One piece zinc, 1 3/4 inch
total width, with 1/4 inch open slot covered with plastic Mi
tape for removal after finishing.
4. Shaft Wall Framing Angels: 24 gage corrosion resistant
steel and 0. 063 inch thick aluminum framing angles
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09260 - 4
ww
furnished or recommended by shaft wall stud manufacturer.
F. Wall, Soffit, and Ceiling Reveal Moldings:
1. Material: Extruded aluminum, ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 alloy
and temper.
2 . Acceptable Reveal Moldings: Plaster and Drywall Moldings
by Fry Reglet, Dura-Trim Drywall Detailing -Trims by MM
Systems Corporation.
ow
G. Panel Adhesives and Fasteners:
1. Panel Adhesives: ASTM C 557.
' 2 . Screws: ASTM C 1002
H. Sound Control Insulation:
1. Type: Mineral fiber or fiberglass insulation blanket,
ASTM C 665, unfaced, 1.5 pcf minimum thickness.
2. Wall Insulation: 3 inches minimum thickness.
3 . Ceiling Insulation: 3 inches minimum thickness.
I. Sealants:
w► 1. Elastomeric Sealant, ES-6: ASTM C 920, Class 25, Grade
NS, Type S, mildew resistant silicone.
2. Acrylic Caulking, CK-1: Acrylic latex or acrylic
terpolymer.
3. Acoustical Caulking, CK-3: ASTM C 919, non hardening
polyisobutylene rubber.
4. Comply with requirements in Section 07900, Joint Sealers
for materials and methods of installation.
J. Prime Coat:
1. Type: Latex base flat sealer.
2. Acceptable Prime Coats: Sheetrock First Coat by U.S.
Gypsum Company, gypsum primer by Beadex Manufacturing
Company, Inc.
PART 3 EXECUTION
rr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09260 - 5
3. 1 PERFORMANCE
A. Protection:
err
1. Provide temporary covering to eliminate splattering of
joint compound and prime coat on adjacent finished
surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Coordinate partition framing and ceiling suspension wire ur
locations with plumbing, fire sprinkler, heating,
ventilating, communications, and electrical work.
urs
2 . Adjust framing locations, where required to align new
finish flush with existing finish.
3 .2 REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION OF FRAMING SYSTEMS 6i
A. Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of studs, runners,
and furring channels.
B. Space framing and fasteners as required to meet allowable
deflection and fire rating requirements, give support for
covering material, and as indicated on Drawings.
C. Comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Building Code
requirements for fire rated assemblies.
D. Install 20 gage C-studs at walls which support handrail
brackets,grab bars, mechanical equipment, electrical
equipment, and fire extinguisher and stand pipe
cabinets mounted on stud partitions.
E. Install 20 gage C-studs in framed walls with glass mesh
mortar unit panels as a substrate for bathtub/shower units.
F. Install blocking as required for equipment and components
shown on the drawings.
3 .3 INSTALLATION OF FRAMED OPENINGS
A. Coordinate opening requirements for fire extinguisher
cabinets, toilet accessories, pipes, conduits, ducts, light
fixtures, electrical boxes, and other items concealed within
framing space.
B. Install framing members around items shown to be recessed
within framing space.
C. Install steel cold-rolled channels above and below wall
openings which interrupt stud framing members and extend
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09260 - 6
11
rr
W the channels to 4 feet beyond each jamb, to transfer loads
to the adjacent studs.
D. Install two boxed 25 gage or two 20 gage C-studs at door
jambs and comply with recommendations in Gypsum Association,
GA-219.
3 .4 INSTALLATION OF SOUND CONTROL INSULATION
A. Where sound control insulation is indicated, fill boxed studs
and header beams with insulation equal to adjacent wall
insulation.
B. See Drawings for locations of sound control walls and
ceilings.
C. Install sound control insulation between studs of interior
sound control walls.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF BLOCKING
rr
A. Install 14 gage continuous steel plate blocking or 1 1/2 inch
wide nested cold rolled channel blocking and anchor to steel
studs for structural support for toilet compartments, grab
bars, and handrails.
3 . 6 INSTALLATION OF CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install main runners at 48 inches on center with hanger wire
at not more than 48 inches on center along runners.
B. Wrap hanger wire at least 3 full turns.
C. Connect cross members to main runners and space at not more
w" than 24 inches to center.
D. Place additional cross members 8 inches from ends of gypsum
*W board panels and adjacent to recessed light fixtures.
E. Install wall angle or channel where ceiling meets vertical
surfaces.
F. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for member
and fastener spacing.
G. Comply with requirements in ASTM C 754 .
H. Install diagonal bracing and compression posts to resist
seismic loads.
3 .7 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR GYPSUM PANELS
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09260 - 7
`rr
A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and Gypsum Association Specifications
GA-216.
B. Install panels in thickness indicated and as required to meet y
structural and fire rating requirements.
C. Screw gypsum board to supports as recommended by
manufacturer.
D. For vertical partition gypsum board installation, offset
joints on opposite sides of stud framing. err
E. Saw cut small penetration openings in gypsum panels for
penetrations of conduit, pipe, electrical panels, and
fixtures by a method which will not fracture the core or
tear the face paper.
F. Install gypsum panels with ends and edges over framing
members.
G. Stagger gypsum panel end joints. do
3 .8 INSTALLATION OF FACE AND BACKING PANELS
A. Install gypsum base panels as a substrate for face panels
where two layers are required or indicated.
B. Install wall panels to within 1/4 inch of floor.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF JOINT MATERIALS
A. Install corner beads at external corners.
B. Install casting bead at exposed edges.
C. Install expansion joints where required by site conditions
and as indicated in ASTM C 840.
D. Install acrylic caulking, CK-1 where required to fill exposed
openings.
E. Install acoustical caulking, CK-3 at edges and penetrations
of gypsum board surface in sound control walls and ceiling.
F. Install elastomeric sealant, ES-6 at exposed sealant joints
with movement greater than 5 percent of joint width.
3. 10 FINISHING EXPOSED GYPSUM BOARD IN FINISHED AREAS
A. Apply joint tape and compound at joints between gypsum
boards.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09260 - 8
wr
B. Apply compound at accessory flanges, penetrations; faster
heads, and surface defects.
C. Install compound in three coats, sand after last two coats.
D. Do not damage paper face of gypsum panels during sanding of
joint compound.
aw
E. Wipe gypsum surfaces with a wet -sponge after- final sanding.
No F. Leave gypsum board joints and surface smooth for field
finishing.
3. 11 FINISHING EXPOSED BOARD IN UNFINISHED AREAS
wr
A. Apply joint tape and compound at joints between boards.
.r. 3 . 12 PRIME COAT FINISHING
A. Spray, brush, or roller apply one coat of prime coat on
exposed gypsum surfaces at 300 to 500 square feet per
gallon as recommended by manufacturer.
3 . 13 COMPLETION
rr
A. Adjusting Defective Work:
w. 1. Replace defective wall and ceiling framing members.
2 . Relocate hanger wire, cross tees, and main runners to
allow for installation of fire sprinkler, mechanical,
and electrical equipment.
3 . Patch defective gypsum surfaces.
aw
4. Adjust ceiling height to meet maximum deflection limits
of L/360.
rW
B. Daily Cleaning:
1. Remove gypsum dust from adjacent surfaces.
2 . Remove excess joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
3 . Remove wall and ceiling prime coat overspray from
adjacent surfaces.
1 60 C. Final Cleaning:
1. Remove excess materials from the site.
3 . 14 Tolerances
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09260 - 9
urs
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True
Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
vi
END OF SECTION im
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09260 - 10
4A
ow
• SECTION 09511
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
"M PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 WORK INCLUDED
am
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B. Acoustical lay-in tile. (2 ' x 2 ' )
C. Non-fire rated assembly.
D. Perimeter trim.
1. 02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
r■
Not Used
Aw 1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum wall and ceiling
systems.
;w
B. Section 15300: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.
ow C. Section 15870: Air diffusion devices.
D. Section 16500: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
C. ASTM A651 - Specification for zinc-Coated (galvanized)
carbon steel wire.
ow D. International Conference of Building Officials - UBC
Standard No. 47-18: Metal suspension systems for
acoustical tile and for lay-in panel ceilings.
yr
1. 05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Not Used
rw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09511 - 1
1. 06 QUALITY ASSURANCE +
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of
ceiling suspension system and ceiling tile panels withy
three (3) years minimum experience.
B. Installer: Company with three (3) years minimum
documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 4i
1. 07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable UBC and other governing codes for
combustibility requirements for materials.
1. 08 SUBMITTALS
A. Indicate on shop drawings, grid layout and related
dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling
finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical
items related to system, etc.
1. Indicate hanger wire spacing, diagonal seismic
bracing, dimensions from perimeter wall to ceiling
grid framing, and penetration details for light
fixtures, columns, and air diffusers.
2 . Indicate allowable loads carried by hanger wire,
main runners, tees, wall angels, and diagonal
bracing.
B. Provide product data on metal grid system components,
acoustic units, and accessories.
C. Submit two (2) samples full size, illustrating material
and finish of acoustic units. '
D. Submit two (2) samples each, 24 inches long, of
suspension system main runner, cross runner and edge +rt
trim.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1. 09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and
humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after
installation.
1. 10 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is
enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09511 - 2
lot
,r„ activities have terminated, and overhead work is
completed, tested, and approved.
B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior
wet work is dry.
1. 11 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish additional acoustical tide and panels--equal to 5%
of total installed.
ww
1. 12 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory agency requirements: Provide concealed
' " structural supporting members for ceiling suspension
system to resist seismic loads as required by local
building officials and U.B.C. Standard 47-18, Part III.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Chicago Metallic Corp. ; 312-653-4600.
B. Donn Corp. ; 216-871-1000.
C. National Rolling Mills, Inc. ; 215-644-6700.
D. Roblin Building Products; 716-825-6650.
E. Or approved equal.
2 :02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate, non-fire rated exposed T;
components die cut and interlocking.
B. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge
moldings, hold down clips, etc. required for suspended
grid system.
C. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel.
+� D. Grid Finish: White.
E. Support Channels and Hangers: Primed steel; size and
type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic
ceiling system including integral mechanical and
electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09511 - 3
w
2. 03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTIC UNITS a
A. Armstrong - Non Directional Fissured
Ni
B. USG or equal manufactures - Style "F" Fissured 136-SL
Shadow Line - Acustone Type.
2 . 04 ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS
A. Acoustic Panels:
1. Size: 24 x 24 inches.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inches.
3. Composition: Mineral.
4. Light Reflectance: .75 percent.
5. NRC Range: .55 to .85
6. STC Range: 35 to 44
7. Edge: Tegular.
8. Surface Color: White.
9. Surface Finish: Random Fissured only.
10. Flame spread (ASTHMA) 25 or under.
2 . 05 ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturer's Standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION w
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive
work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with
other work.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION mi
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09511 - 4
I
am
ww 3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636,
manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this
Section.
B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a
aw deflection of 1/360 maximum.
C. Comply with UBC 47-18.
r.
D. Install after major above ceiling work is complete.
Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
*W E. Supply hangers or inserts for installation with
instructions for their correct placement. If metal deck
is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate the
Aw installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection.
Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. Wrap
hanger wire at least three (3) full turns.
F. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes
and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid
w�
visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular
spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected
hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra
distance.
H. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.
I. Do not support components on main runners or cross
runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed
%Wdeflection capability. Support fixture loads by
supplementary hangers support components independently.
so J. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of
runners.
ow K. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and
vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths.
Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with
other interruptions.
L. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or
other defects detrimental to appearance and function.
M. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern
parallel to longest room axis. Fit border neatly against
abutting surfaces.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09511 - 5
..
aw
N. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free +wr
from twist, warp and dents.
O. Seismic Support: Install diagonal bracing for suspended
ceiling system as required to meet lateral loads of the
ceiling during seismic activity as required by latest UBC
Standard 47-18 - part III.
P. Trapeze Suspension: Where required or necessary, - locate
hanger wire around mechanical, plumbing, fire sprinkler,
and electrical equipment with trapeze suspension system.
Q. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid
system within 20 ft of an exterior door.
R. Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board
above light fixtures in accordance with UL assembly
requirements for fire rated areas. +
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10
ft.
B. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric
Loads: Two (2) degrees maximum.
3 . 04 CLEANING OF ACOUSTICAL CEILING GRID wry
A. Clean exposed ceiling suspension members prior to
installation of ceiling panels.
3. 05 ADJUSTING DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Remove and replace panels improperly placed, broken, and is
damaged prior to Substantial Completion as directed by
the Architect.
3. 04 SCHEDULE
A. See Reflected Ceiling plan.
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09511 - 6
4i
rrr
A' SECTION 09688
CARPET-GLUE DOWN & RUBBER BASE
am
PART 1 GENERAL
*W 1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpeting glue down method.
wr
B. 4" Rubber Base.
wr
C. Accessories.
1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS
aw A. Section 03001 : Concrete.
o, 1 .03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering
Aw Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
w
C. FS DDD-C-95 - Carpets and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic,
Modacrylic.
D. FS DDD-C-0095 - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic,
Modacrylic, Polyester, Polypropylene.
E. FS DDD-C-1559 - Carpet, Loop, Low Pile Height, High
Density, Woven or Tufted with Attached Cushioning.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data (include fire
testing) .
B. On Shop drawings indicate seaming plan, method of joining
seams, direction of carpet, and joints to dissimilar
materials.
C. Provide product data on specified products, describing
physical and performance characteristics; sizes,
patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D. Submit one (1 ) sample 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating
color and pattern for each carpet material specified.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09688 - 1
E. Submit manufacturers installation instructions.
1 .05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance
materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning and
shampooing.
1 .06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer.: Company specializing in woven carpet with
three (3) years minimum experience.
B. Installer: Company with three (3) years minimum
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1 .07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable governing code for carpet
flammability requirements in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Conform to ANSI/ASTM E648.
1 . 08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in
area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature three
days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of
materials.
1 .09 EXTRA MATERIALS ift
Furnish additional carpet equal to 5% of total installed
for each color and pattern on job. +w�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
Mohawk Carpet "Supertron Topnotch" or architect approved
equal - from one dye lot.
2.02 MATERIALS
Construction: Woven Interlock
Pile Height: 0. 199 inch (approx. )
Stitches/inch: 9
Face Yarn: 100% Antron III yarn dyed
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09688 - 2
continuous filament nylon
with build-in static control
Face Yarn Weight: 30.oz. per sq. yd.
Weight Density: 162, 814
Primary Back: Synthetic
Flammability: Radient Panel (E-648) Class 1 -
Exceeds . 45/CM2 (direct glue
method)
Smoke Density: NBS SrKoke Chamber (E-662) ;Less
than 450
Static Propensity: AATC - 134 under 2.0 KV
Row Width: 12 feet
Color: Per Architect
2. 03 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by
carpet manufacturer.
B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended
by carpet manufacturer.
2 .04 MATERIALS - BASE
A. Base: FS SS-W-40, Type I rubber coved:
1 . Height: 4 inch (100 mm)
2. Thickness: 1 /8 inch (3 thick)
3. Length: 4 foot ( 1 . 2 m) sections. Roll.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Flexco Style:
b. Azrock Style:
c. Mercer Style:
2 .05 ACCESSORIES
w.
A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by
adhesive material manufacturer.
.w
B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by
flooring manufacturer.
`" C. Edge Strips: Metal.
D. Cant Strip: Metal.
bw
E. Sealer and Wax: types recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
im
PART 3 EXECUTION
"" 3 .01 EXAMINATION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09688 - 3
ow
ow
40
A. Verify that .substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with 4'
maximum variation of 1 /8 inch' in 10"ft and are ready to
receive work.
B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture
content of 7 percent; and exhibit negative alkalinity,
carbonization, or dusting.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
substrate and site conditions.
3. 02 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, ,,;
0 I
cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor
filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat,
hard surface.
C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. i
D. Vacuum floor surface.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with
manufacturers' instructions.
B. Lay out rolls of carpet for approval.
C. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern
match. Make cuts straight, true, and unf rayed. Edge
seam carpet at all areas.
D. Locate seams in area of least traffic. ►
E. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps.
F. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction
as anticipated traffic.
G. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is
continuous through a wall .opening :. into another room.
Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under
door centerline. Id
H. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions.
rr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09688 - 4
ON
MW I. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces
without gaps.
AW 3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall
surfaces without damage.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after
�Wr
installation.
+M.
END OF SECTION
AW
WIWp
*W
.W.
iWr
*W
Wo
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09688 — 5
4Wr
rW.
�rw
+� SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES EXTERIOR PAINTING
A. Primed steel.-
B.
teel:B. Galvanized steel.
C. Equipment not factory finished.
1. 02 SECTION INCLUDES INTERIOR PAINTING
A. Gypsum board.
6W
B. Concrete floors.
0.0 C. Primed steel.
D. Trim, rails, etc.
E. Plumbing, HVAC, and electrical exposed piping and ducts
and equipment not factory finished.
�,. 1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Division 5: Shop Priming of Steel by Fabricator
*W B. Divisions 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16: Shop Priming
and Finishing of Equipment and Systems by Fabricator.
+w 1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint,
,,w Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products.
B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
1. 05 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used
in this Section.
1. 06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
ow
A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in
manufacturing quality paint and finish products with
three (3) years experience.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09900 - 1
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting +
and finishing with three (3) years documented experience.
approved by product manufacturer.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating
requirements for finishes. '
1.08 COLOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Match colors indicated on Room Color Schedule at end of
this Section.
wig
1. 09 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data on all finishing products including
manufacturer min. dry film thickness for each coat
system.
B. Submit two (2) samples 8 x 8 inch in size illustrating
range of colors and textures available for each surface
finishing product scheduled (for selection by Architect) .
C. Obtain written approval of coatings from Architect prior 4A
to ordering.
1. 09 FIELD SAMPLES
A. On actual building components, duplicate finishes on
acceptable office samples.
B. Provide wall, soffit, and ceiling colors and finishes on
100 sq. ft. of in-place surfaces.
C. Provide column, trim, and equipment colors and finishes
on 10 lineal feet of in-place surfaces.
D. Architect will review for color, texture and sheen only.
E. Acceptable samples may be incorporated in the work.
F. Finished surfaces will be evaluated in comparison to
acceptable field samples.
1. 10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labelled
containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
B. Container labelling to include manufacturer's name, type
of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09900 - 2
irr►
+r• preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
vw
C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of
45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F in well
ventilated area, unless required otherwise by
manufacturer's instructions.
E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire -hazards and
spontaneous combustion.
1. 11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to
maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45
degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after
application of finishes, unless required otherwise by
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or
when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer' s instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45
degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior;
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
... D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes:
65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured
mid-height at substrate surface.
ow 1. 12 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide a one gallon container of each top color and
,ow surface texture to Owner in unopened containers properly
marked.
`" B. Label each container with color, texture, room locations,
in addition to the manufacturer's label.
1. 13 SURFACE CONDITIONS
rr
A. Do not paint over dirt, rust, blistered paint, grease,
wet substrates, or surface conditions detrimental to
„w formation of a durable paint film.
an
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09900 - 3
«w
a..
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PAINT, VARNISH, BLOCK FILLERS,
ETC. 4
A. Miller Paint and Wallpaper Co. , Inc. ; Portland, OR
503-233-4491
B. Fuller-O'Brien; South San Francisco, CA, 415-761=2300
C. Glidden Coatings & Resins Division, SCM Corp.
D. Rodda Paint Co. ; Portland, OR 503-245-0788 &
503-244-7512
E. PPG Industries, Inc. Coatings & Resins Division;
Pittsburgh, PA 412-434-3131.
VA
F. Ameritone Paint and Wallcovering.
G. Sherwin Williams Co. Professional Coatings Division,
800-321-8194.
2. 02 SEALER MANUFACTURERS
A. ProSoCo, Inc. ; Kansas City, KS, 913-281-2700
B. Thoro System Products; Miami, FL, 305-592-2081
C. Or approved equal.
wry
2. 03 MATERIALS
A. Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste
consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of
drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine,
paint thinners and other materials not specifically
indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified,
of commercial quality.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE PAINTS
A. Products by manufacturers listed may be used when +
approved by the Architect in writing.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09900 - 4
66
*W 2.05 EXTERIOR PRIMERS, SEALERS AND UNDERCOATS
A. Latex Primer: Miller - Product 6040, Fuller-O'Brien,
up Rodda, Ameritone, Sherwin Williams.
B. Alkyd Steel Primer: Miller - Product 468, Fuller
O'Brien, Rodda, Ameritone, Sherwin Williams.
C. Galvanized Metal Primer: - Miller - Product 484 , Fuller
O'Brien, Rodda, Ameriton, Sherwin Williams.
2.06 EXTERIOR OPAQUE PAINTS
A. Alkyd Semigloss Exterior Enamel: Miller - Product 6750,
Fuller-O'Brien, Rodda, Ameritone, Sherwin Williams.
B. 100% Acrylic Latex Semigloss Exterior Enamel: Miller -
Product 7054, Rodda, Ameritone, Sherwin Williams, Fuller
O'Brien.
C. Epoxy Gloss Enamel: Miller - Product 110.
2.07 INTERIOR PRIMERS, SEALERS AND UNDERCOATS
A. Alkyd Steel Primer: Miller - Product 4681
Fuller-O'Brien, Rodda, Ameritone, Sherwin Williams.
w. B. Latex Gypsum Primer: Miller - Product 1540, Rodda,
Ameritone, Sherwin Williams, Fuller O-Brien.
2. 08 INTERIOR OPAQUE PAINTS
A. Alkyd Semigloss Enamel: Miller - Product 6750,
Fuller-O'Brien, Rodda, Ameritone, Sherwin Williams.
B. 100% Acrylic Latex Semigloss Enamel: Miller - Product
2850, Fuller- O'Brien, Rodda, Ameritone, Sherwin
Williams.
2.09 FINISHES
A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish
schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as
instructed by the product manufacturer.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09900 - 5
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to
commencement of work. Report any condition that may
potentially affect proper application.
C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic
moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture
content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Plaster- and Gypsum Wallboard:- 12 percent.
2 . Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in
accordance with ASTM D2016.
3 . Exterior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in to
accordance with ASTM D2016.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
surfaces. to
3. 02 PREPARATION
A. Remove prefinished items hardware or provide surface
applied protection for machined surfaces, finished cover
plates, door hardware, plumbing fixtures, lighting
fixtures, and other prefinished items in place and not
scheduled for field finishing.
B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect
work of this Section.
C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface 4M
finishes.
D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with an
solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with
clean water and allow surface to dry.
E. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot iii►
prime defects after repair.
F. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and 40
oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching
primer.
G. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove
loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up
patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent.
Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including
shop primed items.
H. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off
dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09900 - 6
Int
aw
4W streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes
and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats.
aw I. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and
bottom edges with primer.
J. Cover and protect finished metal including anodized
aluminum.
K. Cover and protect moving parts of operating units and
equipment identification, including wiring diagrams,
performance ratings, name plates, and code-required
labels.
L. Remove protective covers and reinstall removed items
after finishing adjacent surfaces.
A+ 3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section
4W from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this
Section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to
prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other
�•�• surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
ww
3 . 04 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with coating manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not below
moisture maximums indicated in Item 3 . 01 C.
C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
ow D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding
coat unless otherwise approved.
E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match
wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe
excess from surface.
low
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09900 - 7
H. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork
with primer paint.
I. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to
receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish
reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
J. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers where '
required.
K. Where recommended by manufacturer, sand lightly between
succeeding coats.
L. Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate, to provide a total dry film
thickness of not less than amount recommended by coating
manufacturer.
M. Match approved office and field samples for color,
texture and sheen.
N. Paint exposed surfaces behind movable equipment and
furniture same as adjacent surfaces.
O. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
3 .05 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 66
A. Paint interior surfaces of ducts where visible through
registers or grilles, flat black. Paint all ducts,
pipes, conduits, light pendants, etc. (exposed surfaces) .
Also etch galvanized units prior to painting.
B. Except where accent colors are scheduled, paint
mechanical and electrical work in finished areas
including exposed ducts, piping, conduit, louvers, and
grilles to match adjacent surfaces, except when factory
finished to color matching adjacent surfaces or where
accent colors are scheduled.
3 . 06 CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled,
splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of
unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus
materials, and debris.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09900 - 8
wrr
+ • C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may
constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
containers and remove daily from site.
D. Daily: Remove paint splatters from high pressurelaminate,
resilient flooring, anodized aluminum, glass, and similar
finished surfaces.
3. 07 SCHEDULE - SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Section 08111
3 . 08 CORRECTING DEFECTIVE SURFACES
A. Remove finish and repaint surfaces not in compliance with
specified requirements until finished surface meets
specified requirements.
B. Repaint work not meeting minimum dry film thickness.
C. Repaint lines between accent colors as directed by
Architect to obtain clean straight lines.
3 . 09 CORRECTING DAMAGED SURFACES
A. Correct painting related damage to exposed surfaces by
cleaning, repairing, replacing and refinishing as
directed by Architect.
o„ B. Touch up factory finished surfaces damaged during
construction
3. 10 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
Im
A. Exterior Coated System
1. One coat latex primer.
ow 2. Two coats 100% acrylic latex enamel semi-gloss.
B. Steel - Galvanized
1. One coat zinc chromate primer.
2 . Two coats alkyd enamel semi-gloss.
C. Shop Primed Steel
1. Shop coat (by fabricator) : Alkyd steel primer.
2 . First coat: Alkyd steel primer touch-up.
3 . Second and third coat: Alkyd semigloss exterior.
wr
3 . 11 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES
A. Wood - Painted
ow 1. One coat alkyd prime sealer.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09900 - 9
+r•
2 . Two coats latex enamel, semi-gloss.
B. Wood - Transparent
1. Filler coat (for open grained wood only) .
2 . Two coats stain.
3 . One coat sealer.
C. Steel - Galvanized
1. One coat -zinc chromate- primer.
2. Two coats alkyd enamel, gloss.
D. Plaster, Gypsum Board
1. One coat latex gypsum primer sealer.
2 . Two coats alkyd latex flat.
E. Steel, Nongalvanized -
1. First coat: Alkyd steel primer.
2 . Second and Third coat: Alkyd semigloss enamel.
F. Steel (stair interior rails)
1. Epoxy enamel primer (shop) . +
2 . Two coats epoxy high gloss enamel.
3. 12 SCHEDULE - COLORS Verify all with Architect.
A. Finished work to be free of all dust, debris or damage
resulting from any activity under this Specification.
B. All moving parts to be left in proper working order.
C. Remove or correct any defects resulting from the activity to
of the Painting Contractor or his employees.
D. Damages resulting from painting activity to be repaired
by the Painting Contractor at his own expense.
E. Paint exposed mechanical piping, ducts, electrical
devices in accepted OSHA required colors prior to label
applications.
F. Upon Completion, the Painting Contractor shall remove +r
from the building all materials and debris created by his
and leave his part of the work in a clean and finished
condition acceptable to the Architect.
END OF SECTION
i
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 09900 - 10
*W
`W SECTION 12512
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES
irr
A. Horizontal slat louver blinds; -
B.
linds: -B. Operating hardware.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
+rw Not used.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
rr
A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wall opening head
support blocking.
qw
1.4 ALLOWANCES
Not used.
w
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
am A. Horizontal slat louver blinds installed at window openings;
manual control of raising and lowering by cord for full range
locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand.
aw 1. 6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and
dimensional characteristics, and operating features.
ow
C. Samples: Submit three samples, 6 inch long illustrating slat
materials and finish, color, type and color.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the
Products specified in this section with minimum three years
experience.
1.8 MOCKUP
A. Provide mockup of louver blind assembly under provisions of
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 12512 - 1
Yw
Section 01400.
B. Provide one mockup of one blind assembly with operable
hardware and accessories.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Acceptable mockup may remain as part of the Work. '
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
4
A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the
manufacturer.
to
1. 10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. 46
B. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of
concealed blocking to support blinds.
06
1. 11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide under provisions of Section 01700. p
B. Provide ten additional slats of each size.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS +
A. Del Mar Window Coverings.
B. Graber Company.
C. Hunter Douglas, Inc.
D. Levolor Lorentzen, Inc.
E. Marathon Carey-McFall Company
F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Metal Slats:
1. 1 inch wide; spring tempered pre-finished aluminum
horizontal slats, radiused slat corners, with
manufacturing burrs removed.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 12512 - 2
+rs
WW 2. Type S-300 Bali by Marathon, or Riviera by Levolor.
B. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene or braided polyester,
Aw ladder configuration.
C. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box; internally
ow fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation.
D. Cord and Wand: Manufacturer's- standard.
Am E. Head Support Bracket: Overhead head rail attachment.
F. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.
Aw 2.3 FINISHES
Aw
A. Blind Slat and Head Rail Housing: color as selected.
B. Cord, Control Wand: color as selected.
14W 2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate blinds to fit openings with uniform edge clearance
of 1/4 inch maximum.
aw
PART 3 EXECUTION
ftw
3 . 1 EXAMINATION
aw A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work.
B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed.
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Secure in place with flush countersunk, concealed fasteners.
C. Space intermediate head supports as recommended by
manufacturer for size of blind installed.
3 .3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4
inch.
B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch.
aw 3 .4 ADJUSTING
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 12512 - 3
rw
0..
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
3 .5 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.
3. 6 SCHEDULE
A. Install blinds at all interior relites on office and all
exterior windows
END SECTION
fit
VA
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 12512 - 4
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
y
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Materials and Methods specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections,in addition to Division
,4 1 -General Requirements.
k=
to B. The General Conditions and General Requirements(Division 1)apply to this Division 15 of this
work.
C. Identification.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide complete and fully operational systems with facilities and services to meet requirements
indicated and in accord with applicable codes,rules,regulations,and ordinances.
B. The Contract Documents include drawings and specifications which are to be interpreted in
conjunction with each other. In case of conflicts,the quality deemed best by the owners
representative will govern. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all offsets in piping or
ilrr the exact location of piping,ducts,etc. The drawings do not necessarily show all the minute details
of the work. Contractor shall provide any other component or related system whether or not listed
which is part of the overall design and basic equipment and deemed necessary for its completion and
thoroughness.
t
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Plumbing: Conform to Uniform Plumbing Code,Uniform Building Code and Governing
Authorities.
B. Mechanical: Conform to Uniform Mechanical Code,Uniform Building Code and Governing
Authorities.
C. Obtain and pay for all required permits,and inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
wr A. Submit under provisions of Section 01001.
B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems,
Products,and accessories in a single submittal. Each bound shop drawings and product data shall
be indexed as follows:
1. Plumbing.
2. HVAC.
3. --Fire-Protection.
C. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
�w
A
p
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15050- 1
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
D. Proposed Products List:Include Products specified to indicate the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and address.
2. Catalog designation or model number.
3. Equipment Schedule Number.
4. Rough-in data and dimensions.
5. Performance curves and rated capacities.
6. Motor characteristics and wiring diagrams.
7. Operation characteristics.
8. Airborne noise levels.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASME-American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
B. ANSI-American National Standards Institute.
C. ASTM-American Society for Testing and Materials.
D. UL-Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.
E. UBC-Uniform Building Code.
F. UMC-Uniform Mechanical Code.
G. UPC-Uniform Plumbing Code.
H. ACI-American Concrete Institute.
I. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association.
J. NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturer's Association.
K. ASHRAE-American Society of Heating,Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
L. UFC-Uniform Fire Code.
M. SMACNA-Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors.
N. NBS-National Bureau of Standards.
O. AGA-American Gas Association.
1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. In addition to Division 1 -General Requirements,the following work shall apply.
B. As installed drawings: Maintain a set of black line prints of the building plans for the duration of
the contract and mark a Record of the work as installation progresses. Dimensions shall be
referenced from Visible Building structural features such as bearing walls or columns.
C. Include one set of reproducible copies,with documents required at Completion Requirements,
covering the following work:
1. Controls and operating control sequences.
2. Piping of all kinds plus a complete valve chart showing all water,gas,air,and heating valves.
Provide valve chart with no duplicate numbers. Mount chart in Janitors closet and as directed
by Architect.
1.07 VISITING THE PREMISES
A. The contractor before submitting a bid on the work must visit the site and become familiar with all
visible existing conditions. As a result of having visited the premises,the contractor shall be
responsible for the installation of the work as it relates to such visible existing conditions.
B. The submission of a bid will be considered an acknowledgment on the part of the bidder of their
visitation to the site.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15050-2
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
1.08 WARRANTY
A. All new equipment,apparatus and work shall be free from all defects,shall be fabricated,built and
installed to deliver its full rated capacity and efficiency for which it was specifically designed.
L
B. Without additional charge,replace any work or new material which develops defects,except from
abuse,within one year from owner acceptance.
�r
1.09 SAFETY
A. The contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site,including
safety of all persons and property during performance at the work.
B. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours.
1�►
1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Do all necessary cutting and patching of existing building and yard surfaces required as directed by
the architect for completion of the mechanical work.
B. Do not cut structural portion without Architect's approval. Approval must be in writing.
C. When masonry construction must be penetrated,furnish and install a steel pipe sleeve in opening
and grout in place in a neat manner. Leave grout surface to match exiting finish.
D. Prior to cutting any existing work,locate all concealed utilities to eliminate any possible service
interruption or damage.
E. Patch to match finish and color of adjacent surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
A. Anything mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings,or visa versa,shall be of
like effect as if shown or mentioned in both.
2.02 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
h A. The contract shall be based upon furnishing all materials and equipment as new,of the best grade,
and the latest products as listed in printed catalog data.
B. All articles of a kind shall be standard product of a single manufacturer.
2.03 MAGNETIC STARTERS
A. Surface mounted magnetic starter with reset button,hand-off-auto switch in cover,and shall have
v'w thermal overload protective devices on all"line"legs. Size all overload heaters as recommended by
motor or equipment manufacturer for service and location. Provide"hand-off-auto"switch at each
starter for units controlled by time clocks,by-pass timers,wall switches,etc.
LO
1. Provide auxiliary dry contact,one N.O.and one N.C.
'krr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15050-3
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
2. For 208(480,240)volt single and three phase starters provide control transformer with
secondary circuit fusing 208(480,240)volt single phase to 120 volt secondary control voltage.
3. For 120 volt starter provide control from 120 volt circuit supply controlled device.
2.04 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish under this Division as specified in another Division of work.
B. Furnish 18 X 18-inch panels for ceilings and for access to equipment in soffits and shafts,and 12"
X 12"for walls unless indicated otherwise.
C. Furnish where indicated and where required to access valves,fire dampers,trap primers,shock
arresters,and other appurtenances requiring operation,service or maintenance. Review locations
with the Architect prior to installation.
2.05 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Interior Wall Sleeves: 12 gauge galvanized steel,flush with wall on both sides.
B. Interior Floor Sleeves: 12 gauge galvanized steel and entend 2-inches above finished floor.
C. Exterior Wall Sleeves: Cast iron,flush with wall on both sides.
D. On Grade Floor Sleeves: Same as exterior wall sleeves.
2.06 FLOOR,WALL AND CEILING PLATES
A. Furnish stamped split type plates as follows:
1. Floor Plates: Cast brass,chromium plated.
2. Well and Ceiling Plates: Spun Aluminum. #.
2.07 MACHINERY GUARDS
A. Furnish guards for protection on all rotating and moving parts of equipment. Provide guards for all
metal fan drives and motor pulleys,regardless of being enclosed in a metal cabinet.
B. Design guards so as not to restrict air flow at fan inlets resulting in reduced capacity.
C. Provide shaft holes in guards for easy use of tachometers at pulley centers. Guards shall be easily
removable for pulley adjustment or removal and changing of belts.
D. All guards shall meet OSHA requirements including back plates.
u
i
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15050-4
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.08 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Valve Tags
Lo
1. General: Identify valves with metal or fiber tags,legends to be stamped or embossed. It shall
indicate the function of the valve and its normal operating position;i.e.,
56 HW (Number and Content of Pipe)
Isolation (Valve Function)
NO (Normally Open Position)
4 2. Size: Valves and cocks 2-inches and smaller to have metal or fiber tags 1-1/2 X 3 with 1/8-
inch high letters. Those above 2-inches to have metal or fiber tags 3 X 5 with 1/4-inch high
letters.
B. Valve Tag Directory: Include tag number,location,exposed or concealed,service,valve size,valve
manufacturer,valve model number,tag material,and normal operating position of valve.
2.09 PIPING MARKERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: W.H.Brady, Seton.
B. Pipes shall be labeled with all vinyl,self-sticking labels or letters. For pipe covering sizes up to and
including 3/4-inch outside diameter,select labels with 1/2-inch letters. For sizes from 3/4 to 2-inch
outside diameter,3/4-inch letters;above 2-inches outside diameter,2-inch letters. The pipe markers
Y
shall be identified and color coded as follows with black directional arrows.
SERVICE PIPE MARKER BACKGROUND COLOR
LO Cold Water *"Domestic Cold Water" Green
Hot Water *"Domestic Hot Water Supply" Yellow
Domestic Hot Water Return *"Domestic Hot Water Return" Yellow
err
Sprinkler Water "Fire Protection Water" Red
Sanitary Waste "Sanitary Waste" Green
Storm Drain "Storm Drain" Green
Overflow Drain "Overflow Drain" Green
Vent "Vent" Green
*Directional arrow applied adjacent to pipe marker indicating direction of flow.
2.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates
1. Tag all pumps,air supply units,fans,converters,and miscellaneous items of mechanical
r equipment with engraved nameplates. Nameplates shall be 1/166-inch thick,3 X 5 laminated
__....3-plyplastic,-center-.ply white,outer ply black. Form-letters by exposing center ply.
2. Identify unit with code number as shown on Drawings and area served.
B. Equipment Nameplate Directory: List pumps,air handlers,terminal units,and other equipment
nameplates. Include Owner and Contractor furnished equipment. List nameplates designation,
manufacturer's model number,location of equipment,area served or function, disconnect location,
and normal position of HOA switch.
k
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15050-5
rr.
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.11 DOUBLE DEFLECTION NEOPRENE
A. Double deflection neoprene mountings with minimum actual static deflection for equipment
supported of 0.35 inches.
B. Friction pad both top and bottom.
C. Steel rails used above those mountings of equipment with overhang.
D. Manufacturer: Mason type ND or rail type DNR,similar Amber-Booth type RVD, Consolidated
Kinetics.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. `*
B. Identify valves,piping,and equipment components of each mechanical system to indicate their
function and system served.
1. Mechanical equipment; Install nameplates with adhesive.
2. Valves; Install tags with corrosion resistant metal chain.
3. Pipe Markers,apply to piping as follows:
a. Where pipe passes through a wall.
b. On each riser.
C. On each leg of a tee.
d. Every 50 feet along continuous lines.
C. Within 12 inches of all valves.
3.02 ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Mechanical Equipment Wiring and Connections:Unless otherwise indicated on the electrical
drawings,all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished,set in place,and wired
in accordance with the following schedule. Carefully coordinate all work with reference to Division
16 for motor characteristics and motor controls.
Item Furnished By Set in Place By Wired Power Wired Control
Magnetic Motor Starters: Div. 15 Div. 16 Div. 16 Div. 15
Automatically controlled with or
without HOA switches
Disconnect switches, Div. 16 Div. 16 Div. 16 ----
manual operating
switches
Thermal overload Div.16 Diva 16 Div.16 -
switches
B. Control relays,transformers,time clocks,remote bulb thermostats,motor valves,float controls,etc.
which are an integral part of mechanical equipment,or directly attached to ducts,pipes,etc. shall be
furnished and installed as a Division 15 item.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15050-6
s SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
3.03 TESTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling,obtaining permits, making payments of all fees
and/or services to test the mechanical systems as specified and as required by local authorities.
1. A minimum 48-hour notice shall be given to the owners representative before scheduling a
test.
2. Any deficiencies which appear during testing shall be corrected before progressing further. No
piping,equipment or other portions of the mechanical installation shall be covered or
concealed until all required tests are satisfactorily completed.
3. Upon completion,a written certification shall be furnished to attest that the tests have been
duly performed. Include a copy with the required operation and maintenance manuals.
B. An operating test can be requested by the owners representative at any time to demonstrate
satisfactory functioning of any portion or the entire mechanical installation.
C. A final test shall be made by the Contractor at the completion of the project and after the mechanical
system has been in operation for a period of time. Before final acceptance,all defects which appear
shall be corrected.
IIm 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. At least five copies of the Maintenance Manual shall be submitted and shall contain all
manufacturer's data and a complete list of repair and replacement parts necessary for the
maintenance of equipment. All recommended oiling methods,filter changes, gasket replacement,
etc.,shall be identified. In addition,a written step-by-step detail of the start-up and shut-down
procedure shall be incorporated.
B. Provide a separate chapter for each specification section. A table of contents shall be included
indicating page numbers for major items. In each chapter Include operating instructions for each
piece of equipment. Provide a schedule of preventative maintenance indicating frequency of
performance. include all shop drawings,valve tag directory,control drawings,and record drawings.
C. The Maintenance Manual shall be submitted for approval to the owners representative ten(10)days
prior to substantial completion.
3.05 GENERAL COMPLETION
A. All mechanical work is to be governed by all relevant sections of Division 15 even though cross
references may or may not be stated explicitly.
3.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
A. All equipment shall be checked for proper operation and final acceptance.
3.07 -RECORD DRAWINGS
R'
4'
A. Submit record drawings 30 days prior to final completion.
lir+
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15050-7
6W
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
3.08 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
A. Upon completion of the work and adjustment of all equipment,all systems shall be tested by the
contractor to demonstrate to the owner's representative that all equipment furnished and installed or
connected under the provisions of these specifications function mechanically in the manner
required. The contractor will hirnish a mechanic who is completely familiar with all aspects of the
entire HVAC and plumbing systems during the demonstration. At the time of this demonstration,
the contractor shall deliver to the owner's representative bound copies of the approved operation and
maintenance manuals and record drawings.
3.09 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Interior Floor and Wall Sleeves: Large enough in diameter to provide 1/4-inch clearance around
pipe or insulation. Pipe penetrations through mechanical room and fan room floors shall be made
watertight.
B. Sleeves Through Rated Floors and Walls: Calk with fire barrier sealing system approved by
Authority having jurisdiction and Owner's insurance underwriter,with rating equal to floor or wall
penetrated.
C. Exterior Wall Sleeves: Large enough to allow for caulking and made watertight. Caulking shall be
from outside using oakum and lead. Secure sleeves against displacement.
D. On Grade Floor Sleeves: Same as exterior wall sleeves,caulked from inside.
E. Layout: Lay out work in advance of pouring of slabs or construction of wall,and furnish and set
inserts and sleeves necessary to complete the work.
F. Coordination: Cutting or patching required as a result of lack of coordination of this operation shall
not be a change in contract amount.
3.10 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
A. Keep pipe,ductwork and conduit openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent the entrance
of foreign matter. Protect piping,conduit,ductwork,fixtures,equipment and apparatus against dirty
water,chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Restore damaged or
contaminated fixtures,equipment or apparatus to original condition or replace at no cost to the
Owner.
B. Protect bright finished shafts,bearing housings,and similar items until in service. No nest will be
permitted.
C. Cover or otherwise suitably protect equipment and materials stored on the job site.
3.11 ACCESSIBILITY
A. General: Locate valves,thermometers,cleanout fittings and other indicating equipment or
specialties requiring frequent reading,adjustments,inspection,repairs and removal or replacement
conveniently and accessibly with reference to the finished building.
ry.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15050-8
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
3.12 FLOOR,WALL AND CEILING PLATES
A. Install on piping passing through finished walls,floors, ceilings,partitions and plaster furrings.
Plates shall completely cover opening around pipe.
B. Secure wall and ceiling plates to pipe,insulation,or structure.
C. Plates shall not penetrate insulation vapor barriers.
D. Plates not required in mechanical rooms or unfinished spaces.
3.13 PAINTING
A. General: Coordinate painting of mechanical equipment and items with products and methods
specified under Section 09900,Painting.
LB. Finished Areas
1. Insulation: Apply one coat of sealer and one coat of light grey latex paint,except aluminum
foil faced materials. Paint before installing identifying bands.
L 2. Hangers,uninsulated piping,miscellaneous iron work,structural steel stands,uninsulated
tanks,equipment bases: Paint one coat of black enamel.
3. Steel Valve Bodies and Bonnets: One coat of black enamel.
4. Brass Valve Bodies: Not painted.
5. Grilles,Diffusers,Registers: Paint sheet metal and visible ductwork behind grilles,diffusers
and registers flat black.
6. Ductwork: One coat of grey machinery enamel. Prepare galvanized surfaces for paint
retention prior to painting.
C. Concealed Spaces(Above Ceilings,Not Visible)
1. Insulation: Not painted.
2. Hangers,uninsulated piping,miscellaneous iron work,valve bodies and bonnets: Not painted.
D. Exterior Black Steel: Wire brush and apply two coats of rust-inhibiting primer and one coat of grey
exterior machinery enamel.
iiw E. Roof Mounted Equipment: Equipment,other than that furnished with factory finish,to be painted
two coats of exterior machinery enamel. Color as selected by Architect.
3.14 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
A. Applied Locations,Rooftop Mechanical Equipment: Provide neoprene mounting material between
mechanical equipment and roof curb.
L
END OF SECTION
err
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15050-9
w
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
k.
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
L A. Piping insulation,jackets and accessories.
B. Ductwork insulation,jackets,and lining.
e 1.02 SUBMITTALS
LA. Product Data: Provide product description,list of materials and thickness for each service or
equipment scheduled,locations,and manufacturer's installation instructions.
tk
1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,mastics,and
insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
6N
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE INSULATION
A. Manufacturers
1. Schuller.
2. Pittsburgh Corning.
3. Certain Teed.
4. Knauf.
5. Armstrong.
6. 1MCOA.
B. Glass Fiber: ASTM C547;rigid molded, non combustible. Schuller Micro-Lok or equivalent.
1. 'K'('ksi')Value:0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Maximum Flame Spread: 25.
rr 4. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50.
5. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to
aluminized film,secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or with outward
clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
err
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15250- 1
bw
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
C. Jackets f-
1. PVC Plastic: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material,off white color.
a. Thickness: 10 mil.
b. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
2. Canvas Jacket:UL listed fabric,6 oz/sq yd,plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant
lagging adhesive.
3. Aluminum Jacket:0.025 inch thick sheet,smooth finish,with longitudinal slip joints and 2 y;
inch laps,die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
4. Stainless Steel Jacket:Type 304 stainless steel,0.010 inch, smooth finish.
2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Manufacturers
1. Schuller.
2. Pittsburgh Corning.
3. Certain Teed.
4. Knauf.
B. Flexible Glass Fiber:ASTM C612;flexible,non-combustible blanket.
1. 'K'('ksi')Value: 0.29 at 75 degrees F.
2. Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket:Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized
film,secured with pressure sensitive tape.
C. Rigid Glass Fiber: ASTM C612;rigid,non combustible blanket.
1. 'K'('ksi')Value: 0.29 at 75 degrees F.
2. Density: 2.0 lb/cu ft.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket:Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized
film, secured with pressure sensitive tape.
D. Canvas Jacket:UL listed fabric,6 oz/sq yd,plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant
lagging adhesive.
E. Outdoor Jacket: Asphalt impregnated and coated mineral fiber sheet, 50 lb/square.
F. Aluminum Jacket:0.025 inch thick sheet,smooth finish,with longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch
laps.
G. Duct Liner: ASTM C553;flexible,non combustible blanket.
1. 'K'('ksi')Value: ASTM C518,0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft.
3. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 ft/min.
4. Adhesive:Waterproof fire retardant type.
5. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel,self adhesive pad or welded with press on head.
6. Will not support microbial growth in accordance with ASTM C1071, ASTM G21 and G22. J-7
J,
ft.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15250-2
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
k B. Verify that surfaces are clean,foreign material removed,and dry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
F'
k,
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
�w
B. Continue insulation vapor barrier through penetrations.
C. Piping Insulation
1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
2. Neatly finish insulation at supports,protrusions,and interruptions.
3. Provide insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient
temperature with vapor barrier jackets. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.
Insulate complete system.
t 4. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature,provide standard jackets.
r Bevel and seal ends of insulation at equipment,flanges,and unions.
5. Provide insert between support shield and piping on piping 2 inches diameter or larger.
Fabricate of cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for temperature,not less
than 6 inches long.
6. For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces below 10 feet above
finished floor,finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
` 7. For exterior applications,provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate pipe,fittings,joints,and
valves and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum or
stainless steel jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
D. External Ductwork Insulation
1. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature with vapor barrier jacket.
Finish with tape. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier adhesive.
2. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature with or without standard
vapor barrier jacket. Where service access is required,bevel and seal ends of insulation.
3. Continue insulation through walls,sleeves,hangers,and other duct penetrations.
t 4. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where
r necessary to prevent sagging.
5. For ductwork exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces,finish with
canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
6. For exterior applications,provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with outdoor
jacket.
E. Duct Liner
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
--2. --Secure-insulationwith-mechanicatlinerfasteners.—RefertoSMACNA'Standardsfor spacing.
3. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
4. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size
to allow for insulation thickness.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15250-3
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
3.03 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
Inch Inch
A. Glass Fiber Insulation
1. Roof Drain Bodies -------- 1.5
2. Roof Drainage
Interior rain drain -------- 1.5
3. Piping Exposed to Freezing Up to 4 2.0
3.04 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
THICKNESS
Inch
A. Flexible Glass Fiber
I. Concealed Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings 1.0
2. Concealed Supply Ducts(Cooling Systems) 1.0
3. Concealed Return Ducts in Unconditioned Spaces 1.0
B. Rigid Glass Fiber
1. Combustion Air Ducts 1.0
2. Outside Air Intake Ducts 1.0
3. Plenums(Cooling Systems) 1.0
4. Return and Relief Ducts in Mechanical Rooms 1.0
C. Duct Liner
1. Where Shown on drawings and as specified. 1.0
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15250-4
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
PARTI GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY-WORK INCLUDED
A. Contractor is responsible for Design, fabricate and install wet-pipe sprinkler system. Contractor to
visit site and become familiar with existing conditions prior to submitting bid.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Sprinkler System: Conform to the following criteria:
1. Coverage for new addition-extend modify existing or new system as required.
2. Design to NFPA 13.
3. Contractor to verify following data prior to bid and design of system.
w a. Static pressure.
b. Residual press.
c. Flow capacities.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Submit detailed shop drawings,product data,and hydraulic calculations to authority
having jurisdiction,Fire Marshall,and Owner's insurance underwriter,for approval. Submit proof
of approval to Architect/Engineer. Submit,after above approval,to architect/engineer for review
and approval prior to any work.
B. Shop Drawings: For review indicate detailed pipe layout, supports,components,accessories, sizes,
- and hydraulic calculations.
C. Product Data: For review provide data for pipe materials used,valves, manufacturer's catalog sheet
for equipment indicating rough-in size,finish,and accessories.
D. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: For project close-out include description of components of
system,servicing requirements,record drawings,inspection data,and parts lists.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds code
requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with:
1. Sprinkler Systems: Conform to NFPA 13.
2. Standpipe and Hose Systems: Conform to NFPA 14.
B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL and FM label or marking.
C. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in sprinkler and fire protection systems for a minimum
.-period of three(3)years.
D. Design,fabricate and install a complete sprinkler system.
1. Coordinate piping,and hand layout with building features,light fixtures,air inlets and outlets,
duct work,and all existing and new equipment. Indicate on shop drawing.
2. Provide adequate protection and support as required for piping and heads.
3. All piping to be concealed.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15300- 1
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
1.05 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13.
B. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type.
C. Provide metal storage cabinet in location designated by architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Above Ground Inside Building Piping: Steel, Schedule 40,black,type as permitted by NFPA 13.
B. Buried Piping: Cast or Ductile iron.
2.02 GATE VALVES
A. Up to and Including 2 inches: Bronze body,bronze trim, rising stem,hand wheel,solid wedge or
disc,threaded ends.
B. Over 2 inches: Iron body,bronze trim,rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch,hand
wheel,OS&Y,solid bronze or cast iron wedge,flanged or grooved ends.
2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Bronze body,stainless steel disc,resilient replaceable seat,threaded ends,extended neck,hand
wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device and built-in tamper switch.
B. Iron body,iron or bronze disc,EPDM seat,wafer,lug,or grooved ends,extended neck,hand wheel
and gear drive,integral indicating device,and internal tamper switch.
2.04 CHECK VALVES
A. Up to and Including 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat,threaded ends.
B. Over 2 inches: Iron body,bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc,renewable disc and seat,
flanged ends with automatic ball check.
C. 4 inches and Over: Iron body,bronze disc,stainless steel spring,resilient seal,threaded,wafer,or
flanged ends.
2.05 DRAIN VALVES
A. Bronze compression stop with hose thread nipple and cap.
B. -- Brass ball valve with-cap and chain,-3/4 inch-hose�thread.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15300-2
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
2.06 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Automatic Sprinkler Corp. of America.
LM 2. Grinnell Fire Protections System Co.,Inc.
3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Company,Inc.
4. Viking Corp.
B. Suspended Ceiling Type: Standard and Semi-recessed pendant type with chrome plated finish,and
matching escutcheon.
C. Sidewall Type: Standard and Semi recessed horizontal sidewall type chrome plated finish with
matching escutcheon.
D. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler head.
2.07 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve:
1. Check type valve with electrically or hydraulically operated alarms,with pressure retard
chamber and variable pressure trim.
B. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve:
1. Check type valve with electrically or hydraulically operated alarms,with accelerator.
Mlrr
C. Water Motor Alarm:
1. Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm gong,red enameled.
D. Electric Alarm:
1. Electrically operated red enameled]gong with pressure alarm switch.
E. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch with two contacts.
2.08 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
ltirr
A. Type:Free standing type with ductile iron pedestal red enamel finish. See civil drawings.
B. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware;threaded dust cap and chain of
matching material and finish.
C. Label: "Sprinkler-Fire Department Connection".
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. -- Install Work-in accordance-with manufacturer's instructions to'NFPA"13.
B. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. Remove burrs and bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
C. Remove scale and foreign material,inside and outside,before assembly.
D. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings,floors,or walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetration to
maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.
` SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15300-3
aw
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
E. Place pipe rims to minimize obstruction to other work. Offset around ductwork. Place piping in
concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
F. Provide gate valves for shut-off or isolating service. Where approved,use butterfly valves instead of
gate valves.
Iii..
G. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves,low points of piping and apparatus.
H. Connect system to water source ahead of domestic water connection with approved double check ,
valve assembly.
I. Protection:
1. Apply temporary tape or paper cover to ensure sprinkler heads do not receive paint finish.
2. Ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not receive field paint finish.
J.. Interface sprinkler system with building fire and smoke alarm system.
K. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
L. Hydrostatically test entire system. Test shall be witnessed by Fire Marshall,and authority having
jurisdiction and owner's insurance underwriter.
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15300-4
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Pipe and pipe fittings,valves.
B. Plumbing Specialties: Roof drains,cleanouts,water hammer arrestors,and hose bibs/hydrants.
C. Plumbing Fixtures.
y}
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For review provide manufacturers literature for plumbing specialties,fixtures, and
equipment.
R- B. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: For project closeout include manufacturers literature and
parts lists.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STORM WATER PIPING,BURIED BEYOND BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight with neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum.
B. Concrete Pipe: ASTM C14 with rubber gaskets.
C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D3034, SDR 35 with elastomeric gaskets.
2.02 STORM WATER PIPING,BURIED AND ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301,hubless,service weight with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel
clamps. 80-125 in.lb ss clamps for buried piping.
2.03 NATURAL GAS PIPING,ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black,with malleable iron or forged steel fittings,screwed or
irr welded.
2.04 FLANGES,UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe Size 3 Inches and Under: Malleable iron unions for threaded ferrousPiP g.in •bronze unions for
soldered copper pipe joints.
B. Pipe Size Over 3 Inch: Forged steel flanges for ferrous piping;bronze flanges for copper piping;
neoprene-gaskets-
C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing; "C"shape composition
sealing gasket;steel bolts,nuts,and washers.
D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,copper solder end,
water impervious isolation barrier.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15400- 1
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
2.05 BALL VALVES
A. Up to 4 Inches: Bronze two piece body,chrome plated ball,regular port,teflon seats and stuffing
box ring,lever handle,solder or threaded ends. J-3
2.06 GAS COCKS
A. Up to 2 Inches J,
1. Bronze body,bronze tapered plug. non-lubricated,teflon packing,threaded ends.
B. Over 2-1/2 Inches
1. Cast iron body and plug,pressure lubricated,teflon packing,flanged or grooved ends.
2.07 ROOF DRAINS
A. Roof Drains
1. Manufacturers
a. J.R. Smith.
b. Josam.
C. Zurn.
d. Wade.
2. See Plumbing Connection Schedule on drawings for type.
2.08 CLEANOUTS
A. Finished Floor
1. Manufacturers
a. JR Smith.
b. Josam.
c. Zurn.
d. Wade.
2. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange,reversible clamping collar,and adjustable nickel-
bronze round scored cover in service areas and round depressed cover to accept floor finish in
finished floor areas.
B. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover,and round stainless
steel access cover secured with machine screw.
2.09 SPECIALTIES
A. CLEANOUTS J,
1. Exterior Surfaced Areas(CO):Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover
manufactured by JR Smith,Josam or approved.
2. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas(CO):Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round
--epoxy coated gasketted cover-manufactured by JR Smith;Josam or approved.
J11-
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15400-2
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt,on inside and outside piping before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3;
D. Coordinate cutting or forming of roof or floor construction to receive drains to required invert
elevations.
E. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-
in and installation.
F. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section.
r
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. Group piping
whenever practical at common elevations.
C. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or connected
equipment.
D. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
f' E. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
6
F. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
t` G. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface.Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of
graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
H. Paint all exposed gas piping to match adjacent finished surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners,and dielectric connections only in accessible
locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
C. --- Install brass male adapters each-aide-of valves in copper piped system.--Sweat solder adapters to
pipe
D. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment,part of systems,or vertical risers.
rr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15400-3
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
3.04 TESTS
A. Minimum duration as listed for all tests. Furnish report of test observations signed by qualified
inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation or otherwise concealing piping or connecting
fixtures or equipment. Where part of system must be tested to avoid concealment before entire
system is complete,test that portion separately, same as for entire system. Isolate any device
installed in the system that is not rated for 150 psig pressure prior to tests. Notify Owner 48 hours
prior to all tests.
1. Drainage and Vent Piping: Hydrostatic test by filling to highest point,but not less than 10 feet
water column on major horizontal portion with no loss for two hours.
2. Natural Gas Piping: Isolate and test at 150 psig with no pressure loss for 2 hours. Verify
existing conditions of existing gas to provide service to new equipment.
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15400-4
ei
SECTION 15780
fir► PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART GENERAL
x
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
L
A. Packaged roof top unit.
E
B. Maintenance service.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01001 -Basic requirements: Procedures for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide for manufactured products and assemblies required.
Ys C. Product Data: Provide for manufactured products and assemblies required. Indicate water,drain
and electrical rough-in connections.
D. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating
instructions,installation instructions,maintenance and repair data,and parts listing.
1.03 WARRANTY
wA. Section 01001 -Basic Requirements: Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for
refrigeration compressors and heat exchangers.
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide one extra set of filters.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Manufacturers
1. Carrier.
2. Day&Night.
3. Lennox.
4. McQuay.
5. Trane.
B. Unit: Self-contained,packaged,factory assembled and prewired unit,consisting of cabinet and
frame,supply fan,exhaust fan,heat exchanger and burner,controls,air filters, refrigerant cooling
coil and compressor,condenser coil and condenser fan.
C. ---Cabinet:Galvanized steel with baited enamel finish;-access-doors or removable access panels with
quick fasteners.
�w
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15780- 1
SECTION 15780
PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
D. Insulation: One inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber.
E. Heat Exchangers:Aluminized steel,of welded construction.
F. Supply and Exhaust Fan:Forward curved centrifugal type,resiliently mounted with V-belt drive,
adjustable variable pitch motor pulley and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor or direct drive with
�4.
multiple speeds. Fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
G. Air Filters: 2 inch thick glass fiber disposable media in metal frames.
H. Roof Mounting Curb: 8 inches high galvanized steel channel frame with gaskets and nailer strips.
I. Gas Burner: Atmospheric type burner with adjustable combustion air supply,pressure regulator,gas
valves,manual shut-off,intermittent spark or glow coil ignition,flame sensing device,automatic
100 percent shut-off pilot,and high limit. Temperature sensor sensing bonnet temperatures
independent of burner controls,energizes fan.
J. Evaporator Coil: Copper tube,aluminum fin coil assembly with capillary tubes or thermostatic
expansion valves,galvanized drain pan and connection.
K. Compressor: Hermetic or semi-hermetic compressor,3600 rpm, resiliently mounted with positive
lubrication,crankcase heater,high and low pressure safety controls,motor overload protection,
suction and discharge service valves and gage ports,and filter drier.
1. Outdoor thermostat shall energize compressor above 57 degrees F ambient.
2. Step capacity control: Hot gas by-pass, Cycling compressors, Cylinder unloading or Cycling
multi-speed compressors.
L. Condenser Coil: Copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with sub cooling rows,coil guard,direct
drive propeller fans,resiliently mounted with fan guard,motor overload protection,wired to operate
with compressor. Provide refrigerant pressure switches to cycle condenser fans.
sK:
M. Motors:Factory lubricated and isolated from the frame.
N. Dampers:Provide outside,return,and relief dampers with damper operator and control package to
automatically vary outside air quantity. Outside air damper shall fail to closed position.
O. Damper Operator: 24 volt with gear train sealed in oil with spring return on units 7.5 ton cooling
capacity and larger.
P. Mixed Air Controls:Maintain selected supply air temperature and return dampers to minimum
position on call for heating and when ambient air enthalpy exceeds return air enthalpy.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate installation of units with architectural, mechanical,and electrical work.
C. Provide initial start-up and shut-down during first year of operation, including routine servicing and
check-out.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15780-2
SECTION 15780
PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
D. Mount roof mounted units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to
protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting frame level.
E. Supply units fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.
F. Scheduled performance is based on ARI 210/240 test conditions. Scheduled sound rating is based
on ARI 270.
,. 3.02 SCHEDULES
A. See Equipment Schedules on drawings.
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15780-3
SECTION 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION
{
PART1 GENERAL
.: 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Filters.
B. Ductwork and ductwork accessories.
T, , C. Volume control dampers.
X,
LD. Flexible duct connections.
R, E. Diffusers,boots,registers,grilles.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate for manufactured products and assemblies,and include electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Product Data: Provide for manufactured products and assemblies,and include electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Include instructions for lubrication,filter replacement,
L spare parts lists,and wiring diagrams.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILTERS
A. Manufacturers
1. Farr.
2. American Air Filter.
B. Disposable,Extended Area Panel Filters: Pleated,reinforced cotton or glass fiber fabric;supported
and bonded to welded wire grid.
1. Frame: Cardboard.
L 2. Nominal thickness: 2 inches.
3. Rating: ASHRAE 52-76,dust spot efficiency.
2.02 DUCTWORK
A. Materials
1. Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel sheet,lock-forming quality.
2. Insulated Flexible Ducts:Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fiber insulation,enclosed
by-vapor barrier jacket.
3. Sealant:Non-hardening,water resistant,fire resistive,used alone or with tape.
L
t
L
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15880- 1
�w
SECTION 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION
B. Metal Ductwork
1. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-
Metal and Flexible except as indicated.
2. Construct T's,bends,and elbows with radius of 1-1/2 times width of duct on center line.
Where not possible provide turning vanes.
3. Increase duct sizes gradually,not exceeding 30 degrees divergence and 45 degrees
convergence.
4. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
5. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with
crimp in direction of air flow.
2.03 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible,
and as indicated.
B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction,and
two gages heavier for larger sizes. Secure with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum
1/4 inch diameter rod.
C. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 12 x 30 inch.
D. Fabricate multi blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch.
Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable
hardware.
E. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller,provide end bearings.
F. Provide locking,indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi blade dampers. Where width
exceeds 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.
2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,approximately 3
inches wide,crimped into metal edging strip.
2.05 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.
B. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. Access doors with
sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.06 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
A. Manufacturers
1. -Krueger.
2. Titus.
3. Anemostat.
4. Carnes.
B. See Equipment Schedules on Drawings.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDMON&REMODEL,TIGARD 15880-2
SECTION 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install flexible connections specified between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Flexible connectors
shall not be in tension while running.
C. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt,rubber,or neoprene gaskets.
D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance
activities.
E. Connect diffusers where shown to low pressure ducts with 4 feet maximum length of flexible duct.
Hold in place with strap or clamp.
F. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to
prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
G. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
i motorized equipment.
H. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters,coils,fans,automatic
dampers,and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18
inch size for shoulder access.
I. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features,symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
J. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers,and grilles and registers,regardless of
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser,or grille and register assembly.
K. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Division 9.
L. Clean all surfaces of inlets and outlets after installation and before balancing.
END OF SECTION
1
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15880-3
w
SECTION 15950
CONTROLS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and other Conditions and
Division 1 -General Requirements sections,apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Contractor is responsible for designing,fabricating and installing the complete control system as
required and as approved for a complete working system. Provide all wiring,conduit,relays,
contactors,thermostats,etc.to accomplish the controls as outlined in the sequence of operation.
B. All control wiring rough-in and final connections(including 120 volt control wiring)shall be
included in this work,and shall be the responsibility of the contractor. All boxes,fittings,conduit,
cables,methods,and installation to conform to NEC,drawings and specifications.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Section 15050-Basic Materials and Methods.
B. Section 15600-Furnaces.
C. Section 15850-Air Handling.
LO 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide shop drawings and product data for the following:
1. Drawings: Furnish six copies of complete control diagrams indicating connection points,
description and function of all control equipment. Include written description of control
sequences,and a list of all equipment cross referenced to the control diagrams indicating
manufacturers numbers.
6 2. Devices and equipment
a. Programmable Room thermostat.
b. Low Leakage Dampers and damper motors/operators.
L c. Relays,contactors and Transformers.
d. All Other Materials Required for a Complete Operating HVAC System.
9 3. Include record wiring drawings showing installed condition and operating changes made
LO during start-up in each Operating and Maintenance manual.
4. Shop drawings will be submitted and approved prior to system installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
16
2.01 -ROOM THERMOSTATS
yA. Seven day programmable,Honeywell T7300/T7400 or approved.
L
L
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15950- 1
LO
2.02 WIRING
A. Shall be in accordance with"Electrical"Division 16 of these specifications and all applicable codes.
It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Sub-Contractor to study the mechanical and electrical
project drawings and specifications and provide all wiring relating to the control system not
furnished therein. This wiring includes contactors,relays,etc.,and incidental power wiring(as
time clock wiring,power when running through the stat,transformer,etc.
2.03 AUTOMATIC/MOTORIZED DAMPERS
A. Multiple opposed blade type,except where either dimension is less than 10 inches a single blade
may be used,or if application restricts air mixing parallel blades may be used,maximum blade
length to be 48 inches. Galvanized blades to be interlocking,minimum 16 gauge. Frame to be 16
ga. galvanized steel,reinforce to prevent raking. Linkage concealed in frame. Dampers to have
polyurethane edge seals and flexible jam seals, side seating stops,platted steel shafts and cycology
800 bearings. Damper blades reinforced,have continuous full length axle shafts and/or operating
jackshafts as required to provide equal tracking of all blades. Dampers to have low air leakage
characteristics. Damper motors/operators sized to handle required damper size. Ruskin,Honeywell,
Penn equivalent,or approved.
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials,not specifically described but required for a complete and operating system,
shall be new,first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the approval of the
Architect/Engineer. Provide all necessary valves,relays,protective devices,transformers,
temperature sensors,mounting boards,etc.,as required to accomplish control as outlined.
2.05 LABELS
A. Install engraved black and white bakelite name plates on or adjacent to all switches,relays,starters
and control instruments except room thermostats.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Where control wiring is susceptible to damage install in conduit.
3.02 CONTROL ADJUSTMENT
A. All temperature control settings indicated are approximate and intended to indicate range of
instrument to be used. Adjustments shall be made as required by individual location,job
requirements and location conditions.
3.03 CALIBRATION AND START-UP
A. The contractor shall calibrate and adjust all control systems and components and place in proper
operation. Each system control sequence shall be checked and adjusted for complete and proper
operation. At the end of project completion,the contractor shall demonstrate to the owners
representative proper operation of all control facilities.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15950-2
3.04 SEQUENCE OF EQUIPMENT OPERATION
i
rw A. AC1,AC2,and AC3
1. Occupied setting of thermostat
a. Fan runs continuously.
b. Heating
1) During morning warm-up outside air damper closed. When return air temperature
reaches 68 Degrees F. outside air damper drives open to minimum position.
2) Room thermostat cycles burner on call for heat.
C. Cooling
1) The compressor(s)will cycle on call for cooling. Outside air open to minimum
position.
L2. Un-occupied setting of thermostat
a. Night low limit thermostat cycles burner and fan on call for heating.
h b. Outside air damper closed.
F
i;
T
END OF SECTION
in
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15950-3
SECTION 15990
TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air systems.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Draft Reports: Submit 4 copies for review prior to final acceptance of Project.
+° B. Test Reports: Submit prior to final acceptance of project and for inclusion in operating and
maintenance manuals. Provide in soft cover,letter size,3-ring binder,with index page and tabs,
and cover identification. Include reduced scale drawings with air outlets and equipment identified
to correspond with data sheets,and indicating thermostat locations.
C. Report Forms: AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms.
PART 2 PRODUCTS-not used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 AGENCIES
A. Air Balancing Specialty,Inc.
k;
B. Northwest Engineering.
C. Professional Air Balance Service.
3.02 EXANIINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Before commencing work,verify that systems are complete and operable.
B. Report any defects,deficiencies,or abnormal conditions in mechanical systems which prevent
system balance to architect/engineer.
C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
D. Recorded data shall represent actually measured or observed condition.
E. Permanently mark settings of valves,dampers,and other adjustment devices. Set and lock memory
stops.
9iw
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or
minus 10 percent for return and exhaust systems of design.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
L
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15990- 1
6
SECTION 15990
TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
3.04 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust all new air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply,return,
and exhaust air quantities.
1) To balance return air,calculate the multiplier-for example:
[(2000 cfm SA)-(200 cfm OA)]/2000 cfm = Multiplier
=0.9
This is to be used as the return air multiplying factor. Example:If 100 cfm is shown on plans,
the balancer is to balance return air during occupancy at 100*0.9=90 cfm.
g�
Note:for outside air,see schedules on drawings.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as
dampers.
E. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary
branch air quantities by damper regulation.
F. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops,
and total pressure across the fan. Allow for 50 percent loading of filters.
G. Adjust automatic outside air,return air,and exhaust air dampers for design conditions.
H. Measure temperature conditions across outside air,return air,and exhaust air dampers to check
leakage.
I. Where modulating dampers are provided,take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION&REMODEL,TIGARD 15990-2
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
ww
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 DEFINITIONS
A. Where the words "furnish" , "provide" , "install" appear in
this Division, or a manufacturer is indicated with item or
' product catalog number listed, install and furnish the
item complete and operating for the purpose or function
intended, unless noted otherwise.
B. All references to power system voltages are RMS per
definition in NEC 100.
1. 02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements: Electrical systems required for this
work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and
services necessary to complete installation of electrical
work shown on Drawings, specified herein or required for
a complete operable facility and not specifically
described in other Sections of these Specifications.
Among the items required are:
r 1. Service and distribution equipment shown on
Drawings.
2 . Feeders to subdistribution and branch circuit
panels, HVAC equipment, and specific equipment as
indicated on Drawings.
3 . Branch circuit wiring from the branch circuit panels
for lighting, receptacles, junction boxes, motors,
*W signal systems and other indicated circuits wiring.
4 . Luminaires, control switches, receptacles, relays,
supports and other accessory items.
i1w 5 . Wiring and final power connections for motors
installed for heating, cooling and ventilation.
6 . Raceway systems for special systems, provide cable
z
or conductors only as indicated.
7 . Fire Alarm and other systems.
wr
rrr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16010 - 1
wr
1. 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials Substitutions:
1. Submit requests for material substitutions to the r
Architect in compliance with Contract Document
requirements. Concurrently, submit two additional
copies directly to the Architect' s Consulting
Electrical Engineer.
2 . Indicate any deviation or noncompliance by an - ,
attached letter explaining a proposed change.
Approval of submitted material does not grant '
deviation from the Contract requirements. Include
in Bid Sum additional expense resulting from the
Contractor's decision to use substitute materials
including all costs by other affected crafts.
B. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Instructions to
Bidders. Attach items of like nature to one substitution
form.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit in accordance with Division 1. Include
physical and electrical characteristics; i.e.
dimensions materials voltage,g phase, etc. , of all
new equipment. Include installation wiring diagrams
for each special system and communication system.
2 . If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between 40
Shop Drawings and the Drawings and Specifications
are discovered either prior to or after Shop Drawing
Submittals are processed by Architect, Drawings and
Specifications take precedence.
3 . Shop Drawing Submittals processed by Architect are
not Change Orders. The purpose of Shop Drawings is
to demonstrate an understanding of the design
concept.
D. Project Record Documents:
1. On completion of work, deliver to Architect one set
of accurately marked reproducible drawings. Show
all change and variations from Drawings and exact
routes of all feeders, service conduits and location
of all conduits stubbed out for future continuation
with definite dimensions and burial depths.
2 . Drawings and lettering, neat, clean and legible.
3 . Order and pay for required reproducibles. Original
tracings, for purpose of producing Record Drawings, ]
provided by Architect at start of project.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16010 - 2
►r
w 4 . Maintain one "work" set on project site at all
times. Work set subject to inspection by Architect
during construction.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit the following prior to final acceptance and
request for final payment for Division 16 work, in
conformance with the Project Closeout requirements
of the General Provisions:
a. Record Drawings.
b. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
2 . Provide four complete sets of Operation and
Maintenance Manuals including, but not limited to,
the following:
a. Schematic diagrams, installation wiring
diagrams and instructions and Operation and
Maintenance Manuals for all communications,
special systems, signalling and control systems
and equipment.
b. Complete luminaire cuts including lamps
furnished for all luminaires.
C. Shop Drawings and Installation, Operation and M
aintenance Manuals for all power distribution
1w and control equipment including service and
distribution equipment, branch panels, etc.
d. Copies of certificates of code authority
acceptance, and test data and other special
VW guarantees, warranties, etc. specified
elsewhere herein and/or indicated on the
Drawings.
,. 3 . Assemble each set in standard hardback, 3-ring
binders. Do not exceed binder fill of 50 percent;
i.e. , 1-inch thickness of paper in 2 inch binder.
Use tabular dividers to organize the materials in
the same order as this Specification. Mark each
divider according to (sub) section number and name.
1. 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Acceptance at site:
w
1. Do not use scratched, marred or deformed materials.
2 . Do not use luminaires, material or equipment in wet
cartons or boxes, stored in or exposed to rain,
"' water, dust, dirt or snow.
ow
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16010 - 3
r
wr
1. 05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Cooperation with Other Crafts:
1. Cooperate with other crafts and contracts as needed
for the proper execution of the work.
2 . Prior to the installation of equipment, verify the
requirements indicated in Division 16 with the
actual electrical requirements and characteristics
of the equipment supplied. ry.k
3 . Obtain wiring or schematic diagrams for confirmation
and connections. Bring deviations to the attention
of the Architect.
4 . Examine the Drawings of all other trades or crafts
to avoid conflicts. Resolve conflicts with the
Architect prior to installation.
B. Safety: Refer to Section 00700, General Conditions.
1. 06 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Comply with the provisions of Section
01700, Contract Closeout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS
A. General: Like items from one manufacturer; i.e. , +
luminaire types, switches, receptacles, breakers, panels,
etc.
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Provide electrical materials of the type and quality
indicated, or approved, new, listed by the Underwriters '
Laboratories, bearing their label wherever standards have
been established and label service is regularly furnished
by them. Indicated brand names and catalog numbers are
used to establish standards of performance and quality.
The description of materials listed herein governs in the
event that catalog numbers do not correspond to the
materials described herein.
2 . 03 ACCESSORIES
A. Special Features and Incidentals:
1. Include special features, finishes, description or
requirements indicated in the Contract Documents for
particular items or equipment, regardless of
inclusion in the item' s listed catalog number.
io
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16010 - 4
w
�r.
2 . Provide and install as part of the Contract work all
incidentals, not specifically mentioned herein or
noted on the Drawings, but needed to complete the
system or systems, in a safe and satisfactory
working condition.
2 . 04 FABRICATION
A. Shop/Factory Finishing: Modify manufacturer's products at
the factory to comply with the special requirements noted.
' PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 VERIFICATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Bidder is required to visit site of proposed
construction. Verify and inspect the existing site
to determine the conditions that affect this work.
2 . Include all costs in the bid price for the work and
r material required to comply with the Contract
Documents, based on the actual existing conditions
and the information indicated in the Contract
Documents.
3 . Failure to visit site and verify conditions
affecting work of this Division does not relieve
Contractor from the necessity of doing any and all
work which is necessary to make all electrical
installations and systems complete.
B. Construction Documents:
1. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic with symbols
representing electrical equipment, outlets and
wiring.
2 . Electrical symbols indicating wiring and equipment,
shown on the Drawings or specified in Division 16,
are included in Division 16 work unless specifically
noted otherwise.
3 . Drawings indicate general directions and routes of
�. feeders and service conductor systems. Determine
exact route and installation of electrical wiring
and equipment with conditions of construction and
acceptance of Architect.
4 . Deviations from Drawings needed to make the
electrical installation conform to the work of other
crafts are part of the Contract work. Obtain
Architect approval prior to executing any deviations
from Drawings.
5. Examine the Mechanical, Structural and Grading and
Landscape Drawings to avoid systems conflicts.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16010 - 5
ow
6. Data given herein and shown on Electrical Drawings
is as exact as could be secured but its absolute
accuracy is not guaranteed.
C. Clarification:
1. Prior to submitting a bid, bring to the attention of
the Architect any ambiguous, conflicting or unclear
instructions. Such items will be clarified by the
Architect in Addendum form.
2. In the event that time does not permit clarification
prior to bid opening, the Drawings govern in matters
of quantity, the Specification in matters of
quality. In event of conflict on the Drawings or in
the Specifications, the greater quantity and the
higher quality apply.
3 . Should the Electrical Documents indicate a condition
conflicting with the governing codes and
regulations, refrain from installing that portion of '
the work until clarified by the Architect. Remove
and correctly install, as part of the Contract work,
any work installed in violation of the governing r
codes.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Codes and Permits:
1. Comply with the latest rules and regulations of the til
codes of the state and local authorities having
jurisdiction.
2 . Furnish all materials and labor required for
compliance with these Rules and Regulations. Items
in excess of code requirements take precedence.
3 . Obtain and pay for all required permits, plan check
charges and certificates. Deliver Certificates of
Acceptance from the Code-Enforcing Authorities to
Architect prior to request for final inspection and
acceptance of work.
3 . 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to
demonstrate compliance with requirements specified
in Division 16.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16010 - 6
i
2 . Provide journey-level electrician with tools,
meters, instruments and other test equipment.
Remove and replace trims, covers, luminaires, etc. ,
and test materials, systems, methods and quality of
+► work in the presence of the Architect for final
review at completion of the work.
3 . In the presence of the Architect, conduct thorough
tests of all Special Systems and Communication
Systems. Emergency system tests, conform to NEC
700.
B. Inspection: Do not cover work prior to review by the
Architect.
3 . 04 CLEANING
A. Tools and Materials:
1. Keep tools and materials in an orderly manner
throughout the construction period.
2 . Upon completion of the work, remove all supplies,
materials, tools, etc. , furnished by the Electrical
Division.
I we B. Dirt, Debris and Dust:
1. Remove dirt and debris of whatever nature caused by
the execution of the electrical work.
2 . Leave the entire electrical system installed under
this Contract in clean, dust-free and proper working
order.
C. Vacuum clean interiors of all new and modified electrical
equipment enclosures.
3 . 05 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Refer to Division 1, General Requirements.
liw
B. Perform all necessary excavation and backfill for the
installation of electrical work and as indicated herein.
ow C. For nonmetallic conduit and direct burial cables, place a
minimum 3-inch cover of sand or clean earth fill all
around the cable or conduit on a leveled trench bottom.
Lay all steel conduit on a smooth level trench bottom, so
that contact is made for its entire length. Remove water
from trench while electrical conduit is being laid.
wr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16010 - 7
AW
w.
As
3 . 06 NOISE CONTROL
A. Do not place outlet boxes at opposite side of partitions
back to back or use straight through boxes.
B. Do not place contactors, transformers, starters and
similar noise producing devices on walls which are common
to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on the
Drawings. Where such devices must be mounted on walls
common to occupied spaces, mount or isolate in such a
manner as to effectively prevent the transmission of their
inherent noise to the occupied space.
C. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers and like
equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier than
other similar equipment on the project will be deemed
defective and require replacement.
3 . 07 DEMOLITION
A. Scope:
1. It is the intent of these documents to provide the
necessary information and adjustments to the
electrical system required to meet code, and
accommodate installation of the new work.
2 . Coordinate with the Owner so that work can bep
scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal
activities, building access, access to different
areas. The Owner will cooperate to the best of
their ability to assist in a coordinated schedule,
but will remain the final authority as to time of
work permitted.
3 . Existing Conditions: Determine the exact location
of all existing utilities before commencing work,
compensate the Owner for any and all damages caused
by the Contractor's failure to exactly locate and
preserve any and all underground utilities. Replace ;
damaged items with new material to match existing.
Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which
are not shown on the Drawings.
B. Equipment: Unless otherwise directed, luminaires being
removed as part of the demolition process are the Owner's
property. Remove all other equipment not scheduled to be
reused or relocated from the jobsite as directed by the
Owner.
to
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16010 - 8
C. Execution:
1. Remove all existing luminaires, switches, recep-
tacles, and other electrical equipment and devices
and associated wiring from walls, ceilings, floors,
and other surfaces scheduled for remodeling,
relocation, or demolition unless specifically shown
as retained or relocated on the Drawings.
2 . Maintain electrical continuity of all existing
systems. Remove or relocate electrical boxes,
conduit, wiring, equipment, luminaires, etc. as may
be encountered in removed or remodeled areas in the
existing construction affected by this work. Remove
and restore wiring which serves usable existing
outlets clear of the construction or demolition. If
existing junction boxes will be made inaccessible,
or if abandoned outlets serve as feed through boxes
for other existing electrical equipment which is
" being retained, provide new conduit and wire to
bypass the abandoned outlets. If existing conduits
pass through partitions or ceiling which are being
+w removed or remodeled, provide new conduit and wire
to reroute clear of the construction or demolition
and maintain service to the existing load.
I we 3 . Extend circuiting and devices in all existing walls
to be furred out.
4 . Existing electrical outlets and luminaires are
indicated on Electrical Demolition Plans. Verify
exact location and number of existing electrical
outlets and luminaires in the field. Only partial
existing electrical shown. Locations of items shown
on the Drawings as existing are partially based on
Record and other Drawings which may contain errors.
Verify the accuracy of the information shown prior
to bidding and provide such labor and material as is
necessary to accomplish the intent of the Contract
Documents.
5. Remove all abandoned wiring to leave site clean.
6. Keep outages to occupied areas to a minimum and
prearrange all outages with the Owner's
representative. Requests for outages shall state
the specific dates and hours and the maximum
durations, with the outages kept to these specific
dates and hours and the maximum durations.
Compensate the Owner for any damages resulting from
unscheduled outages or for those not confined to the
preapproved times.
7. Verify a location for storage of materials,
supplies, tools, rubbish, etc. prior to start of
work.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16010 - 9
ww
ow
8 . Existing lighting which is to remain or be relocated
is to be relamped, reballasted and cleaned. Leave
all luminaries in proper working order.
9. If any existing electrical equipment contains PCBs
(poly-chlorinated bi-phenols) , replace with new.
Match existing characteristics but without PCBs.
10. Prior to bid, remove covers and doors from existing
switchboards, panelboards, transformers, etc. to
determine if existing conditions are in compliance
with currently enforced code requirements. Upgrade
all items not complying with current codes in this
Contract.
3 . 08 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
A. No interruption of services to any part of existing
facilities will be permitted without express permission in
each instance from the Owner. Obtain written permission
from the Owner for any interruption of power, lighting or
signal circuits and systems.
B. If overtime is necessary, there will be no allowance made I
by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift
work, due to maintaining continuity of service herein
required.
C. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption.
�f
END OF SECTION
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16010 - 10
SECTION 16050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
rr
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Raceways.
2 . Wires, Cables and Connectors.
3 . Outlet Boxes.
r. 4. Devices and Plates.
5. Disconnect Switches.
6. Identification.
1. 02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Connect equipment, whether furnished by Owner or other
Divisions of the Contract, electrically complete.
1. 03 SUPPORTING DEVICES
`r
A. Safety factor of 4 required for every fastening device or
support for electrical equipment installed. Support to
withstand four times weight of equipment it supports.
Bracing to comply with Seismic Zone 3 requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
r
2 . 01 RACEWAYS
A. Conduits:
1. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC) : Hot dip
galvanized after thread cutting. Manufacture in
conformance with Federal Specification WWC-581
(latest revision) and ANSI C80. 1.
2 . Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) : Hot dip
galvanized after thread cutting. Manufacture in
conformance with Federal Specification WWC-581
(latest revision) .
3 . Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) : Hot dip
galvanized and chromate coated. Manufacture in
conformance with Federal Specification WWC-563
(latest revision) and ANSI C80. 3 .
7,. 4 . Flexible Conduit: Reduced wall flexible steel
conduit. Hot dip galvanized. Manufacture in
conformance with Federal Specification WWC-566
(latest revision) .
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 1
w
wr
5. Flexible Conduit, PVC Coated: Hot dip galvanized
steel. PVC chemical resistant jacket extruded to
core, up to 1-inch trade size. PVC chemical
resistant jacket, tubed over core, up to 4-inch
trade size.
6. PVC: Class 40 heavy wall rigid PVC. Rated for use
with 90C conductors. Manufacture in conformance
with Federal Specification WC1094A and NEMA TC-2 .
B. Conduit Fittings:
1. Bushings: Insulated type for threaded Rigid and IMC
conduit. Thomas & Betts 1222 Series or O-Z Gedney B
Series. Insulated grounding type for threaded Rigid
and IMC conduit: O-Z Gedney BLG Series.
2 . EMT Connectors and Couplings: Steel gland, Tomic,
Breagle or O-Z Gedney 7000 ST Series, preinsulated
type connectors. Set screw type, zinc plated,
steel. Provide continuous ground wire with set
screw connectors/couplings.
3 . Expansion/Deflection Fittings:
a. EMT: Use O-Z Gedney Type TX.
b. GRC: Use O-Z Gedney Type AX, DX and DXX.
2 . 02 WIRES AND CABLES
A. Copper, 600 volt rated throughout. Conductors 14AWG to ,
10AWG, solid or stranded. Conductors 8AWG and larger,
stranded. Phase color to be consistent at all feeder
terminations; A-B-C, top to bottom, left to right, front
to back. Conductors 3AWG and larger, minimum insulation
rating of 75C. Insulation types THWN, THHN or XHHW. j
Color code conductors as follows:
PHASE 208V WYE 240V DELTA 480V
A Black Black Brown
B Red Orange (High Orange
Leg)
C Blue Blue Yellow
Neutral White White White w/colored
strip
Ground Green Green Green
B. AC/MC Cable: High strength galvanized steel or aluminum
flexible armor. Full length minimum size No. 12 copper
ground wire, THHN 90C conductors, full length tape marker.
Overall PVC or nylon cable tape. Short circuit throat
insulators, mechanical compression termination. g
Manufactured by Alflex, AFC, or Carol. AC/MC cable
allowed only for 20 amp branch circuits concealed in walls
or ceiling.
r
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 2
rw+
2 . 03 CONNECTORS
err
A. Copper Pads: Drilled and tapped for multiple conductor
terminals.
B. Lugs: Indent/compression type for use with stranded
branch circuit or control conductors. Manufactured by
Anderson, Burndy, Ilsco, or Thomas & Betts.
C. Solid Conductor Branch Circuits: Spring connectors, wire
nuts, for conductors No. 18 through No. 8AWG, manufactured
by Ideal, Scotch-Lock, or 3M.
2. 04 BOXES
A. General:
1. Luminaire Outlet: 4 inch octagonal box, 1-1/2
inches deep with 3/8 inch luminaire stud if
required. Provide raised covers on bracket outlets
and on ceiling outlets.
rl. 2 . Device Outlet: Installation of one or two devices
at common location, minimum 4-inch square, minimum
1-1/2 inches deep. Single or two gang flush device
raised covers. Raco Series 681 and 686 or Bowers.
3 . Multiple Devices: Three or more devices at common
location. Install one piece gang boxes with one
piece device cover. Install one device per gang.
Raco or Bowers.
4 . Masonry Boxes: Outlets in concrete, Raco Series 690
or Bowers.
5. Construction: Provide galvanized steel interior
outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size,
including depth of box, to suit each respective
location and installation; constructed with stamped
ow knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes
with screws for securing box covers or wiring
devices.
w.. 6. Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as
required for each installation, including mounting
brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings,
luminaire studs, cable clamps and metal straps for
supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet
boxes being used and meeting requirements of
individual wiring situations.
�r.
�tw+
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 3
B. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant
cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of the type,
shape and size, including depth of box, with threaded
conduit ends, cast metal face plate with spring-hinged
waterproof cap suitably configured for each application,
including face plate gasket, blank plugs and
corrosionproof fasteners. Weatherproof boxes to be
constructed to have smooth sides, gray finish. Bell or
Red Dot.
C. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized sheet steel
junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of the type
shape and size, to suit each respective location and
installation; with welded seams and equipped with steel
nuts, bolts, screws and washers. Circle AW, or Hoffman.
D. Box Extension Adapter: Diecast aluminum construction.
Install over flush wall outlet boxes to permit flexible
raceway extension to equipment. Bell 940 Series, Red Dot
IHE4 Series.
E. Conduit Fittings: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-
steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and plastic
conduit bushings of the type and size to suit each
respective use and installation. O-Z Gedney, or Thomas &
Betts.
F. Floor Boxes - Single Gang: Deep recessed or cast steel
fully adjustable before and after concrete pour with all
required components for complete activation. Verify
required components for application of service fittings,
covers, monuments, etc. , attached to floor boxes.
Hubbell, Walker or Steel City. Activations:
G. Floor Boxes - Multiple Gang: Deep steel, fully adjustable
before and after pour. Equal to Walkerboy Omnibox multi-
service floor box with carpet plates, device covers.
Verify color. Partition for different power or signal
applications. Provide required power receptacle devices
and signal grommets or receptacles as noted.
2 . 05 WIRING DEVICES
A. Wall Switches:
1. Characteristics: Toggle type, quiet acting, 20A,
120/277V, UL listed for motor loads up to 80 percent
of rated amperage. Arrow-Hart 1221, Leviton 1221, .
Pass & Seymour 20ACI, Bryant 4901, Hubbell 1221.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 4
2 . Pilot Light Switches: Lighted handle, toggle type,
red unless noted otherwise, neon pilot lamp. Pilot
lamp energized when load is energized. 20A/120V,
Hubbell Series 1221-PL; 20A/208-277V, Hubbell Series
+ 1221-PLF.
3 . Key Switches: 20A/120-277V, black key guide.
Arrow-Hart 1991-L, Pass & Seymour 20ACI-L, Bryant
4901-L, Hubbell 1221-L.
4 . Finish: Grey finish unless selected otherwise by
the Architect. Provide Architect with optional
colors for selection prior to ordering.
S. Manufacturers: Hubbell, General Electric, Leviton,
Pass & Seymour.
B. Wall Dimmers: Lutron NT Series compatible with type or
load controlled (i.e. electronic ballast, low voltage
luminaire, etc. ) . Finish to match wall switches. Size
dimmers to accept connected load. Do not cut fins. Where
dimmers are ganged together, provide a single multi-gang
coverplate.
r C. Receptacles:
1. Finish: Same exposed finish as switches.
Receptacles connected to emergency circuits, red
finish, Hubbell SG63-HR.
2 . Characteristics: Straight parallel blade 20A, 125V,
2 pole - 3 wire grounding. Arrow-Hart 5352 , Leviton
5352 , Pass & Seymour 5352, Bryant 5352 , Hubbell
5352 .
3 . Isolated Ground Receptacle: Orange urea finish with
isolated ground. Hubbell IG-5362, Arrow-Hart
IG-5362 , Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Bryant.
4 . Ground Fault Interrupter: Feed through type, 20A,
125VAC, specification grade. Hubbell GF-5362GY,
Arrow-Hart GF-5342 .
5. Wet Locations: Weatherproof receptacles installed
in wet locations, approved for location and use,
Course-Hinds WLR Series. Equip utilization
equipment connected to wet location receptacles with
barrel type plug similar to Hubbell 5266-C. Provide
,w continuous use cover with cover capable of closing
over energized cord cap.
D. Finish Plates: 18 percent chrome, 8 percent nickel, Type
302 stainless steel, satin finish, beveled metal. Provide
telephone/signal system device plates; activated outlets
to have coverplates to match modular jack. Hubbell S
Series, Arrow-Hart, Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Bryant.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 5
+w
E. Surface Covers:
1. Material: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel, 1/2
inch raised industrial type with openings
appropriate for device(s) installed in surfacei
outlets.
2. Cast Box and Extension Adaptors: Aluminum, with
gasket, blank. Single gang, Bell 240-ALF. Two
gang, Bell 236-ALF.
2 . 06 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
A. Toggle Type Disconnect Switches: 120 volts, single pole,
20A, 1 HP maximum. NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors and NEMA
3R enclosure for outdoors.
B. Manual Motor Starters: Quick-make, quick-break. Thermal
overload protection. Device labeled with maximum voltage,
current and horsepower. Square-D, Class 2510, Siemens,
General Electric, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, or
Challenger. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors and NEMA
3R enclosure for outdoors.
C. Safety Switches: Heavy duty, fused type, dual rated,
quick-make, quick-break with fuse rejection feature for
use with Class R fuses only, unless other fuse type is
specifically noted. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors
and NEMA 3R enclosure for outdoors. Switches clearly
marked for maximum voltage, current and horsepower. Equip ►
enclosure with defeatable cover interlock. Switches rated
for maximum available fault current. Manufactured by
Challenger, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, Square-D, or
Siemens.
2 . 07 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Hangers: Kindorf B-905-2A channel, H-119-D washer, C105
strap, 3/8-inch rod with ceiling flange.
B. Concrete Inserts: Kindorf D-255, cast in concrete for
support fasteners for loads up to 800 pounds.
C. Pipe Straps: Two-hole galvanized or malleable iron. 66
D. Luminaire Chain: Campbell Chain 75031, 90-pound test with
steel hooks.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 6
irk
rw
r..
2 . 08 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Engraved Labels: Melamine plastic laminate, white with
black core, 1/16-inch thick, manufactured by Lamicoid.
ww Engravers standard letter style, minimum 3/16-inch high
letters, all capitals. Drill or punch labels for
mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is
0 necessary because of substrate. Use self tapping
stainless steel screws.
B. Conductor Numbers: Manufacturers standard vinyl-cloth
*0 self-adhesive cable and conductor markers of the
wraparound type. Preprinted black numbers on yellow
field. Manufactured by Brady or approved.
C. Branch Circuit Schedules: Provide branch circuit
identification schedules, typewritten, clearly filled out,
to identify load connected to each circuit and location of
load. Numbers to correspond to numbers assigned to each
circuit breaker pole position.
+ r D. Circuit Breaker Identification: Provide permanent
identification number in or on panelboard dead-front
adjacent to each circuit breaker pole position.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
rr.
A. Verify electrical characteristics of equipment prior to
installation of conduits and wiring for equipment.
1W Coordinate HVAC voltage requirements with Mechanical
Drawings prior to rough in.
3 . 02 MOTOR BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING
A. Do not install electrical equipment or wiring on
mechanical equipment without approval of Architect.
rw
B. Provide moisture tight equipment wiring and switches in
ducts or plenums used for environmental air.
rw C. Connect motor starter branch circuits complete from panel
to motor as required by code and manner herein described.
w. D. Motor starter and control devices and wiring provided by
other Divisions unless noted on Drawings.
Mw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 7
aw
00
3 . 03 APPLIANCE/UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT
A. Provide appropriate cable and cord cap for final
connection unless equipment is provided with same. Verify
special purpose outlet NEMA configuration and ampere
rating with equipment supplier prior to ordering devices
and coverplates.
t
3 . 04 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit:
1. Conduit Joints: Assemble conduits continuous and
secure to boxes, panels, luminaires and equipment
with fittings to maintain continuity. Provide
watertight joints where embedded in concrete, below
grade or in damp locations. Seal PVC conduit joints
with solvent cement and metal conduit with metal
thread primer. All rigid conduit connections to be
threaded, clean and tight (metal to metal) .
2 . Conduit Placement: Install continuous conduit and
raceways for electrical power and signal systems
wiring. Exposed conduits are permitted in
Mechanical Rooms or spaces where walls, ceilings and
floors will not be covered with finished materials.
Where Documents permit exposed conduit install
parallel or at right angles to building lines, tight
to finished surfaces and neatly offset into boxes.
Do not install conduits or other electrical
equipment in obvious passages, doorways, scuttles or
crawl spaces which would impede or block the area
passage's intended usage. Do not install conduits
on surface of building exterior, on top of parapet
walls, or across floors.
3 . Maximum Bends: Install code sized pull boxes to
restrict maximum bends in a run of conduit to 270
degrees. Conduit bodies, condulets, not permitted
in feeders.
4 . Conduit Terminations: Provide conduits shown on
Drawings which terminate without box, panel, cabinet
or conduit fitting with not less than five full
threads. Bushings and metal washer type sealer
between bushing and conduit end.
5. Flexible Conduit: Install 12-inch minimum slack
loop on flexible metallic conduit and PVC coated
flexible metallic conduit.
6. Conduit Size: Size as indicated on Drawings. Where
size is not indicated, provide conduit in minimum
code permitted size for THW conductors of quantity
required for complete operation. Minimum trade size
1/2 inch.
1
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 — 8
iris
wr
7. Conduit Use Locations:
a. Underground: PVC.
b. Cast-in-Place Concrete, Masonry, Damp Locations
and Subject to Mechanical Damage: GRC or IMC.
C. Dry, Protected: GRC, IMC, EMT.
d. Sharp Bends and Elbows: GRC, EMT use factory
elbows.
e. Install pull wire or nylon cord in empty
raceways provided for other systems. Secure
wire or cord at each end.
f. Elbow for Low Energy Signal Systems: Use long
OW radius factory ells where linking sections of
raceway for installation of signal cable.
g. Motors, recessed luminaires and equipment
+ connections subject to movement or vibration,
use flexible metallic conduit.
h. Motors and equipment connections subject to
movement or vibration and subjected to any of
the following conditions; exterior location,
moist or humid atmosphere, water spray, oil or
grease use PVC coated liquid tight flexible
metallic conduit.
8. Concealed Raceway System: Conceal raceway systems
where possible. Where not possible, route conduit
,. parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
9. Branch Circuits: Do not change the intent of the
branch circuits or controls without Architect's
approval. Homeruns for 20 amp branch circuits may
be combined to a maximum of six conductors in a
homerun. Apply derating factors as required by NEC
310. Increase conductor size as needed.
r. 10 . Feeders: Do not combine or change feeder runs.
11. Unless otherwise indicated, provide raceway systems
for lighting, power and Class 1 remote-control and
signaling circuits. Provide raceway stub-up to
accessible ceiling for Class 2 and 3 remote-control
signaling and communication circuits.
B. Sleeves and Chases: Provide necessary rigid conduit
sleeves, openings and chases where conduits or cables are
required to pass through floors, ceiling or walls.
Maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies at
penetrations of walls, ceilings or floors.
C. Fire Wrap: Provide continuous one or three hour fire
blanket where required by code or noted. Provide wrap for
fire pump feeders per NEC and NFPA. Use endothermic
ceramic fiber blanket, UL listed with all required
mounting apparatus as directed by system manufacturer.
Interam-Ceramic or approved.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 9
awr
D. Foam Sealant: Foam sealant for use around conduit
penetrations to prevent passage of smoke, fire, toxic gas
or water. Maintain seal before, during and after fire..
In and around conduit for thermal break at penetration of
barrier between heated and unheated spaces. Chase
Technology Corporation CTC PR-855, Fire Foam, Thomas &
Betts.
E. Wires and Cables:
1. Conductor Installation: Install conductors with
care to avoid damage to insulation. Do not apply ft
greater tension on conductors than recommended by
manufacturer during installation. Use of pulling
compounds is permitted. Clean residue from exposed
conductors and raceway entrances after conductor
installation. Do not use pulling compounds for
installation of conductors connected to GFI circuit
breakers or GFI receptacles.
2 . Conductor Size and Quantity: Install no conductors
smaller than 12AWG unless otherwise shown. Provide
all required conductors for a fully operable system.
3 . Conductors in Cabinets: Cable and tree all wires in
panels and cabinets for power and control. Use
plastic ties in panels and cabinets. Tie and bundle
feeder conductors in wireways of panelboards.
F. Connectors: Retighten lugs and connectors for conductors
to equipment prior to substantial completion.
G. Boxes:
1. Location: Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to
ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.
2 . Round Boxes: Avoid using round boxes where conduit
must enter through side of box, which would result
in a difficult and insecure connection with a
locknut or bushing on the rounded surface.
3 . Anchoring: Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate Illi
upon which they are being mounted, or solidly embed
boxes in concrete or masonry.
4 . Special Application: Provide weatherproof outlets
for locations exposed to weather or moisture.
5. Knockout Closures: Provide knockout closures to cap
unused knockout holes where blanks have been
removed.
6. Outlet System: Provide electrical boxes and
fittings as required for a complete installation.
Include but not be limited to outlet boxes, junction
boxes, pull boxes, bushings, locknuts, and all other
necessary components.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 10
0M
Iwo 7. Code Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to
construction and installation of electrical boxes
and fittings and size boxes according to NEC 370,
except as noted otherwise.
8 . Flush Outlets in Insulated Spaces: Maintain
integrity of insulation and vapor barrier.
9. Mount center of outlet boxes as required by The
Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) , or noted on
Drawings, the following distance above the floor:
a. Control Switches: 48 inches.
b. Receptacles: 18 inches.
C. Telephone Outlets: 18 inches.
d. Fire Alarm Pull Stations: 48 inches.
e. Fire Alarm Horns and Visual Indicators: 80
+w
inches.
F. Wiring Devices:
1. Wall Mounted Receptacles: Install with long
dimensions oriented vertically at centerline height
shown on Drawings or specified herein.
�.. 2 . Vertical Alignment: When more than one outlet is
shown on the Drawings in close proximity to each
other, but at different elevations, align the
outlets on a common vertical center line for best
appearance. Verify with the Architect.
3 . Device Outlets at Counters: Install outlets above
countertops with long dimension oriented
horizontally.
G. Provide all NEC-required disconnect switches whether
rww specifically shown on the Drawings or not. Provide
disconnect switch at each motor location within 5 '-0"
unless otherwise noted. Coordinate fuse ampere rating
with installed equipment. Fuse ampere rating variance
between original design information and installed
equipment, size in accordance with Bussmann Fusetron 40C
recommendations. Do not provide fuses of lower ampere
+ + rating than motor starter thermal units.
H. Supporting Devices:
1. Verify mounting height of all luminaires or items
prior to installation when heights are not
indicated.
2 . Install vertical support members for equipment and
luminaires, straight and parallel to building walls.
Provide independent supports to structural member
W for electrical luminaires, materials, or equipment
installed in or on ceiling, walls or in void spaces
and/or over furred or suspended ceilings.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 11
w.
3 . Do not use other crafts' fastening devices as
supporting means for electrical equipment materials
or luminaires. Do not use supports and/or fastening
devices to support other than one particular item.
4 . Support conduits within 18 inches of outlets, boxes,
panels, cabinets and deflections. Maximum distance
between supports not to exceed 8-foot spacing.
5. Securely suspend all junction boxes, pull boxes or
other conduit terminating housings located above
suspended ceiling from the floor above or roof
structure to prevent sagging and swaying.
6. Provide seismic bracing per UBC requirements for
this building location.
I. Electrical Identification: r'li
1. Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations and
designations used on the Drawings with equipment
labels.
2 . Conductor Identification: Apply markers on each
conductor for power, control, signaling and
communications circuits.
3 . Install an engraved label on each major unit of
electrical equipment, including but not limited to
the following items: Disconnect switches, relays,
contactors, time switches, override switches,
service disconnects, distribution switches, branch
circuit panelboards, and central or master unit of
each electrical system including communication/
signal systems.
4 . Install engraved branch panelboard identification
labels on the inside of flush panels, visible when
door is opened. Install label on outside of surface
panel.
5. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not
otherwise indicated, at location for best
convenience of viewing without interference with
operation and maintenance of equipment.
3 . 05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Wiring Device Tests: Test wiring devices to ensure
electrical continuity of grounding connections, and after
energizing circuitry, to demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Test receptacles for line to neutral, line
to ground and neutral to ground faults. Correct any
defective wiring.
B. Feeder Test: Test conductor insulation for conformity
with 600V megger. Minimum insulation resistance
acceptable is 1 megohm for systems 600V and below. Submit
report to Architect/Engineer.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 - 12
<r.
3 . 06 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE—RATED WALL/FLOOR
ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide properly sized when providing sleeves or core-
drilled holes to accommodate their through penetration
items. Firestop all voids between sleeve or core-drilled
hole and pipe passing through, to meet the requirements of
ASTM E814 .
w
END OF SECTION
ow
+r.
wr
aw
w
rw
wM
lime
+rr
ww
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16050 — 13
ow
ice►
SECTION 16400
SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1. 01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Grounding.
2. Branch Panelboards.
3 . Fuses and Circuit Breakers.
wiw 4 . Contactors.
5. Time Switches and Photoelectric Switches.
;w.
1. 02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Grounding Design Requirements:
1. Ground all metal raceway systems.
2 . Bond all junction or pull boxes to feeder ground
conductor or grounded metal raceway.
3 . Performance Requirements: Supplement the grounded
neutral of the secondary distribution system with an
equipment grounding system to properly safeguard the
equipment and personnel. Install equipment
grounding such that all metallic structures,
enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes,
cabinets, machine frames, portable equipment and
�r other conductive items in close proximity with
electrical circuits operate continuously at ground
potential and provide a low impedance path for
possible ground fault currents.
B. Panelboard Design Requirements:
w 1. Minimum Branch Circuit Panelboard Integrated
Equipment Short Circuit Rating, 10, 000 RMS
symmetrical amperes at service voltage less than
250VAC.
2 . All Field Replaceable Lugs: Compression type, no
set screw lugs allowed.
3 . Cable and tree conductors in panelboards with
`""' plastic ties.
4 . Provide all panels and circuit breakers UL Series
rated.
5. If series rating is used to provide required fault
current interrupting capacity, identify all
equipment as required by NEC.
liw
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16400 - 1
+wr
ow
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for meter socket enclosure and meter
socket.
B. Panelboard Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings of
panelboard assemblies including dimensions of enclosures
and flush trim covers. Indicate top and bottom conduit
entry areas.
C. Overcurrent Protective Devices Product Data: Provide
instantaneous let-through current curves and average
melting time current curves for fuses supplied to project.
Provide product data and time/current trip curves for
circuit breakers supplied to project. N1
D. Submit product catalog cut sheets for contactors, time
switches and photoelectric switches.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 EQUIPMENT
A. Pipe Grounding Clamp: Mechanical ground connector with
cable parallel or perpendicular to pipe. Burndy GAR, O-Z
Gedney, Thomas & Betts.
B. Main Distribution Panelboard and Branch Panelboards
Construction: VA
1. Existing.
2 . Fusible Switches:
a. Provide fusible switches quick-make, quick-
break with fuse rejection feature for Class R
fuses up to 600 amps and group mounted in
panel-type construction.
b. Provide switches of 30-200 amperes with plug-on
line side connections and built in fuse pullers
(30-100A units) .
C. Provide each switch enclosed in a separate
steel enclosure. The enclosure will employ a
hinged cover for access to the fuses which will
be interlocked with the operating handle to
prevent opening the cover when the switch is in
the "ON" position. Construct this interlock so
that it can be released with a standard
electrician's tool for testing fuses without
interrupting service.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16400 - 2
w d. Provide the units with padlocking provisions in
the "OFF" position and the operating handle
position giving positive switch position
indication, i.e. : red for "ON" , black for
aw "OFF" .
3 . Provide switches which pass industry standard I2t
withstandability tests and fuse tests suitable for
use as service equipment.
4. Branch Panelboard Enclosure: Flush panelboards
rated 400A or less provide maximum enclosure depth
of 5-3/4 inches. Paint all surfaces with medium
"" light grey finish applied by electro-deposition
process over an iron phosphate pretreatment or
galvanized metal.
5. Branch Panelboard Bussing: Copper or aluminum bar
with suitable electroplating (tin) for corrosion
control at connection. Provide ground bar to
accommodate specified terminal lugs. Predrill bus
for bolt-on type circuit breakers.
6. Branch Panelboard Cover: Front cover with hinged
door, flush lift latch and lock. Provide two keys
per panel. Key all branch circuit panelboards
alike. Paint all surfaces with medium light grey
finish suitable for field painting to match wall
finish. Surface panels to have metal trim covers
with no sharp edges or corners. Surface panel
enclosure finish to cover finish.
aw C. Fuses: Dual element, time delay, current limiting,
nonrenewable type, rejection feature. L Class RKS,
1/10-600A. Provide fuse pullers for complete range of
imW fuses. Manufactured by Bussmann, Gould-Shawmut,
Littelfuse, or approved.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. One, two or three pole bolt on, single handle common
trip, rated 15A-800A, 600VAC or 250VAC as indicated
on Drawings.
2 . Overcenter toggle-type mechanism, quick-make, quick-
break action. Trip indication is by handle
position.
3 . Calibrate for operation in 40C ambient temperature.
4 . 15A-100A Breakers: Permanent trip unit containing
individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in
each pole.
5. Greater than 100A Breakers: Variable magnetic trip
elements set by a single adjustment. Provide push-
to-trip button on cover on breaker for mechanical
tripping.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16400 - 3
6. Provide all circuit breakers series rated and when
series combination ratings are applied, identify all
equipment enclosures as required by NEC 110-22 .
7. Manufacturers: General Electric, Square-D, Siemens,
Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, or approved. 4
E. Fuse Cabinet: Provide metallic cabinet surface mounted,
with internal shelves, trim cover with hinged and latched
door. Size cabinet such that spare fuses required by
these Documents do not exceed 50 percent of cabinet
volume. Provide engraved label to identify as Spare Fuse
Cabinet. Manufactured by Square-D, Siemens, Circle AW,
Queen, or approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Raceway Grounding:
1. Ground all metallic raceway systems. Bond to ground
terminal with code size jumper except where code
size or larger grounding conductor is included with
circuit, use grounding bushing with lay-in lug.
2 . Connect all metal raceways, which terminate within
an enclosure but without mechanical connection to
the enclosure, by grounding bushings and ground wire
to the grounding bus.
3 . Install ground bushings on all metallic raceway ad
terminations in pull boxes, panelboards and motor
control centers for service and feeders.
4 . Install ground bushings on all metallic raceway 1
terminations in pull boxes, panelboards and motor
control centers for circuits with overcurrent
protection set at 60A and greater.
5. Where equipment supply conductors are in flexible
metallic conduit, install stranded copper equipment
grounding conductor from outlet box to equipment
frame.
6. Install grounding conductor, code size minimum
unless noted on Drawings, in all nonmetallic raceway
systems.
B. Feeders and Branch Circuits Grounding:
1. Install continuous copper ground conductors within
the following circuits; feeders, circuits for
computer systems and other circuits as indicated on
the Drawings.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16400 - 4
err
2 . Where installed in a continuous solid metallic
w.� raceway system and larger sizes are not indicated on
the Drawings, provide ground conductors for feeders
and branch circuits sized in accordance with Table
250-95. Provide copper conductor of size indicated
for aluminum.
3 . Install isolated ground conductors for electrically
sensitive equipment. Install isolated grounding
conductors isolated from the equipment ground system
except at the common ground connection at the
service equipment. Provide isolated ground bus in
�'" panelboards isolated from the equipment ground
system.
err C. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures and Panelboards Grounding:
Bond grounding conductors to enclosure with specified
conductors and lugs. Install lugs only on thoroughly
wr
cleaned contact surfaces.
D. Motors, Equipment and Appliance Grounding: Install code
size equipment grounding conductor from outlet box to
(motor) equipment frame or manufacturer 's designated
ground terminal.
E. Receptacle Grounding: Connect ground terminal of
receptacle to equipment ground system by No. 14 conductor
bolted to outlet box except isolated grounds where noted.
Self grounding nature of receptacle devices does not
eliminate conductor bolted to outlet box.
F. Branch Panelboards:
1. Install Branch Panelboards surface or flush mounted
in accessible locations as indicated on Drawings.
ow Maintain or exceed minimum clearances required by
code.
2 . Where flush panels are installed, verify available
recessing depth and coordinate wall framing with
other Divisions.
3 . Feeder conductors to enter directly in line with lug
terminals wherever practicable. Feeder conductors,
except ground and neutral, not to exceed 45 degree
deflection from raceway entry to feeder phase lugs.
4 . Paint panel cover and surface mounted enclosure (if
surface allowed) to match finished wall color or
finished spaces.
5. Where panels are installed flush, provide one spare
conduit for each 4 connected conduits from panel to
accessible space above and below the panel.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16400 - 5
.r.
G. Fuses: For each class and ampere rating of fuse
installed, provide the following quantities of spares for + 1
quantity of fuses installed:
1. 1-24 Provide 6 spare.
2 . 25-48 Provide 9 spare.
3 . 49 and above Provide 12 spare
rll
H. Contactors:
1. Provide vibration isolation mounting pads for
electrically held contactors installed within or on
walls which are common to occupied spaces. Isolate
terminals and operating mechanisms from enclosure.
2 . Install contactors and relays to reduce noise such
that it will not create a disturbance or distraction
in the areas in which such equipment is located.
END OF SECTION
f
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16400 - 6
SECTION 16500
VM
LIGHTING
aw
PART 1 GENERAL
,w, 1. 01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
ism 1. Luminaires and lampholders.
2 . Lamps.
3 . Ballasts.
1. 02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, Record Drawings and Operating and
wr Maintenance Manuals.
B. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting,
to material, required clearances, terminations, wiring and
connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts,
diffusers, louvers, lamps and controls.
C. Submit manufacturer's data for each type of electronic
ballasts.
1. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Provide luminaires acceptable to the code authority
for application and location as indicated.
2 . Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to
"' lamp materials, lamp ballasts and transformers, and
luminaires.
3 . Comply with applicable NEMA standards pertaining to
lighting equipment.
4 . Provide luminaires and lampholders which comply with
UL standards and have been UL listed and labeled for
,rw location and use indicated.
5. Comply with NEC 410 as applicable to installation
and construction of luminaires.
6. Comply with the fallout and retention requirements
of UBC 52 for diffusers, baffles, louvers, etc.
r..
r..
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16500 - 1
B. Warranty: 0
1. Ballast Manufacturer's Warranty:
a. Not less than two years for magnetic type
ballasts and five years for electronic type
ballasts, based on date of manufacturer
embossed on ballast, current with installation
date.
b. Warranty includes normal cost of labor for
replacement of ballast.
2 . Lamp Warranty: Thirty days for incandescent, six
months for compact fluorescent, twelve months for
fluorescent and HID lamps.
PART 2 PRODUCTS u
2 . 01 LUMINAIRES
A. Luminaires: Refer to description and manufacturers in
Luminaire Schedule.
B. Where recessed luminaires are installed in cavities Vii►
intended to be insulated, provide IC rated luminaires or
other code-approved installation.
C. Luminaires installed under canopies, roof or open porches
and similar damp or wet locations, UL labeled as suitable
for damp or wet locations.
D. Recessed Luminaires: Provide luminaire frame compatible
with the ceiling material installed at the particular
luminaire location. Provide the proper trim, frame and
modify the luminaire to fit the location and ceiling
material.
E. Finishes:
1. The manufacturer standard finish (unless otherwise
indicated) over a corrosion resistant primer. r
2 . Interior Light Reflecting Finishes: White or
specular finish with not less than 85 percent
reflectances.
3 . Exterior Finishes: As indicated in the Luminaire
Schedule or on the Drawings. Refer cases of
uncertain applicability to the Architect for
resolution prior to release for fabrication.
F. Light Transmitting Components:
1. Plastic diffusers, molded or extruded of 100 percent
virgin acrylic.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16500 - 2
wW
+�. 2 . Prismatic acrylic, extruded, flat diffusers, 0. 125
inch overall thickness, unless otherwise noted.
G. Fluorescent Luminaires:
1. Provide all open lamp fluorescent luminaires without
diffusers or guards with turret type, spring loaded
sockets.
2. Provide special circuit disconnecting lamp sockets
for fluorescent luminaires with dimming ballasts.
3 . To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, wire lamps
within luminaire with the outermost lamp at both
sides of the luminaire on the same ballast, the next
inward pair on another ballast and so on to the
innermost lamp (or pair of lamps) .
4 . Provide luminaires with an internal fuse to protect
the electrical power supply from internal component
failure. Provide each ballast with short-circuit
ow protection.
5. Provide wire lamp guards on all exposed lamp
fluorescent luminaires.
to
2 . 02 BALLASTS
W, A. Ballasts, General:
1. Provide ballasts rated for specified lamps, i.e. ,
T-8 rated ballasts where T-8 lamps specified.
2 . Thermal Protection: Internal UL Class P with
automatic reset.
3 . Power Factors: Not less than 90 percent unless
,r. otherwise indicated.
4 . Sound Ratings: Rating A, except where not available
as standard products from any manufacturer. Provide
the quietest ratings available.
` 5. Input Voltage: Match branch circuit supply voltage;
refer to Drawings.
6. Provide number of ballasts in luminaire(s) to
iW provide multi-level switching as indicated on
Drawings.
w B. Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts:
1. Provide ballasts which meet the requirements of UL
935 and bear the appropriate UL label.
2 . Electrical Characteristics:
a. Provide electronic ballasts which withstand
input power line transients as defined in ANSI
+tr. C62 . 41, Category A and IEEE 587. The ballasts
tolerate a line voltage variation of plus or
minus 10 percent.
WW b. Power Factor: 95 percent or higher.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16500 - 3
ON
W.
C. Lamp Crest Factor: 1.7 or less for rapid start
ballasts and 1.85 or less for instant start
ballasts.
d. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not to exceed to 10
percent of the input current.
e. Comply with FCC rules and regulations Part 18,
Class A concerning the generation of both
electromagnetic interference and radio
frequency interference.
f. Provide relative light output equal to
electromagnetic ballasts in a 2-light lensed
luminaire using energy saving ballasts and +
energy saving lamps. The average ballast
factor (BF) is a minimum of 0.88 .
4 . Performance Characteristics:
a. Input Wattage: Not to exceed 85 percent of the
value for their energy efficient core and coil
counterparts.
b. Start and operate lamps at 50F and energy
savings lamps at 60F. Ballast case temperature
is 25C rise above a 40C ambient.
C. Provide constant light output throughout
minimum input voltage variations of plus or
minus 20 percent from nominal 120V or 277V.
5. Manufacturer: Advance RCN/VCN Series, Motorola MTI,
or approved.
2 . 03 LAMPS
A. Provide lamps for all luminaires.
B. Fluorescent Lamps:
1. Unless otherwise noted, 3500K minimum C.R. I. 80,
length and wattage as noted in Luminaire Schedule.
General Electric, Osram/Sylvania, Philips.
2 . Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Quad Tube, 3500K, Unless
otherwise noted.
3 . Provide fluorescent lamps by the same manufacturer
General Electric, Osram/Sylvania, Philips.
C. Incandescent: 130V Rated. General Electric,
Osram/Sylvania, Philips.
frl
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16500 - 4
1
it
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 COORDINATION
' A. Verification of Conditions: Verify ceiling construction,
recessing depth and other construction details prior to
release of luminaire for shipment. Refer cases of
uncertain applicability to the Architect for resolution
prior to release of luminaires for shipment.
B. Provide all lighting indicated on the Drawings with a
luminaire of the type designated and appropriate for the
location. Where outlet symbols appear on the Drawings
without a type designation provide a luminaire the same as
those used in similar or like locations.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install luminaire of types indicated where shown and at
indicated heights; in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and with recognized industry
practices; to ensure that luminaires comply with
requirements and serve intended purposes.
B. Align, mount and level the luminaires uniformly. Use ball
hangers for suspended stem mounted luminaires. Install
luminaire poles plumb and straight.
C. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for
equipment. Where the indicated locations for the
luminaires conflict with the locations for equipment,
change the locations for the luminaire by the minimum
distance necessary as directed by the Architect.
D. Suspended Luminaires: Mounting heights indicate the
clearances between the bottom of the luminaire and the
finished floors.
E. Luminaire Supports:
1. Support Luminaires: Anchor supports to the
structural slab or to structural members within a
partition, or above a suspended ceiling.
2 . Maintain the luminaire positions after cleaning and
relamping.
3 . Support the luminaires without causing the ceiling
or partition to deflect.
4 . Provide recessed fluorescent luminaires with two
support wires as outlined in the UBC.
5. Comply with Section 16050.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16500 - 5
+Yrr
too
F. Wiring:
1. Recessed luminaires to be installed using flexible
metallic conduit with luminaire conductors to the
branch circuit conductors in a nearby accessible
junction box over the ceiling. Junction box
fastened to a building structural member within six
feet of the luminaire.
2 . Install luminaires for lift-out and removal from
ceiling pattern without disconnecting conductors or
defacing the ceiling materials.
3 . Flexible connections where permitted to exposed
luminaires; neat and straight, without excess slack,
attached to the support device.
4 . Install junction box, flexible conduit and high at
temperature insulated conductors for through wiring
of recessed luminaires.
3 . 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Focus and adjust the floodlights, spotlights and other
adjustable luminaires, with the Architect, at such time of r1
day or night as required.
B. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at
completion of Work.
C. Clean paint splatters, dirt, fingerprints, and debris from
installed luminaires.
D. Touch up damaged luminaire finish at completion of work.
E. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of
work.
19
END OF SECTION
llil
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16500 - 6
W, SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
ow
PART 1 GENERAL
f„ 1. 01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire Alarm System Operation.
2 . Fire Alarm Equipment.
3 . Fire Alarm Wiring.
+rr
B. Modify the existing fire alarm system and extend to
include the new building addition. Furnish and install an
integrated, proprietary, monitoring and control system for
a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein. The
system includes processing units, local data panels and
peripheral alarm devices and outputs for specified control
W. functions.
C. System includes, but not be limited to, all controls,
power supplies, signal initiating and sounding devices,
modules, batteries, relays, conduit, annunciators, remote
site signal transmitters, wiring and all other equipment
necessary for a complete and operating system.
D. Contact governing authorities prior to bid and provide all
required fire alarm devices and components as directed by
i . governing codes as interpreted by governing authorities
even if devices are not indicated on Drawings.
E. Provide all devices shown on the Drawings in addition to
all code-required devices.
F. Related Work:
1. Section 16050, Basic Materials and Methods.
2 . Section 15950, Controls.
aw
1. 02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
No
1. Installation subject to inspection and approval of
federal, state and local authorities.
,err 2 . Provide equipment listed by NFPA 71, 72A, B, C, D,
and UL 864 and 1076 requirements and is UL listed
and FM approved by the Oregon State Fire Marshal.
ON
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16721 - 1
ow
B. Reference Standards:
1. NFPA 72 .
2 . NEC.
3 . UBC - 1991.
4 . Underwriters' Laboratory listed.
5. NFPA 90A.
6. NFPA 101 - 1994 Edition.
7. UL UOJZ Listing.
1. 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings and product data in accordance with
Section 16010.
B. Indicate system components, size of components and
location.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions and maintenance and repair data.
E. Submit complete device and wiring diagrams on
architectural sheets at original drawing scales with
indication of device type and physical location, battery
calculations, and component description to the local fire
authorities having jurisdiction, for approval, prior to
construction.
F. Submit, prior to final acceptance, a letter confirming
that all inspections have been completed and the system is
installed and functioning in accordance with the
Specifications. Include manufacturer representative's
certification of installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish all equipment specified in this Section by one
manufacturer, Pyrotronics, Notifier, FCI, Edwards, or
Simplex.
r
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16721 - 2
r�r 2 . 02 FUNCTIONS
A. System Supervision: Provide electrically supervised Class
A system, with supervised alarm initiating and alarm
signalling circuits. Occurrence of single ground or open
condition in initiating or signaling circuit places
circuit in "trouble" mode. Component or power supply
failure places system in "trouble" mode. Occurrence of
single ground or open condition on alarm initiating
circuit or on signalling circuit does not disable that
circuit or control panel from transmitting "alarm" .
B. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Activation of manual or
automatic indicating device causes system to enter alarm,
++ � which includes the following operations:
1. Sound and display local fire alarm signaling
devices.
2 . Transmit signal to remote station equipment, i.e.
local fire department or Owner's selected vendor.
Provide necessary connections and transmission
r� equipment.
3 . Indicate location of alarm zone on fire alarm
control and annunciator panels.
rr 4 . Transmit signal, by zone, to building smoke removal
system.
5. Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to
initiate shutdown of fans and damper operations.
ow 6. Transmit signal to release door hold open devices.
7 . Transmit signals to building elevator control panel
to initiate elevator recall.
AW
C. Alarm Reset: Key-accessible reset function resets alarm
system out of alarm if alarm initiating circuits have
Wo cleared.
D. Trouble Sequence of operation: System trouble, including
grounding or open circuit of supervised circuit, or power
No or system failure, or fire sprinkler tamper activation
causes system to enter "trouble" mode including the
following operations:
1. Visual and audible trouble alarm by zone at control
panel.
2 . Visual and audible trouble alarm at annunciator
panels.
3 . Provide manual "acknowledge" function at control
panel to silence audible trouble alarm, visual alarm
remains displayed until initiating trouble is
cleared.
4 . Transmit "trouble" signal to remote station
equipment.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16721 - 3
r
+r.
E. Lamp Test: Manual "lamp test" function causes alarm and
trouble indication at each zone at fire alarm control
panel. Provide "lamp test" function at each annunciator
panel.
F. Drill Sequence of Operation:
1. Manual Drill Function Alarm Mode Operation:
a. Sound and display local fire alarm signalling
devices.
b. Indicate location of alarm zone on fire alarm
control panel and on remote annunciators.
C. Notify remote station monitoring.
2 . Provide keyed drill and reset switch at a location
as directed by the Architect.
G. Zoning: Provide zoning as required by codes. Provide
additional zones in the existing fire alarm panel. Follow
schedule concept as listed below:
1. Each building floor is an independent zone.
2 . Each building wing is an independent zone.
3 . Buildings not defined by multiple floors and wings
is zoned by fire separations and HVAC control zones.
4 . Kitchen is an independent zone.
5. Each fire sprinkler flow switch is an independent
zone.
6. Each duct detector is an independent zone.
7 . Elevator shaft detectors is an independent zone.
8 . Mechanical/Electrical Room is an independent zone.
2 . 03 MATERIALS i
A. Control Panel:
1. Modify and add additional zones and power supply in
the existing fire alarm panel to accommodate the
building addition. Provide the control panel dead
front, modular, complete with power supply, in this r
Specification, standby battery trickle charger,
ground fault supervision, and full facility to add
four additional modules. Incorporate each system di
function in the control panel module mounted in a
NEMA-1 enclosure assembly and interconnected by
plug-in power and supervisory jacks.
2 . Each circuit includes individual supervisory and
alarm function and is be so arranged that a fault
condition in any circuit will not affect the proper
operation of any other circuits. Zone functions are p
modular, plug-in devices, with no more than 2
circuits per module. There is one supervised zone
circuit for each annunciation point.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16721 - 4
�i
3 . Provide supplementary relay modules for control of
all external devices (door release, etc. and remote
system status indication) and for providing alarm
signals to external equipment requiring fire alarm
signals. Provide provision for interfacing to the
building control system.
4 . Provide the system microprocessor based and of
modular design. The control panel contains, but not
be limited to:
a. Initiation circuits.
b. Alarm indicating appliance circuits.
C. Supervised Annunciator Circuits.
d. Local energy, shunt master box, or reverse
polarity remote station connection.
e. Form C alarm contacts (2 amp) .
f. Form C trouble contacts (2 amp) .
g. Earth ground fault supervision circuit.
h. Combination MOV/gas discharge transient
suppression circuit per signal circuit.
i. Automatic battery charger.
j . Manual disconnect switch per zone.
k. Battery meters voltmeter and ammeter.
1. Brownout Supervision of AC power.
M. All other components as required by local codes
and product descriptions or functions shown on
the Drawings and/or described in these
Specifications.
B. Power Supply: Provide power supply, within control panel,
adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors,
remote annunciators, door holders, smoke dampers, relays,
alarm signaling devices, and other connected devices.
C. Remote Site Signal Transmitter (Auto Dialer) :
Electrically supervised, capable of transmitting alarm and
trouble signals over telephone lines to remote station
receiver. Signal transmitter interfaces fully with
receiver station of local fire department or owners
selected vendor. Verify requirements and provide call
sequence and message as directed by the Owner. Sescoa
5100, Silent Knight 5104 , or approved.
D. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay
contacts for each detection zone to provide accessary
functions as described, required by codes for equipment
shown on the Electrical, Mechanical and Architectural
Drawings.
E. Auxiliary Switches: Provide auxiliary equipment control
switches, trouble acknowledge switches, drill and silence
switches with labeled status indicating lights for each
switch.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16721 - 5
+irri
2 . 04 INITIATING DEVICES
A. Manual Stations: Semi-flush polycarbonate double or
single action as directed, with auxiliary contacts, color
as elected by the architect. Stations do not allow
closure without keyed reset. Glass break only where
specifically noted. Glass break stations allow testing
without breaking glass, provide spare glass. Similar to
Notifier LGN/LRG Series.
B. Photoelectric Detectors: Rate-compensating fixed
sensitivity with self compensating circuitry and auxiliary
relay contacts. Provide integral self restoring thermal
element rated at 135F. Visual indication of detector
actuation. Led source multiple cell. 360 degree smoke
entry, functional test switch, 2 and 4 wire operation, 900
square foot coverage, insect screen, vandal resistant
locking feature.
t
C. Ionization Detector: Dual chamber 360 degree smoke entry,
visual latching operation indicator, insect screen, field
adjustable sensitivity, test switch, tamper resistant,
solid state voltage regulation, integral 135 degree rate
compensating thermal element, auxiliary relay contacts.
D. Wire Guards: Seven inch diameter chrome steel round
guard. Provide where detectors subject to abuse, where
noted on the Drawings, and where required by code.
E. Detector Bases: Non addressable bases 2 or 4 wire as
required by system or as directed. Compatible with twist
lock smoke or heat detection devices.
2 . 05 ANNUNCIATORS
A. Standard remote Annunciator: LED current limited flush or
surface mount as directed, zone capacity as required by
zone schedule. Red alarm and yellow trouble light, lamp
test switch, alarm and trouble buzzer, buzzer silenced LED inti
actuated by buzzer silence switch, English language
identification on annunciator by zone name, i.e. "Second
Floor Smoke Detectors" , not "Zone 111 . Drill alarm key
activation and reset switch. Minimum size 12 inch by 12
inch with UV stabilized lexan or equal face plate, back
box, and signal modules. Self-contained suitable for wet
location where located exterior.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16721 - 6
imw
im 2 . 06 BATTERIES AND CHARGING SYSTEM
A. Loss of normal and emergency power automatically cause the
system to transfer to battery power. Indicate battery
No power operation by a yellow lamp and audible annunciation
at the control panel, with sequential pulse signal. Upon
return of the system power, unit recharges batteries to
;f„ full capacity and maintain battery on float charge.
B. Provide storage batteries of sufficient capacity to
AW operate the fire alarm system under normal supervisory
condition for 24 hours and operate alarm signals for 15
minutes at any time during the 24 hour period. Provide
trickle charge adequate capacity to maintain the battery
Aw fully charged with automatic rate charge. Provide
batteries, sealed gel cell type. Place batteries in a
separate, locking cabinet manufactured for the purpose.
aw Do not install cabinets or equipment below the battery
cabinet. Do not locate cabinets in ceiling space.
2 . 07 INDICATING DEVICES
am
A. Strobes and Horns: Provide quantities and locate to
provide minimum sound level of 15 dBA above building
o ambient in all areas. Rate strobes and horns between
minimum, 81 dBA and maximum 100 dBA at 10 feet in an
anechoic chamber on an A-weighted scale. Provide all
interior horns and strobes with ADA approved strobe. At
"' exterior locations provide minimum 8 inch diameter strobe.
Strobe and horn locations shown on the Drawings are to be
provided in addition to those required to meet minimum
tier code requirements. Evaluate building architectural and
acoustical characteristics and provide, in addition to
devices shown, all required devices to satisfy all local
am and state/federal minimum audibility requirements.
Provide device layout on full scale Architectural Drawings
showing code approved horn/strobe layout during the
submittal phase. Provide tests in the presence of the
to local fire authority and the architect, to prove
strobe/horn quantities and locations meet minimum
requirements. Provide and install additional
strobes/horns required as a result of these tests without
additional costs.
B. Flasher Strobes: White diffusers, red letters, ADA and UL
1971 approved, flush frame, flash rate per local codes.
Synchronize strobes as required by ADA to prevent seizure
reactions.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16721 - 7
rrr
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Obtain approval of system design from fire authority prior
to installation. Do not begin installation without
approval from the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Fire alarm conductor terminations in control panel and
annunciator panels on terminal strips with separate point
for each conductor number. All such strips identified as j
shown in wiring diagram attached to inside of door of
control panel. Connect wiring neatly to terminal strips.
Connect clip with nylon cable straps or lace with just
cord. Set up termination of cabling so that sections of
the system may be isolated or shorted out for servicing.
C. From fire alarm control panel, make connection to motor
control centers and related equipment as required for fan
system control.
3 . 02 WIRING
A. In accordance with manufacturer' s instructions and as
required by authorities, provide all wiring, conduit and
outlet boxes required for the erection of a complete
system as described herein, as shown on the Drawings, and
as required by governing authorities.
B. Provide all wiring to meet the requirements of all
national, state and local electrical codes. Provide color
coded wiring as recommended and specified by the
manufacturer, minimum size number 14 . All wires tagged at
all junction points and be tested free from grounds or
crossed between conductors. Over all junction boxes
labeled and exact position and label noted on the Record
Drawings.
C. Provide all final connections between equipment and the
wiring system approved by a representative of the
manufacturer.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16721 - 8
3 . 03 SYSTEM VERIFICATION
A. Upon completion of the installation, subject the system to
operational tests and when all necessary corrections have
been accomplished, advise the Architect who will schedule
a final inspection test with the Owner. Ensure the
connections to the fire alarm system have been in service
for at least 10 days prior to the final inspection.
Furnish all instruments, labor and materials required for
the tests and a qualified technician to conduct the tests.
Correct any deficiencies found at no cost and system
retested as necessary, prior to final acceptance. Tests
include the following:
1. An operation of each signal initiating device (all
smoke detectors, heat detectors, pull stations,
doors, process and facilities control sequences) .
2 . An operation of each indicating device (alarm horn
and alarm lamp) .
3 . Operation of all features of the system under normal
operation.
'■' 4 . Operation of all supervisory features of the system.
5. Operation of all features of the systems on standby
power with primary power off.
W„ 6. Documentation by download of control panel memory.
B. Upon completion of the installation of fire alarm
equipment, provide to the Architect a signed, written
statement substantially in the form as follows: "The
undersigned having been engaged as the Electrical
Contractor on the facility confirms that the fire alarm
equipment was installed in accordance with the Drawings,
Specifications, wiring diagrams, instructions, directions
provided by the manufacturer, and requirements of the
governing authorities" .
3 . 04 EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION AND PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. At the direction of the Architect the equipment supplier
of the system will provide factory trained representative
to demonstrate the operation of the fire alarm system
equipment and to instruct the Owner in its operation.
Provide names and date of instruction prior to final
acceptance.
m
a+
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16721 - 9
rr
3 . 05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide three sets of manuals to the Architect prior to
final acceptance. Provide manuals containing professional
developed Record Drawings, battery type and battery
calculations, spare parts list, operating procedures,
trouble shooting guide, program printout, data file on
disk and a one year warranty agreement including parts and
labor. Warranty period begins upon the date of final
acceptance.
END OF SECTION
11
r
1
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16721 - 10
SECTION 16906
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
PART 1 GENERAL
r. 1. 01 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections: Section 16050, Basic Materials and
Methods.
Wo
1. 02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ik+ A. The occupancy sensors shall sense the presence of human
activity within the desired space and control the on/off
function of the room lights automatically.
wW B. Upon detection of human activity by the detector, initiate
a time delay to maintain the lights on for a preset period
of time. Field adjustable time delay setting from 30
seconds to 15 minutes.
C. Sensors shall have factory set PIR sensing sensitivity for
maximum sensitivity. Provide time delay at ten minutes.
D. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
rr
E. All line voltage sensors, control units, and relays UL
listed.
1. 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide on reproducible architectural floor plan layout of
sensors indicating their sensing distribution.
B. Provide wiring diagrams indicating low voltage and line
voltage wiring requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
irr
2 . 01 PASSIVE INFRARED SENSORS - GENERAL
A. The passive infrared sensors shall detect presence, in the
floor area being controlled, by detecting changes in the
Infrared energy. Detect small movements such as when a
person is writing while seated at a desk.
B. Provide a temperature compensated dual element sensor and
a multi element fresnel lens.
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16906 - 1
i.r
C. The sensor shall utilize DIP switch adjustments for "on"
mode operation, time delay, ai sensitivity.
D. Provide a daylight filter whic- ensures that the sensor is
insensitive to short-wavelength infrared waves such as
those emitted by the sun.
E. The sensors not to protrude more than 1-1/2 inches from
the wall or ceiling and should blend in aesthetically.
F. Conceal adjustments and mounting hardware under a
removable cover to prevent tampering with adjustments and
hardware.
G. Low Voltage Sensors:
1. Sensor shall provide coverage to completely cover
the controlled area.
2 . Sensors shall operate on 24 volts DC power.
3 . Sensors shall operate remote power switch packs.
4 . Sensors can be wired in parallel to allow coverage
of large areas.
5. Manufacturers: The Watt Stopper CI Series or
approved.
H. Wall Switch Sensors:
1. Three hundred square feet area coverage, with a
field of view of 180 degrees.
2 . Two wire plus ground wire completely self-contained
sensor system that fits into a standard single gang
box. Internal transformer power supply, a latching
dry contact relay switching mechanism compatible
with electronic ballasts, compact fluorescent, and
inductive loads. Triac and other harmonic
generating devices are not allowed.
3 . Rated to switch loads from 0 to 800 watt
incandescent or fluorescent 120 volts and 0 to 1000
watts for 277 volts.
4 . Provide adjustable daylight feature that holds
lighting "off" when a desired footcandle level is
present. i
5. Provide integral off override switch with no leakage
current to the load or ground.
6. Provide hard 1. 0 mm poly IR2 lens, soft lens is not
acceptable.
7 . Manufacturers: The Watt Stopper WA Series, or
approved.
1W
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16906 - 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install occupancy sensors as directed by manufacturer's
instructions. Complete all electrical connections to all
control circuits, occupancy sensors, power supply pack and
low voltage wiring.
B. Verify with manufacturer's representative that the sensors
are laid out in compliance to manufacturers published
sensing distribution. Provide additional sensors for
complete coverage of the space being sensed.
3 . 02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Use manufacturer's published testing and adjusting
procedures to adjust sensors time delay, daylight
sensitivity, and passive infrared sensitivity to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
rr.
END OF SECTION
rr
+rr
+�r
it
rr
SEPT 1996 POLICE DEPT ADDITION & REMODEL, TIGARD 16906 - 3